Operation Manual
The Steinberg Documentation Team: Cristina Bachmann, Martina Becker, Heiko Bischoff, Lillie Harris, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer, Benjamin Schütte Translation: Ability InterBusiness Solutions (AIBS), Moon Chen, Jérémie Dal Santo, Rosa Freitag, Josep Llodra Grimalt, Vadim Kupriianov, Filippo Manfredi, Roland Münchow, Boris Rogowski, Sergey Tamarovsky This document provides improved access for people who are blind or have low vision.
Table of Contents 10 New features 15 15 15 16 17 19 Introduction Platform-independent documentation Usage of musical terms Documentation structure Conventions How you can reach us 20 20 21 21 22 23 23 24 25 26 26 27 27 Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Projects in Dorico Modes in Dorico Flows in Dorico Players in Dorico Instruments in Dorico Popovers Notes and rests in Dorico Rhythmic position Layouts in Dorico Page templates in Dorico Options dialogs in Dorico Pro 29 29 42 5
Table of Contents 632 633 635 639 642 652 656 659 662 666 688 Changing the horizontal justification of final systems Enabling/Disabling condensing Margins Staff size Staff spacing Casting off System breaks Frame breaks Tacets Condensing Part formatting propagation 829 829 830 830 835 692 692 693 694 695 Properties Properties panel Local vs.
Table of Contents 909 910 911 915 917 918 918 919 919 921 923 924 926 928 929 929 930 931 932 933 934 972 973 974 Changing the arrangement of compound chord symbols Erasing the background of chord symbols Parenthesized chord symbols Chord symbols imported from MusicXML Chord diagrams Chord diagram components Project-wide engraving options for chord diagrams Project-wide note input options for chord diagrams Hiding/Showing chord diagrams Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids Hiding/Showing fingerings i
Table of Contents 1047 1047 1050 1050 1051 Grace note size Grace note slashes Grace note stems Grace note beams Grace notes in playback 1131 Appearances/Styles of harmonics 1052 1053 Holds and pauses Project-wide engraving options for holds and pauses Types of fermatas Types of breath marks Types of caesuras Positions of holds and pauses 1136 1136 1137 1138 Ornaments Project-wide engraving options for ornaments Changing ornament intervals Positions of ornaments 1140 1140 1141 1142 Trills Hiding/Sh
Table of Contents 1196 1198 Project-wide engraving options for jazz articulations Positions of jazz articulations Changing the type/length of existing jazz articulations Changing the line style of smooth jazz articulations Deleting jazz articulations 1275 1275 1276 1276 1277 1278 1278 1279 Markers Project-wide engraving options for markers Hiding/Showing markers Changing the vertical position of markers Editing marker text Editing the marker/timecode font styles Changing the timecodes of markers Defini
Table of Contents 1329 1331 1332 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 Implicit vs.
Table of Contents 1501 1502 1502 1503 1504 Changing the appearance of multi-note half note tremolos Deleting tremolos Rhythmic positions of notes with tremolos Moving tremolo strokes Tremolos in playback 1506 1506 1507 1508 1509 1509 1510 1511 1514 Tuplets Project-wide engraving options for tuplets Nested tuplets Turning existing notes into tuplets Turning tuplets into normal notes Allowing/Disallowing tuplets to span barlines Tuplet beams Tuplet brackets Tuplet numbers/ratios 1518 1518 Unpitched perc
New features NOTE Documentation for this new version is ongoing, and you may encounter some discrepancies between screenshots in the operation manual and how the application appears. We recommend that you also read the Version History for Dorico 4.0 for information about other new features not yet included in this documentation. You can download the Dorico 4.0 Version History from the Steinberg Download Assistant. New Features in Version 4.1.
New features Project templates ● You can now save existing projects as custom project templates, allowing you to create future projects containing the same players, page templates, and default settings. See Saving custom project templates. MIDI improvements ● The handling of imported/opened MIDI files has been extensively improved. You can now map tracks to specific players and playing techniques, and save your settings for reuse in subsequent imports. See MIDI Import Options dialog.
New features from any of these locations into the current project, from all options down to a granular per-option level if required. See Library Manager. Numbered bar regions ● Numbered bar regions allow you to show bar counts in a region without additional notations. This can help performers keep track of how many bars have passed when playing repetitive music. See Numbered bar regions.
New features ● You can now show parentheses around chord symbols, including showing only a single left or right bracket on individual parenthesized chord symbols. See Parenthesized chord symbols. ● For players set to show chord diagrams, you can now show only the chord symbol or chord diagram for individual chord symbols. See Showing only chord symbols or chord diagrams.
New features ● All four ways of saving, resetting, and removing defaults in options dialogs are now always shown. Previously, it was necessary to hold a modifier key to access other options if you had existing saved defaults. See Layout Options dialog, Note Input Options dialog, Notation Options dialog, Engraving Options dialog, and Playback Options dialog. Project preview ● When you save projects, Dorico now generates preview images of the layout open in the music area.
Introduction Thank you very much for purchasing Dorico Pro. We are delighted that you have chosen Steinberg's scoring application and hope that you will enjoy using it for years to come. Dorico is a next-generation application for producing beautiful sheet music, whether you are a composer, arranger, music engraver, publisher, instrumentalist, teacher, or student. Whether you want to print your music or share it in a digital format, Dorico is the most sophisticated program available.
Introduction Documentation structure American name British name Half note Minim Quarter note Crotchet Eighth note Quaver Sixteenth note Semiquaver Thirty-second note Demisemiquaver Sixty-fourth note Hemidemisemiquaver Hundred twenty-eighth note Semihemidemisemiquaver Two hundred fifty-sixth note Demisemihemidemisemiquaver Half-step Semitone Whole step Whole tone Staff Stave Bar/Measure Bar NOTE This documentation only uses “bar”.
Introduction Conventions TIP Descriptive topics do not describe how to perform a task, and procedural topics do not explain what something is. To find general information about items or concepts, we recommend searching for them by name, such as “dynamics”. To find instructions for performing particular actions, we recommend including a relevant verb in your search, such as “moving”. Links at the bottom of topics guide you to further relevant content.
Introduction Conventions If bold text is separated by a greater-than symbol, this indicates either a sequence of different menus to open or directions to follow for navigation inside the dialog named at the start of the sequence. EXAMPLE Choose Edit > Notations > Voices > Change Voice > [Voice]. You can change this option in Preferences > Note Input and Editing > Editing. File names and folder paths are shown in a different font. EXAMPLE example_file.
Introduction How you can reach us Dorico’s key commands have been designed to be both logical and accessible using a standard computer keyboard without needing a number pad. EXAMPLE The arrow keys on their own move the selection around the music area. Adding Alt/Opt to the arrow keys moves notes and items rhythmically in Write mode and a small amount graphically in Engrave mode. For example, Alt/Opt-Up Arrow / Alt/Opt-Down Arrow transpose notes up/ down by staff position.
Dorico concepts Dorico is based on a number of key concepts that come from its design philosophy. We recommend familiarizing yourself with these concepts, as this will greatly enhance your ability to work efficiently with Dorico and to navigate more easily through this documentation. Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Deep design considerations are required to create a notation software like Dorico, which might be of particular interest to users familiar with scoring applications.
Dorico concepts Projects in Dorico smaller number of staves, a full score with each player’s music on separate staves, a custom score layout containing just the piano and vocal staves for choral rehearsals, and an instrumental part for each player that only contains the music belonging to them. RELATED LINKS Condensing on page 666 Assigning players to layouts on page 166 Projects in Dorico A project is an individual file that you create within Dorico.
Dorico concepts Flows in Dorico Engrave In Engrave mode, you can make fine adjustments to the position, size, and appearance notes and items and determine how the pages of your project are laid out, including editing and creating page templates. By design, you cannot delete any notes or items, change their rhythmic positions, or change the pitch of notes in Engrave mode; this prevents mistakes when engraving. Play In Play mode, you can change how your music sounds in playback.
Dorico concepts Players in Dorico Players in Dorico In Dorico, a player can represent an individual musician or multiple musicians in the same section. Players hold instruments, so you must add at least one player to your project before you can add instruments. ● A single player represents one person who can play one or more instruments. For example, a clarinettist who doubles on alto saxophone or a percussionist who plays bass drum, clash cymbals, and triangle.
Dorico concepts Popovers layout means you do not have to input a layout-specific clef. Similarly, there is a timpani instrument that automatically hides all key signatures. RELATED LINKS Instruments on page 126 Instrument changes on page 129 Transposing instruments on page 132 Popovers Popovers allow you to input different notations and perform tasks, such as transposing a selection of notes, using only your computer keyboard.
Dorico concepts Notes and rests in Dorico Notes and rests in Dorico In Dorico, the notation and division of notes and rests is determined semantically by rules based on convention. This means that note and rest durations can change and appear differently later than when you first input them. Dorico is able to update how notes and rests are notated depending on their context because of the following key concepts: 1.
Dorico concepts Rhythmic position Rhythmic position In Dorico, notes and items exist at rhythmic positions, which are calculated using their place in musical time in the flow rather than their position in a specific bar that has a particular time signature. In Dorico, musical time is the number of beats starting from the beginning of each flow.
Dorico concepts Page templates in Dorico You can control practically every aspect of the visual appearance of the music in each layout independently, including staff size, note spacing, and system formatting. Each layout can also have independent page formatting settings, such as page size, margins, running headers, and footers. The default formatting of pages in layouts is determined by page templates. Deleting layouts does not delete any music from the project.
Dorico concepts Options dialogs in Dorico Pro Dorico Pro contains the following dialogs for global settings: Layout Options Contains options that are likely to vary from layout to layout, such as page size, staff size, and the appearance and position of bar numbers. Options in Layout Options affect only the selected layouts but apply to all flows in those layouts. Notation Options Contains options that are likely to vary from flow to flow, such as beam grouping and accidental duration rules.
User interface The user interface of Dorico Pro is designed to keep all of the important tools at your fingertips. This chapter introduces you to key aspects of the user interface. Project window Dorico Pro’s main project window allows you to access all the options and tools you need to work on a project. You can open multiple project windows for the same project or for different projects.
User interface Project window In Print mode, the print preview area shows a preview of how your project will appear when printed onto paper or exported into a graphics file format. 4 Zones Zones on the left, right, and lower edges of the project window contain panels that provide the notes, notations, and functions that you need to create and edit your music. Different panels are available in each zone according to the mode.
User interface Project window Activates/Deactivates playback in the project. 6 Mini transport Allows you quick access to the main transport functions, including Play, Record, and Click. 7 Show Transport Bar Hides/Shows the Transport window, which contains playback and MIDI recording functions. 8 Undo Allows you to undo previous actions. 9 Redo Allows you to restore previous actions that were undone using Undo.
User interface Project window Mini transport The mini transport on the right of the toolbar provides quick access to the main transport functions of Dorico Pro.
User interface Project window Fixed Tempo Mode when fixed tempo mode is active Fixed Tempo Mode when follow tempo is active TIP The Transport window contains additional transport functions. RELATED LINKS Changing the click settings on page 267 MIDI recording on page 264 Preferences dialog on page 56 Tab bar The tab bar in Dorico Pro allows you to display different layouts within the same project window. It is located between the toolbar and the music area.
User interface Project window Project start area RELATED LINKS Adding players on page 120 Music area In Setup, Write, and Engrave modes, the music area shows the music notation of the currently selected layout. It is the central part of the project window where you work on your project. Music area showing a new choir piece in page view 34 Dorico Pro 4.1.
User interface Project window The music area displays layouts in either galley view or page view. In Engrave mode, layouts always appear in page view. The tab bar above the music area allows you to open multiple layouts in the project simultaneously and switch between them. The scroll bars to the right and to the bottom of the music area allow you to scroll within the layout. You can use the layout selector in the toolbar to show other layouts in the music area.
User interface Project window The print preview area shows a preview of the first layout selected in the Layouts panel. You can scroll through the pages that are shown, but you cannot edit layouts. If you want to make changes, you must switch to Setup, Write, or Engrave mode. TIP You can go directly to the first page in the layout by pressing Home , and to the last page by pressing End . You can change these key commands on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
User interface Project window Modes and their panels Mode Left Zone Right Zone Lower Zone Setup Players panel Layouts panel Flows panel Write Notes panel Notations panels Properties, Keyboard, Fretboard, Drum Pads, Mixer, and Key editor panels Engrave Formatting, Frames, and Graphic Slices panels Pages panel Properties and Mixer panels Play n/a VST and MIDI Instruments panel Keyboard, Fretboard, Drum Pads, Mixer, Key editor, and Track inspector panels Print Options panel n/a Track Insp
User interface Project window Engrave mode ● Engrave toolbox on the left of the project window Play mode ● Play toolbox on the left of the project window RELATED LINKS Project window on page 29 Notes toolbox on page 191 Notations toolbox on page 196 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Status bar The status bar at the bottom of the project window allows you to choose different views and page arrangements for the music area. NOTE Not all options in the status bar are available in all modes.
User interface Project window Allow you to change the zoom factor of the music area and its musical contents. There are preset zoom levels but you can also use a custom zoom level. 8 MIDI activity indicator/Audio engine connection warning Indicates that there might be MIDI or audio problems that require your attention. ● A brief green light indicates that Dorico Pro is receiving MIDI input from a connected device.
User interface Project window Galley View Lays out all the staves in the current layout and flow on a single continuous system. This view type is most useful during the process of inputting the music as it allows you to focus on the musical content of your project. Because it shows all staves, galley view is particularly useful when inputting notes for single players holding multiple instruments and in layouts with condensing enabled. By default, bar numbers are shown every bar above every staff.
User interface Project window Single Pages Vertically Displays individual pages laid out from top to bottom. RELATED LINKS Switching to galley/page view on page 49 Zoom options Zoom options in the status bar allow you to change the displayed size of pages in the music area. Custom Zoom Opens a dialog that allows you to set a custom zoom percentage. Set Zoom Allows you to select one of the preset zoom scaling factors.
User interface Workspace setup Workspace setup Dorico Pro enables you to set up your workspace according to your working style. For example, you can open multiple tabs to display multiple layouts in the same window. You can also open the same project in multiple project windows.
User interface Workspace setup Implicit vs. explicit rests on page 1329 Players, layouts, and flows on page 117 Assigning players to layouts on page 166 Switching to galley/page view on page 49 Hiding/Showing zones You can hide/show individual zones or all zones simultaneously, for example, to increase the space available for displaying music in the music area or to access options in a specific panel. NOTE In some modes, not all methods are available. PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4.
User interface Workspace setup EXAMPLE Hide/Restore Zones button when zones are shown Hide/Restore Zones button when all zones were previously shown but are now all hidden RELATED LINKS Zones and panels on page 36 Toolbar on page 30 Disclosure arrows on page 41 Properties panel on page 692 Opening new tabs You can open multiple tabs in the same project window, which you can use to display multiple layouts or different views of the same layout.
User interface Workspace setup 2. Select a layout to open in the new tab in any of the following ways: ● Click one of the icons. ● In the list at the bottom, select a layout. ● In the toolbar, click the layout selector and select a layout. RESULT The layout that you choose opens in the active tab. TIP You can also switch between different layouts within the same tab.
User interface Workspace setup ● Right-click the single tab you want to close and choose Close Tab from the context menu. ● Right-click the tab you do not want to close and choose Close Other Tabs from the context menu. NOTE You cannot close the last tab in a window. If only one tab is open and you no longer want to see the tabs, deactivate Show Tabs in the main toolbar. The tab is no longer displayed, but the corresponding layout is still shown.
User interface Workspace setup Showing multiple tabs in the same project window You can split your project window to display two tabs at the same time. The split can be either vertical or horizontal, allowing you to display different layouts either side by side or above one another. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tab of the layout that you want to move to a new tab group. 2. Split the view in one of the following ways: ● To show layouts side by side, choose Window > Vertical Split.
User interface Workspace setup Opening multiple project windows You can open multiple project windows for the same project, for example, if you want to work on multiple layouts at the same time. You can also show a different mode of the same project in each window, such as having one window show Write mode and another show Play mode. During playback, all windows that belong to the same project show the playhead and move the view to follow the music.
User interface Workspace setup Switching to galley/page view You can switch between different view types in the music area in Setup mode and Write mode. For example, if a flute player in your project is doubling piccolo, you can switch to galley view to see the piccolo staff in addition to the flute staff. NOTE In Engrave mode, layouts always appear in page view. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Switch to galley or page view in any of the following ways: ● To switch to galley view, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-2 .
User interface Color setup AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK In galley view, you can use instrument filters to show only specific staves.
User interface Color setup Changing the window color theme You can change the color theme used throughout Dorico Pro, for example, you might switch to the light theme if you prefer to read dark text on a light background. By default, Dorico Pro uses the dark theme, which shows light text on a dark background. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click General. 3. In the Window section, select one of the following options from the Theme menu: 4.
User interface Color setup 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The page color in layouts of the corresponding type is changed in the current project and all future projects you open. This does not affect the resulting page color when exporting or printing layouts. TIP You can reset page colors back to the default factory settings by clicking Reset type.
User interface Color setup Changing music area colors You can change the colors used for various purposes in the music area, including the first eight voice colors on each staff and the color of selected items. For example, if you find certain color combinations easier to read than others. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click Colors. 3. In the Voice Colors section, change the color for each voice in any of the following ways: 4. 5.
User interface Language setup 5. ● Click the corresponding color preview and select a color in the dialog that opens. ● Enter a color code into the corresponding value field. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The colors for music and pages are inverted in the current project and all future projects you open. Music always appears white, while pages use the inverted page color you set. This does not affect the resulting colors when exporting or printing layouts.
User interface Language setup Changing the language for instrument names You can change the language used for instrument names, for example, if you want to recreate a French score. This affects staff labels and instrument change labels. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Language. 3. Select the language you want to use from the Instrument names language menu. 4. Activate/Deactivate Reset instrument names. 5.
User interface Preferences dialog Instrument transpositions in staff labels on page 1376 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Preferences dialog on page 56 Changing the language for date and time tokens You can change the language used for all date and time tokens project-wide, for example, if you want to display the date and time using a different language convention to your operating system. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Language. 3.
User interface Preferences dialog TIP You can set the focus to the Search categories field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-L . You can set the focus away by pressing Tab . 2 Category list Contains the categories of options that you can view and change in the dialog. When you click a category in this list, any applicable section titles appear below the category in the list and its options appear as a page in the main body of the dialog.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog The Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog allows you to view all the functions to which you can assign key commands, change existing key commands, and assign new key commands to functions that have no key command assigned by default.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog ● 4 If you enter a key command that is already assigned to another function, a warning is shown. ● Remove Key Command: Removes the selected key command from the selected function. ● Print Summary: Directs you to an offline page in a web browser that displays your key commands on an interactive keyboard. ● Reset Key Commands: Resets all of your key commands to their defaults.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog The interactive key commands map as it appears when US English is selected The Dorico Key Commands map opens in a web browser. It allows you to do any of the following: ● To see the available key commands, select a context. The context of a key command is the mode in which it can be used. Key commands that have a global context work in all modes.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog For particularly long names, you can hover over them to see a tool tip. RESULT If the function has a key command, it is shown in the list of assigned key commands. TIP You can also search for functions in the interactive key commands map. Assigning key commands You can assign key commands to many functions, for example, for functions you use frequently but that do not have a key command assigned by default.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog 5. Press the key or button on your MIDI keyboard that you want to assign to the selected parameter. 6. Click Add MIDI Command. 7. Click Apply, then Close. Changing the keyboard language You can change the keyboard language used for key commands in Dorico Pro, for example, if the application language is set to German but you are using an English keyboard and want to use English key commands. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences.
User interface Jump bar Resetting key commands You can reset all the key commands in your project to their defaults. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click Key Commands. 3. In the Key Commands section, click Reset Key Commands. 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT All custom key commands are deleted and the default key commands are reinstated.
User interface Jump bar NOTE ● You can only perform commands using the jump bar in the same contexts as you can perform the corresponding action. For example, you can only perform Setup mode-specific actions in Setup mode. ● You can assign jump bar aliases to specific commands, for example, so you can use shorter entries for your favorite commands. ● If commands have a corresponding key command or jump bar alias, they are shown in the menu of valid commands.
User interface Jump bar Going to locations with the jump bar You can use the jump bar to go to bars, rehearsal marks, pages, and flows in Setup, Write, Engrave, and Play modes. PROCEDURE 1. Press J to show the jump bar. 2. Optional: Press Alt-G (Windows) or Ctrl-2 (macOS) to switch to Go To mode. 3. Enter the appropriate entry for the location to which you want to go. For example, enter f3b20 to go to bar 20 in flow 3. 4. Press Return .
User interface Jump bar 4. Immediately after the command, enter = followed by the characters you want to use as the jump bar alias. For example, to assign the jump bar alias rr to the Remove Rests command, enter Remove Rests=rr. 5. Do one of the following: ● To perform the command and assign the jump bar alias, press Return . ● To assign the jump bar alias only, without performing the command, press Alt/OptReturn .
Project and file handling In addition to opening and importing/exporting projects and other file formats, project and file handling also includes auto-save and project backups.
Project and file handling Hub Double-clicking a recent project, or selecting it and pressing Return , opens the project. You can choose one of the following view types for recent projects: ● Grid view ● List view When recent projects are shown in the grid view, you can click the menu button each project to access the following options: for ● Remove from Recent Projects: Removes the project from the Recent Projects page.
Project and file handling Starting new projects You can find more tutorial videos and information about new features on the Dorico YouTube channel. ● Forum: Links you to the Steinberg user forum. ● Manual: Links you to the online documentation. A PDF version is also available on steinberg.help. ● Dorico Blog: Displays recent entries in the Dorico blog. Clicking a blog entry opens it in a web browser.
Project and file handling Opening projects/files TIP ● You can start a new, empty project at any time by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-N or choosing File > New. ● You can also start a new project from a project template by choosing File > New From Project Template > [Project template category] > [Project template]. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can customize your project, such as by adding or deleting players/instruments.
Project and file handling Projects from different versions of Dorico RELATED LINKS Hub on page 67 Importing MusicXML files on page 81 Importing MIDI on page 84 Opening recent projects from the Hub You can open projects you have recently worked on from the Hub. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: If the Hub is not open, choose Window > Hub to open the Hub. 2. In the Hub, click Open Recent to show the Open Recent page. 3. Double-click the recent project you want to open.
Project and file handling Missing Fonts dialog of a font family is used in three different paragraph styles, three rows are shown in the dialog, one for each paragraph style. The Missing Fonts dialog comprises the following: 1 Missing Family Contains a list of font families included in the project but missing on your computer. 2 Missing Style Contains a list of the specific styles within the corresponding font families that are included in the project but missing on your computer.
Project and file handling Project Info dialog ● You can change the width of columns in the Missing Fonts dialog. Their widths are remembered in future projects.
Project and file handling Project Info dialog NOTE The flows list uses the names of flows as shown in the Flows panel in Setup mode, which can be different to their entry in the Title field if you have changed their flow title. The action bar at the bottom of the list contains the following options: ● New Flow : Creates a new flow with no information. Its default name is New Flow. ● Duplicate Flow : Creates a new flow with all the information of the selected flow.
Project and file handling Project templates automatically appear on pages that use the First page template. You can change the tokens in the default page templates to refer to specific flows if required.
Project and file handling Project templates RELATED LINKS Brackets according to ensemble type on page 887 Starting new projects on page 69 System objects on page 1403 Page formatting on page 612 Page templates on page 504 Library on page 696 Hub on page 67 Saving custom project templates You can save the current project as a project template from which you can start future projects. For example, if you regularly create projects that require the same players, page templates, and default settings.
Project and file handling File import and export Deleting project templates You can delete custom project templates that you no longer need. NOTE You cannot delete factory default project templates. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: If the Hub is not open, choose Window > Hub to open the Hub. 2. In the Hub, click Create New to show the Create New page. 3. Choose the project template category that contains the project template you want to delete. 4. Click the menu button Project Template. 5.
Project and file handling File import and export 5. ● Create All New Players ● Merge with Existing Players Where Possible In the Import flows list, activate the checkbox for each flow you want to import. You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 6. Click OK to import the selected flows and close the dialog. 7. Optional: If you selected multiple projects from which to import flows, repeat steps 4 to 6 for each project.
Project and file handling File import and export The Flow Import Options dialog comprises the following: 1 Player handling Allows you to determine how imported flows are assigned to players. 2 ● Create All New Players adds separate players for each imported flow. ● Merge with Existing Players Where Possible merges players from imported flows with any existing compatible players in the project. Import flows Contains a list of all the flows in the selected project.
Project and file handling File import and export 4. Activate/Deactivate Export layouts as separate files. 5. Optional: If you activated Export layouts as separate files, activate the checkbox for each layout you want to export in the Select layouts to export list. You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 6. Click Choose Folder beside the Export to field to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 7. Locate and select the destination folder you want. 8.
Project and file handling File import and export 3 Export layouts as separate files Allows you to export each layout in the project as a separate file instead of as a single file. 4 Select layouts to export Contains a list of all the layouts in the project. Layouts are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. Only available if you have activated Export layouts as separate files. 5 Selection options Allow you to select/deselect all the flows/layouts in the corresponding list.
Project and file handling File import and export ● If you chose Merge with Existing Players Where Possible, any players that the imported MusicXML files and existing project have in common are merged. For example, if you imported a MusicXML file containing one piano into a project containing a piano and viola, the imported MusicXML file is added to the existing piano player.
Project and file handling File import and export Exporting MusicXML files You can export flows and layouts as separate MusicXML files, for example, if you want to export just the soloist’s layout containing the first flow. PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Export > MusicXML to open the Export MusicXML dialog. 2. Choose one of the following file format options: 3. ● Export compressed XML (.mxl) ● Export uncompressed XML (.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export MusicXML dialog contains the following options and lists: 1 File format options Allows you to choose the MusicXML file format you want to export. Compressed MusicXML files contain the same information as uncompressed MusicXML files but have a smaller file size. 2 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated.
Project and file handling File import and export TIP You can also open MIDI files directly if you want them to be separate projects rather than new flows in existing projects.
Project and file handling File import and export At the top of the MIDI Import Options dialog, there are the following options: Importing MIDI File Displays the file name of the MIDI file you are importing or opening. Use track memory Allows you both to apply settings from the track memory to the current MIDI file and to save the settings for the current MIDI file to the track memory for reuse in future when importing or opening MIDI files with identical track names.
Project and file handling File import and export Re-use existing players Allows you to determine the players to which tracks in the MIDI file are assigned. When activated, tracks from the imported MIDI file are merged into existing players in the project where possible. When deactivated, tracks are imported as new players. Only available when importing MIDI files. Tracks from the MIDI file Displays all the tracks from the imported or opened MIDI file in a table.
Project and file handling File import and export ● Technique(s): Displays the playing techniques identified for the track. You can change the playing technique by double-clicking the field and selecting a playing technique from the menu. If a single track requires multiple playing techniques, you must use the advanced editor options.
Project and file handling File import and export The Advanced editor options are divided into the following sections: Track settings Contains a list of instruments in the track selected in the Tracks from the MIDI file table and allows you to view and change details of how Dorico Pro will interpret the track. ● Instruments in track list: Contains all the instruments in the selected track and allows you to change them. For example, you can add horn instruments to a horn ensemble track to match its Max.
Project and file handling File import and export Dorico Pro to input a pizz. playing technique at the start of the pizzicato track and an arco playing technique at the start of the arco track. ● Percussion map: Allows you to select a percussion map for the track. Only available for percussion kits. ● Articulations: Allows you to select articulations you want to input on all notes in the track. ● Voice separation mode: Allows you to select a voice approach for chords.
Project and file handling File import and export Import Options The Import Options section contains the following subsections: Instruments Contains options that determine how Dorico Pro identifies and handles instruments from the imported MIDI file. ● Use GM program changes to identify instruments: Allows you to set whether Dorico Pro uses MIDI program changes or track names to identify instruments.
Project and file handling File import and export Notations Contains options that determine the handling and detection of notations from the imported MIDI file, such as pedal lines and slurs. NOTE ● Notation settings are linked between Preferences > Play > Recording and the MIDI Import Options dialog. ● When Detect key signature if missing is activated, Dorico Pro creates a single key signature at the start of the flow. This option works best for music with a strong tonal center that does not modulate.
Project and file handling File import and export ● In Preferences > Play > Quantization. ● In the MIDI Import Options dialog, click Quantize Options in the Import Options section. ● When at least one note is selected in the music area, choose Edit > Requantize. NOTE Quantization options are linked between Preferences > Play > Quantization and the MIDI Import Options dialog.
Project and file handling File import and export Grace notes on page 1043 Exporting MIDI You can export flows as separate MIDI files, for example, if you want to edit the audio in further detail in a DAW. MIDI files exported from Dorico Pro contain any markers in the project by default. PREREQUISITE You have opened a layout in the music area that contains the players whose MIDI you want to export. PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Export > MIDI to open the Export MIDI dialog. 2.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export MIDI dialog comprises the following: 1 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. 2 Selection options Allow you to select/deselect all the flows in the project. For example, you can deselect all flows and then activate the checkbox of a single flow you want to export.
Project and file handling File import and export ● Markers ● System-attached Text 7. Optional: If you chose System Text for Markers as, activate/deactivate Show border around system-attached text markers. 8. Click OK to import the tempo track and close the dialog. RESULT The tempo track is imported into the selected flow. If you selected New Flow in the Import into flow list, a new flow is added to the project.
Project and file handling File import and export ● Timecode display offset sets the initial timecode position at the start of the flow. ● Tempo changes replaces all immediate and gradual tempo changes in the flow with the tempo changes from the MIDI file. ● Time signatures replaces all time signatures in the flow with time signatures from the MIDI file. ● Markers as adds any markers from the MIDI file to the flow as either Markers or System-attached Text.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export Tempo Track dialog comprises the following: 1 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. 2 Selection options Allow you to select/deselect all the flows in the project. For example, you can deselect all flows and then activate the checkbox of a single flow you want to export.
Project and file handling File import and export You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 4. Activate/Deactivate Export players as separate files. 5. Optional: If you activated Export players as separate files, activate the checkbox for each player you want to export in the Select players to export list. You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 6. Click Choose Folder 7. Locate and select the destination folder you want. 8.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export Audio dialog contains the following options and lists: 1 Export each selected flow as a separate file Allows you to export each flow in the project as a separate audio file instead of as a single audio file. 2 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated.
Project and file handling Auto-save Contains the following options that allow you to control the audio file format and export: ● File format: Allows you to export audio as an MP3 (.mp3), FLAC (.flac) or WAV (.wav) file. ● Bit depth: Allows you to export FLAC files as 16-bit or 24-bit, and WAV files as 16-bit, 24-bit, or 32-bit. ● Broadcast WAVE: Allows you to export audio in Broadcast WAVE format, which includes start timecodes and markers.
Project and file handling Auto-save Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog The Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog allows you to recover individual auto-saved projects, for example, after you accidentally closed a project without saving or if Dorico Pro or your computer crashed. The Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog contains the following: Auto-saved projects list Contains all the auto-saved projects that are available for recovery.
Project and file handling Project backups AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can save auto-saved projects permanently in any folder location and with new file names if required. Changing the auto-save frequency You can change how frequently Dorico Pro auto-saves projects. By default, the auto-save interval is five minutes for the currently active project. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click General. 3.
Project and file handling Project backups Changing the backup location You can change the folder that Dorico Pro uses to store project backups. By default, Dorico Pro uses the Backup Projects folder inside your Dorico Projects folder, whose default location is in the Documents folder for your user account. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click General. 3.
Setup mode Setup mode allows you to set up the fundamental elements of the project: instruments and the players that hold them, flows, layouts, and videos. You can also determine how they interact with each other, for example, by changing the players assigned to layouts. You can view music in the music area and switch between viewing other tabs and layouts, but you cannot select or interact with anything in the music area in Setup mode.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Shows the flows in your project, ordered left to right. By default, flows contain all players and are assigned to all layouts. The three panels work together to allow you to control how and where the players, layouts, and flows in your project are used. When you select an item in one of the panels, that panel and the selected item are highlighted in a different color and checkboxes appear in cards in the other panels.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode The order in which players are listed in the Players panel sets the default player order used in all layouts. You can also set a custom player order in each layout independently. In the Players panel, each player is shown as a card that contains the instruments held by that player. Each player card shows the following: 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the player card.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Adds a player group to your project. If no players were selected, an empty player group is added. If existing players were selected, they are grouped together. Sort Players Sorts all players in the Players panel according to the current player sorting setting. You can click and hold or right-click Sort Players to change the setting to one of the following options: ● None: New players are added at the bottom of the players list, regardless of their instrument.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode ● In the Players panel, select a player, then click Player Settings in the action bar and choose Add Instrument to Player. You can also right-click players and choose this option from the context menu. The instrument picker contains the following sections and options: 1 Search field Allows you to enter the instrument you are searching for directly. You can enter only part of the instrument name, such as cello for Violoncello.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode You can cycle forwards through the instrument picker by pressing Tab , which navigates in the following order: Search field, Instrument, Instrument type, Instrument family. You can also cycle backwards by pressing Shift-Tab , which navigates in the opposite direction. An enclosure line shows which instrument family or instrument is selected when using the keyboard to navigate.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Build tab The Build tab contains the following: 1 Search field Allows you to specify the instruments you want to include in the ensemble in the following ways: ● Enter the name of an existing ensemble, such as String Section. ● Enter the names or abbreviations of instruments, with each name/abbreviation separated by a comma. You can prefix instruments with a number followed by a space.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Adds the players in the custom ensemble to the project. Choose tab The Choose tab contains the following: 1 Search field Allows you to enter the ensemble you are searching for directly. 2 Ensemble category column Contains ensemble categories to help you focus your ensemble search. 3 Ensemble column Contains the ensembles available in the selected instrument family. 4 Ensemble contents column Displays the instruments included in the selected ensemble.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Save Custom Ensemble dialog The Save Custom Ensemble dialog allows you to name and save custom ensembles for reuse in future projects. ● You can open the Save Custom Ensemble dialog in Setup mode from inside the ensemble picker by building a custom ensemble and clicking Save. The Save Custom Ensemble dialog contains the following options: Category Allows you to select an ensemble category for the custom ensemble.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode In the Layouts panel, each layout is shown as a card. Each layout card shows the following: 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the layout card. 2 Layout type Shows the type of layout from the following options: 3 ● Full score layout ● Instrumental part layout ● Custom score layout Layout name Shows the name of the layout.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Shows the size and orientation of the layout as set on the Page Setup page in Layout Options. 5 Space size Shows the space size between two staff lines in points, as set on the Page Setup page in Layout Options. This indicates the size of staves in the layout. 6 Layout number Allows you to set a unique number for the layout that can be used as part of its file name when exported as a graphic.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode You can also access layout settings by right-clicking layouts. Delete Layout Deletes selected layouts from the project.
Setup mode Players, layouts, and flows Shows the number of the flow. The number increments with each new flow that you create or import. The number also indicates the position of the flow in a layout. The Flows panel contains the following options: Add Flow Adds a new flow to your project. By default, every new flow is included in all layouts, and every player is added to the new flow.
Setup mode Players, layouts, and flows highlighted and activated in the Flows panel, and all layouts to which the player is assigned are highlighted and activated in the Layouts panel. A piano player selected in the Players panel with connected flows and layouts highlighted in the Flows and Layouts panels EXAMPLE A work for string quartet and choir is divided into three movements. The string quartet is tacet for the third movement, which the choir sings a cappella.
Setup mode Players Players In Dorico Pro, a player can represent an individual musician or multiple musicians in the same section. Players hold instruments, so you must add at least one player to your project before you can add instruments. In Dorico Pro, there are the following types of players: Single player Represents an individual person who can play one or more instruments. For example, a clarinettist who doubles on alto saxophone or a percussionist who plays bass drum, clash cymbals, and triangle.
Setup mode Players Adding players You can add both single and section players to your project. Single players can hold multiple instruments, while section players can only hold one instrument. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, add an empty-handed player and open the instrument picker in any of the following ways: ● To add a single player, press Shift-P . ● To add a section player, press Shift-Alt/Opt-P .
Setup mode Players Showing instrument/player names in staff labels on page 1376 Instrument numbering on page 127 Designating players as soloists on page 123 Changing the default player order on page 122 Adding instruments to players on page 133 Adding ensembles on page 125 Changing the language for instrument names on page 55 Renaming players on page 177 Changing instrument names on page 178 Condensing on page 666 Divisi on page 1407 Layouts on page 164 Layouts with clef/transposition overrides on page 171
Setup mode Players Changing the default player order You can change the default order in which players’ staves appear in all layouts, for example, if your project requires an unconventional instrument order. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, select the players whose default position you want to change. 2. Click and drag the selected players upwards/downwards. An insertion line indicates where the players will be positioned. RESULT The default player order is changed.
Setup mode Players ● Click Move down. 7. Optional: Repeat steps 5 to 6 for other players in the selected layout whose position you want to change. 8. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The player order in the selected layout is changed. This overrides the default player order. Any subsequent changes you make to the default player order in the Players panel are not reflected in layouts with custom player orders.
Setup mode Ensembles Deleting players You can delete players from your project, which also deletes all instruments held by those players. IMPORTANT Deleting instruments permanently deletes any music that you have input on their staves. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, select the players that you want to delete. 2. Delete the selected players in any of the following ways: 3. ● Press Backspace or Delete . ● In the Players panel, click Delete Player .
Setup mode Ensembles Adding ensembles You can add multiple players simultaneously by adding ensembles, such as a complete string section or four-part choir. You can select existing ensembles and build new ones. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, open the ensemble picker in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-E . ● In the Players panel, click Add Ensemble . ● In an empty project, click Add Ensemble in the project start area. 2. Select or build the ensemble you want in the ensemble picker. 3.
Setup mode Instruments 2. Click Build to switch to the Build tab. 3. Enter the instruments you want into the Search field. For example, enter 2 vln, 3 cl,bsn,tuba,marim to build an ensemble containing two violins, three clarinets, a bassoon, a tuba, and a marimba. TIP You can also use orchestral shorthand to specify instruments. 4. 5. Optional: To confirm the instruments identified by your current entry and clear the Search field, press Tab .
Setup mode Instruments Instruments in Dorico Pro do not have limited ranges; it is possible to notate any pitch in any register on every instrument. However, in the piano roll editor in Play mode, only pitches that fall in the MIDI note range 0-127 can be represented. Similarly, if you input a pitch beyond the range of samples in the assigned VST instrument, the pitch does not sound in playback.
Setup mode Instruments Instrument numbering applies to individual instruments, rather than players. For example, if an ensemble contains two flute players and a piccolo player, but the second flute is also holding a piccolo, then the instruments are numbered in the following way: ● Flute 1 ● Flute 2 & Piccolo 1 ● Piccolo 2 TIP You can move individual instruments to different players if you want to change which numbered instruments are held by each player.
Setup mode Instruments Instrument changes Instruments changes are when a player holding multiple instruments switches from playing one instrument to a different instrument. They are usually indicated in full scores and parts with text indications both after the last note before the change and at the first note after the change.
Setup mode Instruments TIP If you want to input notes for other instruments held by single players but keep instrument changes in the layout, you can switch to galley view to see all staves in the project. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to allow/disallow instrument changes. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Setup mode Instruments 4. 5. In the Instrument Changes section, choose one of the following options for Instrument names to use in change labels: ● Full Names ● Short Names Choose one of the following options for Prefix for instrument change warnings: ● To ● Take ● Custom NOTE To and Take prefixes appear as appropriate for the current instrument name language setting. 6. 7.
Setup mode Instruments RESULT The selected instrument change labels are changed to show the text you entered. If you activated Hide prefix, the prefix is hidden. Deactivating Custom text returns the corresponding instrument change labels to their default text. NOTE ● Deactivating properties permanently deletes any custom text entered.
Setup mode Instruments Adding instruments to players You can add instruments to both single and section players. Single players can hold multiple instruments, while section players can only hold one instrument. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one player. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, select the player to which you want to add instruments. NOTE 2. ● You can only add instruments to one player at a time.
Setup mode Instruments Adding empty percussion kits to players You can add empty percussion kits to players, to which you can then add unpitched percussion instruments. NOTE You cannot add percussion kits to section players that are already holding one instrument. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one player. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Setup mode Instruments RESULT A new kit is created containing all the instruments held by the player. NOTE If the player was already holding one or more kit instruments, all individual instruments and any other kits are combined into the first kit. Changing instruments You can change the type of instruments without affecting any music already entered onto their staves, for example, if your Clarinet part is very low and you want to change it to a Bass Clarinet or you want to change the tuning of a guitar.
Setup mode Instruments Changing the language for instrument names on page 55 Hiding/Showing instrument transpositions in staff labels on page 1377 Changing the default player order on page 122 Moving instruments You can move individual instruments without affecting any music already input for those instruments. You can move instruments between players or to a different position in the instrument list for a single player, for example, if you want to change the order of staves in the score.
Setup mode Instruments TIP If you want to delete all instruments held by a single player, you can also delete the player. RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 106 Deleting players on page 124 Fretted instrument tuning Fretted instruments can have different numbers of strings and frets. In order to display tablature for fretted instruments in Dorico Pro, you must specify information about the tuning of fretted instruments.
Setup mode Instruments The Edit Strings and Tuning dialog comprises the following: 1 Instrument Displays the name of the selected fretted instrument. 2 Compatible preset tunings Allows you to select preset fretted instrument tunings with the same number of strings as the selected fretted instrument. If your changes in the dialog match a preset tuning, it is automatically selected. 3 String editor Allows you to select and edit individual or all strings of the fretted instrument.
Setup mode Instruments 6 Action bar Contains options that allow you to change the number and arrangement of strings. 7 ● Add String : Adds a new string below the lowest currently selected string. The new string is a duplicate of the lowest currently selected string. ● Add String at Top : Adds a new string at the top of the fretboard. The new string is a duplicate of the previous top string. ● Select all: Selects all strings at once.
Setup mode Instruments 5. Optional: Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change the open pitch of other strings. 6. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The open pitches of the selected strings are changed. This affects the tuning of the instrument and the pitch of all fret positions on those strings. The new tuning becomes available for chord diagrams.
Setup mode Instruments AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can import the library file into other projects to reuse the fretted instrument tuning. Capos Capos are devices that performers clamp onto the necks of fretted instruments to depress strings at a single fret position. This raises the sounding pitch of open strings affected by the capo, allowing performers to use the same fingerings and chord shapes but produce higher pitches.
Setup mode Instruments TIP You can choose to show capo chords in parentheses instead and change the vertical gap between capo and main chord symbols in Engraving Options > Chord Symbols > Capo. RELATED LINKS Concert vs.
Setup mode Instruments EXAMPLE No capo Capo added to the third fret RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 106 Edit Strings and Tuning dialog on page 137 Fretboard panel on page 203 Changing fretted instrument transpositions on page 144 Defining capos for chord symbols/diagrams on page 146 Defining capos for used chord diagrams grids on page 148 Capo Definition dialog The Capo Definition dialog allows you to add full and partial capos to fretted instruments.
Setup mode Instruments Removing capos from fretted instruments You can remove capos from individual fretted instruments. This affects the pitches shown on tablature for the corresponding instruments. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the fretted instrument whose capo you want to remove. 2. In the instrument label, click the instrument menu open the Edit Strings and Tuning dialog. 3.
Setup mode Instruments Using fretted instrument transpositions You can show transposed pitches on notation staves and in main chord symbols, according to the corresponding fretted instrument’s transposition, in each layout independently and for each player holding at least one fretted instrument independently.
Setup mode Instruments Defining capos for chord symbols/diagrams You can define capos for chord symbols and chord diagrams on a per-player basis. This affects chord diagram shapes and the transposition of capo chord symbols. For example, you might show both main and capo chord symbols for the voice player when creating a lead sheet. NOTE These steps do not affect used chord diagram grids or pitches on notation staves/tablature. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Instruments TIP You can also right-click players and choose these options from the context menu. RESULT Main and/or capo chords are shown in chord symbols, according to the instrument staves and layouts set to show chord symbols for the selected player. By default, capo chords appear in italics when shown alongside main chords.
Setup mode Instruments PROCEDURE 1. Select the chord symbols whose shown chords you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show only in the Chord Symbols group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Main Chord ● Capo Chord RESULT The selected chord symbols show only main or capo chords. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Setup mode Instruments RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids on page 921 Capo vs. main chords on page 141 Adding capos to fretted instruments on page 142 Inputting chord symbols on page 316 Hiding/Showing capo chord symbols in used chord diagrams grids You can show only main chords, only capo chords, or both in used chord symbol grids in each layout independently. For example, if you want to show both in the guitar part layout but only main chords in the vocal part layout.
Setup mode Instruments NOTE Percussion kit instrument labels are green in the Players panel in Setup mode. 1 Name Allows you to enter or change the full name for the percussion kit. This is used in Full staff labels for percussion kits that use the five-line staff presentation type. 2 Short name Allows you to enter or change the abbreviated name for the percussion kit. This is used in Abbreviated staff labels for percussion kits that use the five-line staff presentation type.
Setup mode Instruments 5 Editor Displays the current arrangement of instruments in the selected percussion kit presentation type. You can change the order of instruments and the layout of lines and spaces in the grid presentation type by using the controls. 6 Controls Allows you to change the order and stem direction of instruments in the selected percussion kit presentation type. It also allows you to add slash voices to the kit.
Setup mode Instruments Adding instruments to percussion kits You can add new instruments to percussion kits within the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit to which you want to add instruments. 2. In the kit instrument label, click the instrument menu open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3. Click Add New Instrument 4. Select the percussion instrument you want in the instrument picker. 5.
Setup mode Instruments Defining percussion kits as drum sets You can define individual percussion kits as drum sets. Drum sets follow your per-flow notation options for voicing in drum sets with five-line staff presentations. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit you want to define as a drum set. 2. In the kit instrument label, click the instrument menu open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3. Activate Drum set in the top right of the dialog.
Setup mode Instruments 6. Click Add . RESULT A group is created containing the selected instruments. The group is given a default name that you can change. RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 106 Percussion kit presentation types on page 1523 Renaming groups in grid presentation percussion kits Group names are shown as instrument labels. You can change the names of groups in percussion kits using the grid presentation type. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Instruments EXAMPLE Ungrouped grid presentation percussion kit Grid presentation percussion kit with wood blocks grouped RELATED LINKS Staff labels for percussion kits on page 1385 Deleting groups within grid presentation percussion kits You can delete groups in percussion kits using the grid presentation type without deleting the instruments within the group. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Instruments 4. Click the percussion instruments and/or slash voices whose position you want to change. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one instrument or slash voice at a time. 5. Change the position of the selected instruments/slash voices in any of the following ways: ● Click Move up arrow to move them upwards. ● Click Move down arrow to move them downwards. ● Click and drag a single instrument upwards/downwards (five-line staff presentation only). 6.
Setup mode Player groups Removing individual instruments from percussion kits You can remove individual instruments from percussion kits without affecting other instruments in the kit. For example, if you want to move an instrument from one percussion kit to another player. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit from which you want to remove instruments. 2. In the kit instrument label, click the instrument menu open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog.
Setup mode Player groups Setting custom player orders on page 122 Player group labels on page 1382 Player, layout, and instrument names on page 175 Adding player groups You can organize players into groups, for example, if you want to bracket them together. Players in different groups are also numbered separately. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: If you want to add a group that includes existing players, select those players in the Players panel in Setup mode. 2. In the Players panel, click Add Group .
Setup mode Player groups TIP You can also move existing players to, from, or between groups. RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 106 Instrument picker on page 108 Adding players on page 120 Moving players between groups on page 160 Changing the language for instrument names on page 55 Renaming player groups You can change the name of player groups after you have added them. This changes the name shown in player group labels. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Player groups ● 3. In the Players panel, click Delete Player . Choose one of the following options in the warning message that opens: ● Keep Players: Deletes the group but keeps the players. ● Delete Players: Deletes the group and the players it contains. Moving players between groups You can move players to, from, or between player groups. For example, you can move ungrouped players into existing groups and move players from one group to another. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Flows Flows Flows are separate spans of music that are completely independent in musical content, meaning they can contain completely different players from each other and have different time signatures and key signatures. A single project can contain any number of flows.
Setup mode Flows RESULT A new flow is added to your project. All existing players are assigned to new flows, and new flows are automatically assigned to all existing full score and part layouts. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can rename the flow. ● You can change the players assigned to the flow and the layouts to which the flow is assigned.
Setup mode Flows TIP You can Shift -click to activate/deactivate the checkboxes in multiple player cards at once. RESULT Players are assigned to the selected flow when the checkbox in their player card is activated, and removed from the flow when the checkbox is deactivated.
Setup mode Layouts Deleting flows You can delete flows that you no longer need. This deletes all music for all instruments and players in the flows. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Flows panel, select the flows you want to delete. 2. Delete the selected flows in any of the following ways: ● Press Backspace or Delete . ● In the Flows panel, click Delete Flow .
Setup mode Layouts piano reduction for choir rehearsals, but only assign that piano player to the vocal score, meaning it does not appear in the orchestral full score at all. ● By default, respelling notes in score layouts also affects their spelling in all other layouts but respelling notes in part layouts only affects their spelling in the current part layout. ● You can save options set in Layout Options as the default for score and part layouts independently.
Setup mode Layouts AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can assign players and flows to the layout. ● If you want to change the position of the new layout in the layouts list, you can reorder and renumber layouts. ● You can override the clef and/or transposition for the layout, for example, to show the music of the same player with different clefs/transpositions in different layouts.
Setup mode Layouts Assigning flows to layouts By default, all flows in your project are added to all layouts. You can exclude flows that you do not want to show in a layout. You can assign flows to and remove flows from layouts manually. For example, if a flow in your project contains specific performance instructions for strings that you want to show in string part layouts but not in other part layouts. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Layouts 3. In the category list, click Players. 4. In the Players section, activate/deactivate Transposing layout. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The selected layouts are transposed pitch when Transposing layout is activated, and concert pitch when it is deactivated. TIP You can also make layouts transposing by choosing Edit > Transposed Pitch, and concert pitch by choosing Edit > Concert Pitch.
Setup mode Layouts Duplicating layouts You can duplicate existing layouts. This creates another layout of the same type, containing the same players and flows, layout options, and customization, including overrides for clefs, page templates, and staff spacing. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Layouts panel, select the layout you want to duplicate. 2. In the action bar, click Layout Settings and choose Duplicate Layout.
Setup mode Layouts ● Layout Number ● Instrument Score Order RELATED LINKS Layouts panel (Setup mode) on page 113 Renumbering layouts You can renumber all layouts according to their current position in the Layouts panel in Setup mode, for example, after you have dragged layouts to different positions. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Layouts panel, select any layout. 2. In the action bar, click Layout Settings and choose Renumber Layouts.
Setup mode Layouts Restoring default layouts You can recreate all the part layouts that Dorico Pro provides by default, for example, if you accidentally deleted some part layouts. PROCEDURE ● In Setup mode, choose Setup > Create Default Part Layouts. RESULT The default set of part layouts is restored, recreating a single part layout for each player that contains all flows in the project. Any part layouts that were recreated are added at the bottom of the Layouts list.
Setup mode Layouts Clef and Transposition Overrides dialog The Clef and Transposition Overrides dialog allows you to change the transposition and default clefs in individual layouts. This allows you to show the music of the same player with different clefs and/or transpositions in different layouts.
Setup mode Layouts Contains overrides for the default clef and/or transposition used when the layout is set to concert pitch. ● Clef for [n] staff: Allows you to override the default clef for the corresponding staff. The number of clef overrides available depends on the number of staves the instrument normally has. NOTE In order to override clefs for concert pitch, you must first override the corresponding clef for transposed pitch.
Setup mode Layouts RESULT The default clef for the corresponding staves of the selected instruments is changed in the selected layout.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names RESULT The transposition for the selected instruments is changed in the selected layout. Key signatures are automatically updated when the layout is set to transposed pitch. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can rename the selected layouts, for example, to ensure the correct transposition is included.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Player name The name of each player in the Players panel. They can be used in staff labels instead of instrument names. You can refer to player names in text frames using the {@playernames@} token. Player names are automatically generated when you add instruments, and are linked to the corresponding instrument names until you rename the player. Layout name The name for each layout in the Layouts panel.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Adding player lists on page 1040 Player labels on page 683 Renaming players You can change the player names of players, and reset renamed players to their default names. Player names appear in guide instrument labels in galley view for players holding multiple instruments and can appear in staff labels. Player names also appear in player lists. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, select the player you want to rename. 2.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Renaming layouts You can rename layouts and reset renamed layouts to their default name, for example, to include the appropriate instrument transposition for layouts with transposition overrides. Layout names appear at the top of part layouts by default. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Layouts panel, select the layout you want to rename. 2. Press Return to open the layout name text field. 3.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names ● Changing instrument names does not change the name shown at the top of part layouts if you have already renamed the layout. You can rename layouts separately. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, in the Players panel, click the disclosure arrow in the card of the player holding the instrument whose names you want to change. This expands the card to show the instruments held by the player. 2.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names The Edit Instrument Names dialog contains the following options and sections: 1 Editing instrument Displays the permanent underlying name of the instrument. 2 Editing Allows you to switch between editing the Singular names and Plural names of the selected instrument. Singular names are used when the staff contains one player, Plural names are used when the staff contains multiple players.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Allows you to customize the font, size, and formatting of the selected part of the short instrument name. 8 Short name text editing area Shows the current short staff label for the selected instrument, as it appears in Abbreviated staff labels. You can select any part of the instrument name and edit it independently of other parts. For example, if you want to add additional information on a new line and in italics.
Setup mode Flow names and flow titles Resetting instrument names You can reset all your changes to the names of individual instruments and revert them to the current default settings for their instrument type. NOTE Resetting instrument names does not change the name shown at the top of part layouts. If you want to change the name used at the top of part layouts, rename the layout. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Flow names and flow titles Titles shown in layouts are linked to the Title fields in the Project Info dialog, using the {@projectTitle@} and {@flowTitle@} tokens. This allows you to organize flows with different names to their displayed title in the music. TIP You can change both flow names and flow titles in the Project Info dialog, and you can also change flow names in the Flows panel in Setup mode.
Setup mode Videos NOTE This breaks the link between flow names and the title shown in the music area. RELATED LINKS Project Info dialog on page 73 Videos Dorico Pro supports the use of videos within the program as well as the associated notations, such as markers and timecodes, and allows you to find appropriate tempos based on where important markers occur. Videos are a fast sequence of images that create the impression of a moving image.
Setup mode Videos RELATED LINKS Frame rates on page 189 Video Properties dialog The Video Properties dialog allows you to change video-related settings, including their frame rate and start position. ● You can open the Video Properties dialog in Setup mode by right-clicking a flow in the Flows panel and choosing Video > Properties from the context menu. It also opens automatically when you add a new video.
Setup mode Videos example, if the initial timecode of the video is 02:00:00:00 but the video does not start until the start of the third bar in 4/4, the initial timecode of the flow is eight beats of time less than 02:00:00:00; if the tempo is 60 bpm, this makes the initial flow timecode 01:59:52:00. NOTE Flow timecodes are shown in their flow cards in the Flows panel. RELATED LINKS Timecodes on page 1280 Flows panel on page 116 Adding videos You can add a video to each flow in your project.
Setup mode Videos Changing the start position of videos You can change both the rhythmic position in the music at which videos start, and the position in the video that coincides with that rhythmic position, for example, if you want the fifth second of a video to sync with the start of the third bar of music. PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. In Setup mode, open the Video Properties dialog in one of the following ways: ● Add a video to a flow.
Setup mode Videos Changing the size of the Video window You can change the size of the Video window at any time. PREREQUISITE The Video window is shown. PROCEDURE ● Change the size of the Video window in any of the following ways: ● Click and drag the corners/edges in any direction. ● Shift -click and drag a corner/edge to change the size without changing the shape. RESULT The size of the Video window is changed.
Setup mode Videos Frame rates The frame rate of a video is the number of still images that are used per unit of time in order to create the impression of a moving image, commonly measured in frames per second, or “fps”. The number of frames per second required to create the impression of a moving image is determined by how fast the human eye processes movement, and so the most common frame rate is around 24 fps. However, recent major films have been released at 48 fps, which results in sharper images.
Write mode Write mode allows you to input and edit your music, including changing the rhythmic positions of items, changing the pitch of notes, and deleting notes and items. The available toolboxes and panels allow you to input all the notes and notation items that are most commonly used. By design, you cannot move notes and items graphically in Write mode. Graphical adjustments are only possible in Engrave mode.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Can display different panels, according to the current selection in the Notations toolbox. Panels in the right zone contain notation items that you can add to your music, such as dynamics and playing techniques, divided into separate categories. 4 Notations toolbox Contains either panel or popover buttons, depending on whether Panels is active.
Write mode Project window in Write mode When this option is activated, you can select the pitch before specifying the duration during note input. This allows you to experiment with pitches without having to stop note input because you only input the note when you specify the duration. You can also activate/deactivate Pitch Before Duration by pressing K . Chords Allows you to add multiple notes at the same rhythmic position in order to build a chord during note input.
Write mode Project window in Write mode IMPORTANT You can get unexpected results if you force the duration of notes and later change the time signature or move barlines, for example. You can remove Force Duration from selected notes by resetting their appearance. You can also activate/deactivate Force Duration by pressing O . Create Voice Allows you to create a new voice on the current staff into which you can input notes during note input.
Write mode Project window in Write mode NOTE If Force Duration is not activated, Dorico Pro automatically combines adjacent rests as appropriate for their position in relation to notes and according to the current meter. Tuplets Inputs a triplet based on the currently selected note duration at the caret position or at the selected rhythmic position. You can click and hold or right-click Tuplets to access the following options: ● 2:3 : Inputs a duplet, that is, two notes in the space of three.
Write mode Project window in Write mode RELATED LINKS Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 58 Activating/Deactivating mouse input on page 222 Inputting notes with rhythm dots on page 227 Inputting chords on page 248 Inputting grace notes on page 247 Inputting tuplets on page 251 Tuplets popover on page 253 Input methods for time signatures and pick-up bars on page 284 Resetting the appearance of items on page 437 Notes panel The Notes panel contains buttons that allow you to select note and
Write mode Project window in Write mode Inputting accidentals on page 241 Inputting articulations on page 271 Inputting slurs on page 273 Inputting nested slurs on page 1357 Deleting notes/items on page 454 Deleting accidentals on page 805 Deleting articulations on page 817 Notations toolbox The Notations toolbox allows you to access panels and popovers, which you can use to input the different notations available. It is located on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Hides/Shows the Tempo panel, which contains sections for the different types of tempo changes, including gradual tempo changes, metronome marks, and tempo equations. Dynamics Hides/Shows the Dynamics panel, which contains sections for the different types of dynamics, including immediate, gradual, and custom combined dynamics. Ornaments Hides/Shows the Ornaments panel, which contains sections for ornaments, arpeggio signs, glissando lines, and guitar techniques.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Comments Hides/Shows the Comments panel, which allows you to view, edit, and export comments in the current flow. Popover and direct input buttons Clefs Opens/Closes the clefs and octave lines popover. Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals Opens/Closes the key signatures popover. Time Signatures (Meter) Opens/Closes the time signatures popover. Tempo Opens/Closes the tempo popover. Dynamics Opens/Closes the dynamics popover.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Cues Opens/Closes the cues popover. Rehearsal Marks Inputs a rehearsal mark. Text Opens the text editor for inputting text items. Lyrics Opens the lyrics popover. Chord Symbols Opens the chord symbols popover. Note Tools Opens the note tools popover. Fingering Opens the fingerings popover. Figured Bass Opens the figured bass popover.
Write mode Project window in Write mode ● In the Notations toolbox, click the button for any panel you want to show, or the active button for the panel you want to hide. ● Choose Window > Show Right Zone.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Shows the Drum Pads panel, which allows you to input notes for unpitched percussion instruments using a drum pads layout. Mixer Shows the Mixer panel, which allows you to control the sounds produced in playback by instruments in the project, both for the master output and each individual instrument’s channel. Key Editor Shows the Key Editor panel, which allows you to view and edit notes belonging to the selected instrument in a continuous piano roll.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Advances the caret by the currently selected note duration without inputting notes. Extends notations with duration, such as gradual dynamics and pedal lines. Only available during note input. You can also advance the caret by pressing Space . Delete Left Deletes notes at the previous rhythmic position and moves the caret back to that position. Only available during note input. You can also delete notes/items during note input by pressing Backspace .
Write mode Project window in Write mode Respells the selected notes downwards to show the enharmonic equivalent using the note name below, such as respelling G♭ as F♯. Resize Lower Zone Allows you to change the height of the lower zone.
Write mode Project window in Write mode NOTE When inputting notes using the Fretboard panel, the caret never advances automatically. Delete Left Deletes notes at the previous rhythmic position and moves the caret back to that position. Only available during note input. You can also delete notes/items during note input by pressing Backspace . TIP You can delete notes/items outside of note input by pressing Backspace or Delete .
Write mode Project window in Write mode The Drum Pads panel toolbar contains the following options: Advance Caret Advances the caret by the currently selected note duration without inputting notes. Extends notations with duration, such as gradual dynamics and pedal lines. Only available during note input. You can also advance the caret by pressing Space . Delete Left Deletes notes at the previous rhythmic position and moves the caret back to that position. Only available during note input.
Write mode Inputting vs. editing Deleting notes/items on page 454 Selecting note/rest durations on page 223 Unpitched percussion on page 1518 Percussion kits and drum sets on page 1519 Percussion kit presentation types on page 1523 Voices in percussion kits on page 1535 Inputting vs. editing Dorico Pro distinguishes the processes for inputting and editing music. Inputting If you can see the caret, you are inputting new music. The caret must be activated in order to input notes and notations.
Write mode Inputting vs. editing RELATED LINKS Editing items on page 431 Selecting notes/items on page 421 Caret on page 209 Note input on page 214 Notations input on page 271 Rhythmic grid on page 208 Insert mode on page 449 Chord mode on page 250 Mouse input settings There are a number of different settings that you can choose from to determine how mouse input functions in Dorico Pro. You can set your preferences for mouse input in the Editing section of the Note Input and Editing page in Preferences.
Write mode Rhythmic grid 4. Optional: If you chose Load pointer with item, activate/deactivate Allow multiple items to be created with the mouse. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Your mouse input settings are changed in the current project and for all future projects. RELATED LINKS Notations input on page 271 Rhythmic grid The rhythmic grid is a unit of rhythmic duration whose value affects certain aspects of inputting and editing, such as the amount by which items move.
Write mode Caret PROCEDURE ● Change the resolution of the rhythmic grid in any of the following ways: ● To decrease the rhythmic grid resolution, press Alt/Opt-] . ● To increase the rhythmic grid resolution, press Alt/Opt-[ . ● Choose Write > Rhythmic Grid > Decrease Grid Resolution. ● Choose Write > Rhythmic Grid > Increase Grid Resolution. ● Choose Write > Rhythmic Grid > [Beat division]. ● Select a value from the Rhythmic Grid selector in the status bar.
Write mode Caret Multiple staves The caret extends vertically across all the staves onto which notes and notations will be input. This allows you to input, for example, the same dynamics or playing techniques on multiple staves simultaneously or play in chords on a MIDI keyboard and distribute the notes in those chords onto multiple staves. The note symbol and rhythmic grid also appear for each included staff.
Write mode Caret Caret when inputting chords NOTE Chord mode also affects some edits outside of note input, such as copying/pasting and lengthening/shortening notes and items. Lock to Duration The caret is dashed. Lock to Duration allows you to repitch notes without changing their duration or rhythm. Caret when Lock to Duration is activated Grace Notes The caret is shorter than the default caret. It allows you to input grace notes at the caret position.
Write mode Caret Slash voices The note beside the caret indicates a slash notehead.
Write mode Caret Inputting notes on tablature on page 239 Changing music area colors on page 53 Ties on page 1459 Activating/Deactivating the caret When the caret is activated, you can input notes and notations at the caret position, for example, if you want to input a dynamic in the middle of a tie chain. When the caret is deactivated, you cannot input notes, instead you can select and edit items in the music area. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Write mode Note input Moving the caret manually During normal note input, the caret moves automatically as you input notes, but you can also move it manually. For example, the caret does not move automatically when inputting chords or when using the Fretboard panel. PROCEDURE ● In Write mode, move the caret in any of the following ways: ● To move the caret according to the current rhythmic grid resolution or to the next/ previous note/rest, whichever is closest, press Right Arrow / Left Arrow .
Write mode Note input Drum Pads panel on page 204 Notations input on page 271 Inputting notes You can input notes into your project during note input, which is when the caret is activated. You can input notes with a computer keyboard, with the mouse, using panels in the lower zone, or by playing notes with a MIDI keyboard. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch. However, you can also specify the pitch before duration instead.
Write mode Note input ● In the Notes panel, click the duration you want. ● In the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel toolbar, click the duration you want. 4. Optional: Select any required rhythm dots. 5. Optional: If you want to input a pitch whose accidental is not in the prevailing key signature, select the appropriate accidental. 6. Optional: Select any required articulations. 7.
Write mode Note input If you input notes on notation staves belonging to fretted instruments, Dorico Pro automatically allocates these notes to the strings on which they can be played closest to the nut. Because this calculation is done for each note separately, multiple notes can be allocated to the same string. In such cases, the notes are shown next to each other on tablature and are colored green. You can then select them individually and make your own string allocation.
Write mode Note input Arranging tools on page 454 Bracketed noteheads on page 1108 Register selection during note input Dorico Pro automatically selects the register of pitches during note input, but you can override this and select the register manually. During note input, Dorico Pro automatically selects the note whose register is the smallest interval away from the previously input note. For example, if you input an F and then press A , an A is input a third above the F, rather than a sixth below.
Write mode Note input ● You can also input notations alongside notes without deactivating note input. PREREQUISITE ● You have chosen the appropriate input pitch setting. ● You have chosen the appropriate note-based notation input setting. ● You have connected any MIDI devices you want to use for note input. ● If you want to select note durations using the Notes panel, the left zone is shown.
Write mode Note input ● Click the staff at the rhythmic position of each note you want to input. A shadow notehead appears when inputting with the mouse to indicate where the note will be input. ● In the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel, play the notes you want. ● Play the notes on a MIDI keyboard. Once you have selected a pitch, a shadow note of the corresponding pitch appears at the caret position. You can release the pitch after selecting it. 8.
Write mode Note input each other on tablature and are colored green. You can then select them individually and make your own string allocation. TIP ● You can switch between using pitch before duration and duration before pitch note input at any time by pressing K or clicking Pitch Before Duration . For example, duration before pitch can be easier when inputting a sequence of notes with the same duration.
Write mode Note input RELATED LINKS Inputting notes on page 215 Inputting notes using MIDI recording on page 264 Concert vs. transposed pitch on page 168 Changing the note-based notation input setting You can change your default setting for whether rhythm dots, accidentals, and articulations apply to the last input note or the next note you input during note input. This setting also affects whether or not the last input note remains selected after entry when using pitch before duration for inputting notes.
Write mode Note input TIP You can change the default setting for whether mouse input is activated/deactivated by activating/deactivating Enable note input using the mouse on the Note Input and Editing page in Preferences. RELATED LINKS Notes toolbox on page 191 Preferences dialog on page 56 Selecting note/rest durations You can select different durations for notes/rests, both during note input and for existing notes/ rests. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Note input Changing the duration of notes You can lengthen/shorten the duration of notes after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes whose duration you want to change. NOTE If you want to extend a note to the end of the current selection, select both that note and an item at the rhythmic position to which you want to extend the note. 2. Change the duration in any of the following ways: ● Press the key command of the duration you want.
Write mode Note input TIP You can assign your own key commands to lengthen/shorten notes by specific durations and to extend them. You can find these by searching for Shorten duration by, Lengthen duration by, and Extend to on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Write mode Note input 4. ● Press O . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Force Duration . Select the note/rest duration you want. TIP When forcing the duration of existing notes notated as tie chains, you must reduce their duration first, then increase it to the duration you want. 5. Optional: During note or rest input, input the notes or rests you want. RESULT During note or rest input, any notes you input are notated with their whole rhythmic value, whatever their position in the bar.
Write mode Note input Inputting notes with rhythm dots The Dotted Notes tool allows you to input notes with rhythm dots and add rhythm dots to existing notes. You can input notes with up to four rhythm dots. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch. However, you can also specify the pitch before duration instead. ● These steps describe selecting rhythm dots before inputting notes.
Write mode Note input 9. Stop note input in any of the following ways: ● Press Esc or Return . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Start Note Input . RESULT During note input, notes are input as dotted notes until you deactivate Dotted Notes or change the note duration. When you add rhythm dots to multiple existing notes that would then overlap, Dorico Pro adjusts the duration of notes in the selection to avoid deleting notes at the end of the selection.
Write mode Note input ● To create a new voice, press Shift-V or click Create Voice in the Notes toolbox. When a new voice is added, a + sign appears beside the symbol of a quarter note beside the caret. The quarter note symbol indicates the stem direction, and the number beside the quarter note indicates the voice number if applicable. Caret when adding the first down-stem voice TIP You can press Shift-V as many times as you require.
Write mode Note input EXAMPLE Caret when inputting notes into the first up-stem voice Caret when inputting notes into the first down-stem voice Caret when inputting notes into a new, second up-stem voice RELATED LINKS Caret on page 209 Notes toolbox on page 191 Notes panel on page 195 Rhythmic grid on page 208 Inputting notes on page 215 Inputting notes using pitch before duration on page 218 Inputting bar rests into specific voices on page 244 Adding notes above/below existing notes on page 255 Changi
Write mode Note input ● 3. Double-click the staff. Select the slash voice into which you want to input notes in one of the following ways: ● To create a new slash voice, press Shift-Alt/Opt-V . You can also click and hold Create Voice in the Notes toolbox, then click Create Slash Voice . When a new slash voice is added, a + sign appears beside the symbol of a note beside the caret, which now appears as a slash note.
Write mode Note input ● If you have three or more voices of any type on a single staff, you must cycle through all the voices in a set order. For example, if you have two up-stem voices, two down-stem voices, and a slash voice, the order is: first up-stem voice, first down-stem voice, second down-stem voice, second up-stem voice, slash voice.
Write mode Note input ● To extend to the staff above, press Shift-Up Arrow . ● To extend to the staff below, press Shift-Down Arrow . 4. Optional: Repeat step 3 for as many staves as you require. 5. Input the notes and notations you want. NOTE You must input notes using a computer keyboard or MIDI keyboard. If you use the mouse, notes are only input on the staff you click. Similarly, you must use the corresponding popover to input notations on multiple staves.
Write mode Note input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, start note input. 2. Activate Insert mode in any of the following ways: ● Press I . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Insert . In Insert mode, the caret shows V and inverted V shapes at the top and bottom. Dotted lines are shown on staves affected by the Insert mode scope across which the caret does not already extend. 3. Choose the appropriate Insert mode scope. 4. Optional: If the Insert mode scope is set to Voice selected. 5.
Write mode Note input Inputting notes for unpitched percussion You can input notes for individual unpitched percussion instruments and on all percussion instruments in percussion kits using any presentation type, including selecting playing technique-specific noteheads for individual instruments. When inputting notes in percussion kits, the caret is smaller than when inputting notes on pitched instrument or individual percussion instrument staves.
Write mode Note input For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets). Press smaller numbers for smaller durations, such as 5 for eighth notes (quavers) and 4 for 16th notes (semiquavers). Press larger numbers for larger durations, such as 7 for half notes (minims). 5. ● In the Notes panel, click the duration you want. ● In the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel toolbar, click the duration you want.
Write mode Note input RESULT Notes are input at the caret position or where you click with the selected duration and are played back as you input them by default. If you selected playing techniques, their noteheads appear as set in the Percussion Instrument Playing Techniques dialog for the corresponding instrument and playing technique, or in the Override Percussion Noteheads dialog for five-line staff presentations only.
Write mode Note input If you know a particular mapping well, you may find it helpful to use the mapping directly for input. Use staff position This option uses the staff position defined in the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. For example, on a drum set, the bass drum is normally positioned in the bottom space of the staff, while the snare drum is positioned in the third space from the bottom.
Write mode Note input When inputting notes in pitched instruments, Dorico Pro chooses the lower or upper possible staff position based on which is closer to the current position of the caret. However, when inputting notes in percussion kits, Dorico Pro chooses the staff position of the note with the same stem direction as the last input note, rather than the staff position that is closest to the current position of the caret. This makes it easier to input common note patterns used in percussion kits.
Write mode Note input NOTE If both notation staves and tablature are shown in the current layout, you must select an item on the notation staff and then move the caret to the tablature after starting note input. 2. 3. 4. Start note input in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-N . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Start Note Input ● Double-click the staff. . Select a note duration in any of the following ways: ● To select the next longer duration, press = .
Write mode Note input chords on tablature using pitch before duration with a MIDI keyboard, all notes in the chord are allocated to the same string. You can then select them individually and change their string allocation.
Write mode Note input 3. Optional: During note input, input the note you want with your selected accidental. RESULT The accidental is added to the selected existing notes. If you selected existing notes with different accidentals, they are changed to have the accidental you selected. During note input, the selected accidental is only input on the next note you input. You must reselect the accidental for each subsequent note.
Write mode Note input Disabling automatic accidental respelling You can turn off the automatic respelling of accidentals to prevent Dorico Pro from making retrospective changes to accidentals. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-I to open Note Input Options. 2. In the category list, click MIDI Input. 3. Deactivate Allow spelling of notes to be adjusted retrospectively. 4. Click Apply, then Close.
Write mode Note input 9. Stop note input in any of the following ways: ● Press Esc or Return . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Start Note Input . RESULT Rests of the selected duration are input. If Force Duration is not activated, Dorico Pro automatically combines adjacent rests as appropriate for their position in relation to notes and according to the current meter. RELATED LINKS Rests on page 1328 Implicit vs.
Write mode Note input TIP If your notation options are set to show bar rests in additional voices, bar rests appear in all subsequent empty bars for the selected voice after you have input one bar rest. RESULT Bar rests are input into the selected voice at the caret position. If the caret position is within a bar that contains notes for the selected voice, these notes are replaced by the bar rest.
Write mode Note input ● Select the note from which you want the tie to start. If you want to input a tie between two specific notes or between a grace note and a normal note, select those two notes. NOTE The two notes must be the same pitch but can be in different voices or on different staves belonging to the same instrument. 2. Optional: During note input, input the note that you want at the start of the tie. 3. Input a tie in any of the following ways: 4. ● Press T .
Write mode Note input Ties on page 1459 Ties vs. slurs on page 1461 Note and rest grouping on page 882 Beam grouping according to meters on page 861 Inputting grace notes You input grace notes in the same ways as normal notes, and they can have any rhythmic note value, accidental, and articulation. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch. However, you can also specify the pitch before duration instead. ● You cannot add rhythm dots to grace notes.
Write mode Note input TIP ● You can also change the type of grace notes after they have been input. ● Slashed and unslashed grace notes are handled differently in playback.
Write mode Note input ● Press Q . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Chords . In chord input, a + sign appears at the top of the caret. This allows you to input multiple notes at the caret position. 4. Optional: If you want to input chords onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 5. Select a note duration in any of the following ways: ● Press the number on your computer keyboard that corresponds to the duration you want. For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets).
Write mode Note input 9. Stop note input in any of the following ways: ● Press Esc or Return . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Start Note Input . RESULT Multiple notes are input at the caret position. ● If entering pitches by clicking with the mouse, you can put the same pitch into the chord twice by clicking again on the same line. ● If entering pitches with the keyboard, repeated notes are automatically input an octave above.
Write mode Note input ● You can activate/deactivate Chord mode in Write mode by pressing Q or clicking Chords in the Notes toolbox. NOTE You cannot have both Insert mode and Chord mode activated simultaneously.
Write mode Note input NOTE If you do not specify the beat unit, the tuplet is based on the note value currently selected in the Notes panel. 6. Press Return to close the popover. The tuplet is entered. 7. Optional: Change the selected note duration. For example, you can input a tuplet based on eighth notes but input a quarter note within that tuplet. 8. Enter or play in the pitches you want.
Write mode Note input Tuplets popover The tuplets popover allows you to input tuplets of any ratio and based on any note duration. The table contains examples of what you can enter into the tuplets popover to input different types of tuplets. You can open the tuplets popover in Write mode during note input or when notes are selected in any of the following ways: ● Press ; . As tuplets are often described in ratios, such as 3:2, the tuplets popover uses the semicolon key to be memorable.
Write mode Note input Type of tuplet Popover entry Quintuplet, five notes in the space of six. Often 5:6, 5/6, or 5 6 used in compound meters. Quintuplet, five dotted quarter notes in the space of four 5:4q., 5/4q., 5 4q., or 5:4-6. NOTE When using a number to specify the beat unit, you must separate the tuplet ratio from the beat unit using a space or hyphen. This list is not comprehensive. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input different tuplets.
Write mode Note input Adding notes above/below existing notes You can add notes above/below existing notes. You can add multiple notes at the same time, according to their intervals relative to the existing notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes to which you want to add notes. 2. Open the note tools popover in any of the following ways: 3. ● Press Shift-I . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Note Tools .
Write mode Note input NOTE You can press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow and Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to change the staff positions of notes in percussion kits using grid and five-line staff presentation types. However, this also changes the instrument playing the note.
Write mode Note input 2. Start note input in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-N . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Start Note Input ● Double-click the staff. . 3. Optional: If you want to repitch notes on multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 4. Activate Lock to Duration in any of the following ways: ● Press L . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Lock to Duration 5. Enter the pitches you want. 6. Optional: Press L or click Lock to Duration .
Write mode Note input PROCEDURE 1. Optional: In Write mode, select the region you want to transpose. NOTE ● If you want to transpose key signatures, you must include them in your selection. ● If nothing is selected, the whole flow in which you last selected a note/item is transposed. 2. Choose Write > Transpose to open the Transpose dialog. 3. Adjust the parameters required for your transposition, such as interval and quality.
Write mode Note input The Transpose dialog contains the following sections: 1 Transposition options Contains options that allow you to specify the transposition you want. For example, you can choose to transpose by an interval quality, such as a major third, or by a set number of divisions of the octave. You can choose the direction of the transposition, whether it includes octaves, and the interval and quality or number of divisions by which you want to transpose your selection.
Write mode Note input RELATED LINKS Note tools popover on page 477 Equal Division of the Octave (EDO) on page 1068 Tonality systems on page 1068 Arranging tools on page 454 Musical transformations on page 467 Mapping notes to pitches on page 473 Mapping notes to scales on page 475 Respelling notes You can change the enharmonic spelling of notes so they are shown as their enharmonic equivalents, for example, to show the stepwise movement in a phrase clearly, or to avoid altered unisons in a chord.
Write mode Note input TIP You can change the default spelling of notes in atonal key signatures in Note Input Options > MIDI Input > Note Spelling.
Write mode Note input The Respell Notes Automatically dialog contains the following options: Additional context at start Allows you to specify additional musical context before the selected notes that you want Dorico Pro to consider when calculating automatic note spellings. ● None: Only notes in the selection. ● To start of bar: Includes notes back to the start of the earliest selected bar. ● Previous bar: Includes notes back to the start of the previous bar.
Write mode Note input flow. Useful in tonality systems that contain multiple accidentals with the same pitch delta.
Write mode MIDI recording spelling of the selected notes in score layouts also affect their spelling in either the current part layout or all layouts. RELATED LINKS Switching between layouts on page 42 Respelling notes on page 260 Transposing selections on page 257 MIDI recording MIDI recording is a way of inputting notes into Dorico Pro by playing them in real time on a MIDI device.
Write mode MIDI recording ● You have set the quantization and recording options on the Play page in Preferences as required for the music you intend to record. ● You have input enough bars or empty rhythmic space for the amount of music you want to record. Dorico Pro does not automatically add extra bars or rhythmic space. ● If you want to hear a click during your recording, you have input a time signature. There is no click in open meter or when there is no time signature.
Write mode MIDI recording AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● If the notes you played in are not notated as you intended, you can requantize them. ● If you do not want to retain played durations for playback, you can reset playback overrides.
Write mode MIDI recording Repeats in MIDI recording When recording MIDI into flows that contain repeat structures, such as repeat barlines, Dorico Pro records the notes you play during each playthrough and merges them together into the same voice. Any differences in rhythms between the recordings are notated according to the current meter. Requantizing notes You can requantize notes using different quantization options.
Write mode MIDI recording 4. 5. 6. Choose one of the following options for Click sound: ● Click (unpitched) ● Beep (pitched) ● Wood Block For Pitch and velocity, change the MIDI pitch and/or Velocity values for any of the following types of beat: ● First beat ● Subsequent beats ● Beat subdivisions Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The sound, volume, and subdivision settings for the metronome click in the current project are changed.
Write mode MIDI recording ● If notes are input with missing or incorrect notations, we recommend that you change the detected notations in Preferences > Play > Recording. NOTE Notation settings are linked between Preferences and the MIDI Import Options dialog. ● If your notes are notated ahead of the beat, we recommend that you increase the latency compensation value.
Write mode MIDI recording Changing the audio device buffer size You can change the audio buffer size, for example, if the current buffer size is causing notes input using MIDI recording appear significantly after the beat. NOTE ● If the notes you play when recording MIDI are notated behind the beat, we recommend that you reduce the buffer size for your audio device to the lowest possible value that still produces stable playback with no drop-outs.
Write mode Notations input NOTE These options are also available in the MIDI Import Options dialog, and your settings are linked between this dialog and Preferences. RELATED LINKS Preferences dialog on page 56 MIDI Import Options dialog on page 85 Enabling/Disabling MIDI input devices By default, Dorico Pro accepts MIDI input from all connected MIDI devices, including virtual MIDI cables and inter-application buses.
Write mode Notations input 4. ● Press the key commands for the articulations you want. ● In the Notes panel, click the articulations you want. ● In the Keyboard panel toolbar, click the articulations you want. Optional: During note input, input the notes or chords you want with your selected articulations. RESULT The selected articulations are added to the selected notes.
Write mode Notations input Type of articulation Key command Tenuto: # (Windows) or \ (macOS) Staccatissimo: , , or } Combined tenuto and staccato: ~ (Windows) or | (macOS) Inputting slurs You can input slurs, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes.
Write mode Notations input RESULT During note input, slurs begin from the currently selected note on all staves across which the caret extends, not from the caret position. Slurs extend automatically as you input notes, and end on the currently selected note. When adding slurs to existing notes, the selected notes are connected by slurs. For example, if you select two notes belonging to one instrument and two notes belonging to another, two slurs are input connecting the notes on each selected staff.
Write mode Notations input ● Start note input. ● Select an existing note on a single staff to which you want to add fingering. If you want to add fingerings to all notes in a chord, select all the notes in the chord. 2. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 3. Open the fingerings popover in any of the following ways: 4. ● Press Shift-F . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Fingerings .
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Fingering on page 1008 Changing the rhythmic position of substitution fingerings on page 1010 Fingerings for valved brass instruments on page 1030 Deleting fingerings on page 1016 Fingerings popover The following tables contain examples of what you can enter into the fingerings popover to input the different types of fingerings available.
Write mode Notations input Type of fingering Example popover entry Single fingerings for each note in chords 1,3,5 For keyboard instruments, Dorico Pro automatically orders numbers appropriately according to the hand playing the notes.
Write mode Notations input Fretted instruments Type of fingering Example popover entries Left-hand fingerings 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Left-hand thumb t Right-hand fingerings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 p, i, m, a, e Right-hand thumb p, t, or 1 Right-hand pinky finger e, x, c, o, or 5 These lists are not comprehensive as there are many possible fingerings. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entries to input different types of fingerings.
Write mode Notations input Key signatures popover The table contains the entries for the key signatures popover that you can use to input the different key signatures available. You can open the key signatures popover in Write mode in any of the following ways when either an item is selected or the caret is active: ● Press Shift-K . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers ● Select an existing key signature and press Return . ● Choose Write > Create Key Signature. , then Key Signatures .
Write mode Notations input Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel The Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel allows you to create and input common key signatures and your own custom key signatures. It is located in the right zone in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel by clicking Panels , then Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals in the Notations toolbox.
Write mode Notations input The Key Signatures section contains the following parts: 1 Major/Minor Allow you to choose whether your key signature is Major or Minor. 2 More Sharps/Fewer Flats Each time you click, you add one sharp accidental to the key signature, or remove one flat accidental from the key signature. 3 Fewer Sharps/More Flats Each time you click, you remove one sharp accidental from the key signature, or add one flat accidental to the key signature.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a key signature. If you want to input a key signature on a single staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. 2. Optional: If you want to input key signatures onto multiple specific staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Open the key signatures popover in any of the following ways: 4. ● Press Shift-K .
Write mode Notations input Respelling notes on page 260 Changing the pitch of individual notes on page 255 Transposing selections on page 257 Mapping notes to scales on page 475 Changing the tonality system on page 1069 Signposts on page 448 Inputting key signatures with the panel You can input key signatures using the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input key signatures only on single staves.
Write mode Notations input All subsequently input notes follow the input key signature, until the next existing key signature or the end of the flow, whichever comes first. If playing in notes using a MIDI keyboard, accidentals are spelled according to the key signature. Key signatures that do not show accidentals, such as A minor or open key signatures, are indicated by signposts. NOTE An individual key signature on a single staff is not intended for transposing instruments.
Write mode Notations input Time signatures popover The table contains the entries for the time signatures popover that you can use to input the different types of time signatures available. You can open the time signatures popover in Write mode in any of the following ways when either an item is selected or the caret is active: ● Press Shift-M . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers ● Select an existing time signature and press Return . ● Choose Write > Create Time Signature.
Write mode Notations input Type of time signature Popover entry Additive time signature with explicit beat grouping 3+2+2/8, 3+2/4, and so on Beat grouping specified but not shown in the time signature [2+3+2]/8 For example, a time signature of 7/8 is shown but beams are subdivided into 2+3+2 eighth notes.
Write mode Notations input Types of time signatures on page 1480 Time signature styles on page 1487 Inputting time signatures with the popover on page 288 Inputting pick-up bars with the popover on page 291 Creating custom beat groupings for meters on page 882 Ending interchangeable time signatures on page 1494 Time Signatures (Meter) panel The Time Signatures (Meter) panel allows you to input different time signatures.
Write mode Notations input 2 ● Aggregate ● Alternating Time signature spaces Allows you to combine up to four time signatures. For example, you can specify only one time signature for a regular time signature, but for an alternating time signature, you might want to include three time signatures. 3 Pick-up bar of Allows you to include a pick-up bar before the time signature. A pick-up bar is not a complete bar, and so allows you to include only a few beats before the first complete bar.
Write mode Notations input 4. 5. ● Press I . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Insert . Open the time signatures popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-M . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Time Signatures (Meter) . Enter the time signature you want into the popover. For example, enter 4/4 for a 4/4 time signature or [2+2+3]/8 for a 7/8 time signature with a custom beat grouping. 6.
Write mode Notations input Inputting time signatures with the panel You can input time signatures using the Time Signatures (Meter) panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input time signatures only on single staves. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 196 Time Signatures (Meter) panel on page 287 Mouse input settings on page 207 Time signatures on page 1478 Pick-up bars on page 1483 Time signature styles on page 1487 Changing the separator style of interchangeable time signatures on page 1490 Inputting pick-up bars with the panel on page 292 Inputting barlines with the panel on page 309 Inputting bars/beats with the popover on page 305 Insert mode on page 449 Ending interchangeable time s
Write mode Notations input ● To input a pick-up bar only on the selected staff or staves across which the caret extends, press Alt/Opt-Return . RESULT During note input, pick-up bars are added at the caret position as part of the specified time signature, even if this is in the middle of an existing bar. When adding pick-up bars to existing music, they are added at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item as part of the specified time signature.
Write mode Notations input 2. ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a pick-up bar. If you want to input a pick-up bar on a single staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. Optional: If you want Dorico Pro to add beats at the end of the region affected by the pick-up bar if required, activate Insert mode in any of the following ways: ● Press I . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Insert . 3.
Write mode Notations input NOTE Dorico Pro does not automatically insert beats at the start of existing music to which you add time signatures with pick-up bars. If you add a pick-up bar at the start of a flow, that flow now begins in the pick-up bar, not in the first full bar. You can insert beats at the start to push existing music to later rhythmic positions.
Write mode Notations input Tempo button in the Notations toolbox Tempo popover with an example entry Tempo marks Example tempo mark Popover entry Adagio Adagio Presto = 176 Presto q = 176 or Presto q=176 Largo ( = 52) Largo (q = 52) or Largo (q=52) = 96-112 q = 96-112, q=96-112, 6 = 96-112, or 6=96-112 = 84 q. = 84, q.=84, 6. = 84, or 6.=84 = 60 h = 60, h=60, 7 = 60, or 7=60 = 120 e = 120, e=120, 5 = 120, or 5=120 rit. rit. or rit ritardando ritardando accel. accel.
Write mode Notations input Metronome mark beat units Metronome mark beat unit Popover entry 64th note z or 2 32nd note y or 3 16th note x or 4 Eighth note e or 5 Quarter note q or 6 Half note h or 7 Whole note w or 8 Double whole note 2w or 9 Rhythm dot . (period) Tempo equations Example tempo equation Popover entry = e = e. or e=e. = q = e or q=e = q. = h or q.=h This list is not comprehensive as there are many possible tempo equations.
Write mode Notations input Rhythmic feel Popover entry Medium eighth note swing rhythmic feel medium swing 8ths Heavy 16th note swing rhythmic feel heavy swing 16ths Heavy eighth note swing rhythmic feel heavy swing 8ths Straight rhythmic feel straight (no swing) Triplet 16th fixed rhythmic feel 2:1 swing 16ths (fixed) Triplet 8th fixed rhythmic feel 2:1 swing 8ths (fixed) Dotted 16th-32nd fixed rhythmic feel 3:1 swing 16ths (fixed) Dotted 8th-16th fixed rhythmic feel 3:1 swing 8ths (fixed
Write mode Notations input Absolute Tempo Change Contains a range of tempos with both an Italian tempo indication and a metronome mark. You can later choose to show or hide the metronome mark for individual tempo marks. You can change the range shown in the list by adjusting the slider at the top. Gradual Tempo Change Contains tempo marks that indicate a change in tempo over a defined period of time, such as rallentando or accelerando. You can add modifiers to gradual tempo changes.
Write mode Notations input Reset Tempo Contains tempo marks that indicate a return to the previous tempo, such as A tempo, or a previously defined tempo, such as Tempo primo. Tempo Equation Allows you to input a tempo equation, using beat units from 16th notes to whole notes and up to two rhythm dots.
Write mode Notations input NOTE If you want to show gradual tempo changes separated into syllables spread across their duration, such as rit-e-nu-to, we recommend selecting a suggested entry from the menu. Only gradual tempo changes with valid full text appear separated into syllables. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT During note input, tempo marks are input at the caret position.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a tempo mark. If you want to input a gradual tempo change across a duration, select items that span that duration. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels , then Tempo 3. In the Tempo panel, click the tempo mark you want. to show the Tempo panel.
Write mode Notations input and barlines popover also allows you to input beats. Additionally, you can input bars and beats using the system track. Normally you do not need to create bars in Dorico Pro, as they are created automatically as needed when you input music. However, you can add bars in advance if, for example, you are copying or arranging an existing piece of music.
Write mode Notations input This list is not comprehensive, as you can add and delete any number of bars using the popover. This table is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input and delete bars, and input bar rests.
Write mode Notations input Barlines Type of barline Popover entry Normal (Single) |, single, or normal Double || or double Final |] or final Dashed :, dash, or dashed Tick (top) ‘ or tick Tick (bottom) tickbottom Short (center) , or short Short (top) shorttop Thick thick Triple ||| or triple Start repeat |: or start End repeat :| or end End/Start repeat :|:, :||:, end-start, or endstart RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 196 Inputting bar rests into specific voices on page
Write mode Notations input Insert Bar Rest Allows you to insert a bar rest. Create Barline Contains the different barlines you can input. RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 196 Hiding/Showing zones on page 43 Inputting bars/beats with the popover You can input bars/beats using the bars and barlines popover, both during note input and by adding them to or inserting them into existing music. For example, if you want to extend a cadenza in an open meter.
Write mode Notations input TIP Another way to add bars is by choosing a note duration, such as a whole note when in a 4/4 time signature, and pressing Space repeatedly during note input. RELATED LINKS Bars and barlines popover on page 302 Bars on page 824 Inputting time signatures with the popover on page 288 Types of time signatures on page 1480 Inputting bars with the panel You can input bars using the Bars and Barlines panel, both during note input and by inserting them into existing music.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 196 Bars on page 824 Inputting time signatures with the panel on page 290 Inputting bars/beats with the system track You can insert bars/beats into existing music using the system track, for example, if you decide you want to repeat several bars before the next section. You can insert whole bars and just a few beats. NOTE You cannot use the system track during note input. PREREQUISITE The system track is shown. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a barline. If you want to input a barline on a single staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. 2. Optional: If you want to input barlines onto multiple specific staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Open the bars and barlines popover in any of the following ways: 4. ● Press Shift-B . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Bars and Barlines .
Write mode Notations input Inputting barlines with the panel You can input barlines using the Bars and Barlines panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also change the type of existing barlines. NOTE These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. PREREQUISITE If you want to input barlines onto single staves only, you have input an independent time signature on those staves. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input Inputting notes on page 215 Inputting time signatures with the panel on page 290 Mouse input settings on page 207 Input methods for dynamics You can input dynamics with the keyboard by using the dynamics popover, and with the mouse by using the Dynamics panel.
Write mode Notations input Dynamic or modifier Popover entry fortissimo: ff fortepiano without separator: fp fortepiano with separator, such as - f-p, f:p, or f/p subito subito, sub, or sub. possibile possibile, poss, or poss. poco poco molto molto più piu or più meno meno mosso mosso crescendo: < cresc. (text) cresc diminuendo: > dim.
Write mode Notations input You can change the appearance of all gradual dynamics project-wide on the Dynamics page in Engraving Options. You can also change the appearance of individual gradual dynamics. Inputting modifiers into the dynamics popover You can enter modifiers into the dynamics popover, such as poco, molto, subito, espressivo, or dolce. It appears in the correct italic font beside the dynamic.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 196 Dynamics on page 963 Dynamic modifiers on page 975 Inputting dynamics with the popover You can input dynamics and modifiers using the dynamics popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input different dynamics into each voice independently in multiple-voice contexts, for example, to give the separate staves of grand staff instruments different dynamics.
Write mode Notations input ● 6. During note input, input the dynamics only into the voice indicated by the caret indicator by pressing Alt/Opt-Return . Optional: During note input, advance the caret and extend open-ended gradual dynamics, such as p<, in any of the following ways: ● Press Space . ● In the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel toolbar, click Advance Caret . Open-ended gradual dynamics also extend automatically as you continue inputting notes. 7.
Write mode Notations input Changing the appearance/position of subito modifiers on page 976 Hiding/Showing combined dynamic separators on page 973 Changing dynamic levels on page 971 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 459 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 431 Showing consecutive hairpins as continuous on page 981 Hiding/Showing immediate dynamics on page 972 Changing the staff-relative placement of items on page 436 Inputting dynamics with the panel You can input dynamics and modifiers using the Dy
Write mode Notations input RESULT The specified dynamics are input. Unless you input voice-specific dynamics, dynamics apply to all voices on all staves belonging to a single instrument, including grand staff instruments.They are positioned according to your settings on the Dynamics page in Engraving Options. Voicespecific dynamics are placed on the default side of the staff for the instrument type, regardless of the voice’s stem direction.
Write mode Notations input 2. Open the chord symbols popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-Q . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Chord Symbols . NOTE If you selected an item on a staff that has local chord symbols at earlier rhythmic positions, the chord symbols popover is automatically set to input local chord symbols when it opens. 3.
Write mode Notations input TIP You can also navigate the popover forwards and backwards by different amounts. 6. Optional: To input an individual local chord symbol when the popover is set to global, and vice versa, press Alt/Opt-Return to input the chord symbol. 7. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The chord symbol specified is input.
Write mode Notations input ● Choose Write > Create Chord Symbol. When inputting global chord symbols, the icon on the left-hand side of the popover matches the corresponding button in the Notations toolbox. When inputting local chord symbols, the icon on the left-hand side of the popover appears smaller and includes the icon for a single player.
Write mode Notations input Chord symbol qualities Chord symbol quality Popover entry Major maj, M, ma, or nothing after entering the root. Minor m, min, or mi Diminished dim, di, or o Augmented aug, au, ag, or + Half-diminished half-dim, halfdim, or hd 6/9 6/9, 69, or % NOTE M and m entries for major and minor are case-sensitive.
Write mode Notations input Example altered bass note chord symbols Popover entry C(♭5)/E♭ CMb5/Eb, CMb5,Eb, Cmajb5/Eb, or Cmajb5,Eb Fm/D♯ Fm/D#, Fm,D#, Fmi/D#, or Fmi,D# TIP When using a MIDI keyboard, you can also indicate altered bass notes in any of the following ways: ● Play all notes of the chord together with the altered bass note at the bottom.
Write mode Notations input Modal chord symbol Popover entry Mixolydian mixolydian Aeolian aeolian Locrian locrian Melodic minor melodicminor Harmonic minor harmonicminor Whole tone wholetone Half-whole diminished or octatonic diminishedhalfwhole, diminishedsemitonetone, octatonichalfwhole, or octatonicsemitonetone Whole-half diminished or octatonic diminishedwholehalf, diminishedtonesemitone, octatonicwholehalf, or octatonictonesemitone This list is not comprehensive, as there are many po
Write mode Notations input Parenthesized chord symbols on page 911 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Navigation during chord symbol input You can move the chord symbols popover manually by different amounts to input chord symbols at other positions without closing and reopening the popover each time. Navigating with a computer keyboard Popover navigation Key command Advance the popover to the next beat, according to the prevailing time signature.
Write mode Notations input Chord symbol input options for MIDI keyboards There are different possible settings for how Dorico Pro interprets the notes you press on your MIDI keyboard when inputting chord symbols. On the Chord Symbols page in Note Input Options, the available options include: ● Whether you want Dorico Pro to consider the inversion in which you play a given chord, or write the chord symbol as if it had been played in root position ● Whether you want Dorico Pro to notate omissions.
Write mode Notations input Chord symbol regions on page 904 Hiding/Showing chord symbols on page 901 Inputting slash regions on page 414 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 58 Calculating chord symbols based on existing music You can automatically calculate and create chord symbols based on the harmony of notes you have already input. You can specify the musical context you want to consider in the calculation, such as which note durations and inversions you want to include. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input The Generate Chord Symbols From Selection dialog contains the following options: Harmonic rhythm Allows you to set the minimum rhythmic interval between generated chord symbols. ● Every bar: Chord symbols are created every bar. ● Every beat: Chord symbols are created every beat, according to the prevailing time signature. ● Fixed: Chord symbols are created at the specified interval.
Write mode Notations input Only create chord symbols from horizontal passages when unambiguous When activated, chord symbols are only created from notes at multiple rhythmic positions if the resulting chord is simple. Try to detect and handle passing notes When activated, Dorico Pro detects passing notes where possible and excludes them from the chord symbol calculation.
Write mode Notations input Clefs and octave lines popover The following tables contain the entries for the clefs and octave lines popover that you can use to input the different clefs and octave lines available. You can open the clefs and octave lines popover in Write mode in any of the following ways when either an item is selected or the caret is active: ● Press Shift-C . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers ● Select an existing clef or octave line and press Return .
Write mode Notations input Type of clef Popover entry Bass F clef, two octaves below f15ba, F15ba, f15d, F15d, bass15ba, or bass15d Bass F clef, octave above f8va, F8va, f8u, F8u, bass8va, or bass8u Bass F clef, two octaves above f15ma, F15ma, f15u, F15u, bass15ma, or bass15u Unpitched percussion perc 4-string tablature tab4 6-string tablature tab6 Baritone bass clef baritonebass Baritone clef baritone, c5, or ut5 Mezzo-soprano clef mezzo, c2, or ut2 Soprano C clef soprano, c1, or ut1
Write mode Notations input For example, enter treble+1t for a treble clef shifted up one octave in transposed pitch layouts, causing notes after the clef in transposed pitch layouts to appear an octave lower than they appear with a normal treble clef.
Write mode Notations input Archaic Clefs Contains clefs that are rarely used any more, such as the mezzo-soprano clef, baritone bass clef, and sub-bass clef. Octave Lines Contains octave lines, indicating up to three octaves above and below, and a loco line.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Clefs on page 931 Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 213 Setting different clefs for concert/transposed pitch on page 934 Hiding/Showing clefs according to layout transpositions on page 935 Changing the octave of clefs on page 936 Respecting/Ignoring clef octave indicators on page 938 Changing instruments on page 135 Adding instruments to players on page 133 Inputting clefs with the panel You can input clefs using the Clefs panel, both during note input
Write mode Notations input Inputting octave lines with the popover You can input octave lines using the clefs and octave lines popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input octave lines only into specific voices in multiple-voice contexts. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select the notes to which you want to add an octave line. If you want to add an octave line for a single voice, only select notes in that voice. 2.
Write mode Notations input Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 213 Notations toolbox on page 196 Keyboard panel on page 201 Fretboard panel on page 203 Drum Pads panel on page 204 Inputting octave lines with the panel You can input octave lines using the Clefs panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input octave lines only into specific voices in multiple-voice contexts.
Write mode Notations input Input methods for holds and pauses You can input holds and pauses with the keyboard by using the holds and pauses popover in Write mode, and with the mouse by using the Holds and Pauses panel. RELATED LINKS Holds and pauses on page 1052 Correct positioning for caesura input on page 339 Holds and pauses popover The table contains the entries for the holds and pauses popover that you can use to input the different holds and pauses available.
Write mode Notations input NOTE The Curlew mark was originally devised by Benjamin Britten for “Curlew River”, a parable for church performance inspired by Japanese Noh theater. It indicates that a player should hold a note or a rest until a synchronization point in asynchronous music.
Write mode Notations input ● Fermatas ● Breath Marks ● Caesuras NOTE Holds and pauses do not currently have an effect in playback, but this is planned for future versions.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 213 Holds and pauses on page 1052 Types of fermatas on page 1053 Types of breath marks on page 1054 Types of caesuras on page 1054 Positions of holds and pauses on page 1054 Inputting holds and pauses with the panel You can input holds and pauses using the Holds and Pauses panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music.
Write mode Notations input Correct positioning for caesura input Caesuras are commonly placed at the end of a bar, before a barline. In Dorico Pro, caesuras must be attached to the note immediately after the position where you want it to appear, as then Dorico Pro can automatically position them correctly. If you input caesuras with your mouse input preference set to Load pointer with item, you must click the first note in the next bar for a caesura to appear to the left of the barline.
Write mode Notations input Ornaments popover The following tables contain the entries for the ornaments popover that you can use to input the different ornaments, arpeggio signs, glissando lines, and jazz articulations available. You can open the ornaments popover in Write mode in any of the following ways when either an item is selected or the caret is active: ● Press Shift-O . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers ● Select an existing ornament and press Return .
Write mode Notations input Trill interval or quality Popover entry Diminished d, dim, or diminished Augmented a, aug, or augmented EXAMPLE To input a trill with a perfect fifth interval, enter tr p5.
Write mode Notations input Arpeggio signs Type of arpeggio sign Popover entry Up arpeggio sign arp, arpup, or arpeggioup Down arpeggio sign arpdown or arpeggiodown Non arpeggio sign nonarp or nonarpeggio Curved arpeggio sign slurarp Glissando lines Type of glissando line Popover entry Straight glissando line gliss Wavy glissando line glisswavy Guitar techniques Type of guitar technique Popover entry Guitar bend bend Vibrato bar dive and return vibbend Vibrato bar scoop vibscoop Vibr
Write mode Notations input Type of guitar technique Popover entry Pull-off po or pull NOTE You must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with descending pitch directions, such as D-C. Hammer-on then pull-off or pull-off then hammer-on (ligado) hp, hopo, hammerpull, lig, or ligado NOTE You must select at least three notes assigned to the same string with alternating pitch directions, such as C-D-C or D-C-D.
Write mode Notations input Assigning notes to strings on page 1106 Changing the allocated string for notes on tablature on page 1423 Ornaments on page 1136 Trill intervals on page 1143 Arpeggio signs on page 1155 Glissando lines on page 1163 Guitar bends on page 1169 Guitar techniques on page 1185 Jazz articulations on page 1194 Jazz ornaments on page 1195 Playing technique duration on page 1239 Ornaments panel The Ornaments panel allows you to input all the different types of ornaments available, includin
Write mode Notations input Inputting ornaments/trills with the popover You can input ornaments, trills, and jazz ornaments using the ornaments popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. When inputting trills, you can specify the trill interval, such as a minor third. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input an ornament.
Write mode Notations input Inputting ornaments/trills with the panel You can input ornaments, trills, and jazz ornaments using the Ornaments panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. NOTE These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input an ornament.
Write mode Notations input NOTE 2. ● For instruments with multiple staves, such as piano and harp, you can select existing notes on multiple staves to create cross-staff arpeggio signs. However, you cannot create cross-staff arpeggio signs between different instruments. ● Arpeggio signs are added to all notes in the selected voices at the selected rhythmic position. Optional: If you started note input, press Q to start chord input. NOTE You can only input arpeggio signs during chord input. 3. 4.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select at least one note in each voice to which you want to add an arpeggio sign. NOTE ● For instruments with multiple staves, such as piano and harp, you can select existing notes on multiple staves to create cross-staff arpeggio signs. However, you cannot create cross-staff arpeggio signs between different instruments. ● Arpeggio signs are added to all notes in the selected voices at the selected rhythmic position. 2.
Write mode Notations input 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The glissando line specified is input between the selected notes. NOTE ● If you select a single note and input a glissando line, the glissando line specified starts from the selected note and ends at the next note in the same voice on the staff, even if this crosses rests. ● Glissando lines do not automatically adjust around any notes or rests between the selected notes.
Write mode Notations input RESULT The glissando line specified is input between the selected notes. NOTE ● If you select a single note and input a glissando line, the glissando line specified starts from the selected note and ends at the next note in the same voice on the staff, even if this crosses rests. ● Glissando lines do not automatically adjust around any notes or rests between the selected notes.
Write mode Notations input For example, enter scoop for a scoop or fall for a fall. 6. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The jazz articulation you specify is input on all selected notes. During note input, this is usually the last note you input. NOTE When using the popover, all jazz articulations follow your project-wide settings for their line style. You can change their type/length after they have been input.
Write mode Notations input 4. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels , then Ornaments 5. In the Jazz section, click the jazz articulation you want. to show the Ornaments panel. RESULT The jazz articulation you specify is input on all selected notes. During note input, this is usually the last note you input. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can enable independent voice playback for individual instruments to hear different jazz articulations in different voices simultaneously.
Write mode Notations input PREREQUISITE You have input at least two notes that you want to join with a guitar bend. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the two notes you want to join with a guitar bend. For example, select a grace note and a normal note or two notes in different voices. 2. Open the ornaments popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-O . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers 3. Enter bend into the popover. 4. Press Return to close the popover. , then Ornaments .
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the two notes you want to join with a guitar bend. For example, select a grace note and a normal note or two notes in different voices. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels 3. In the Guitar section, click Guitar Bend , then Ornaments to show the Ornaments panel. . RESULT The guitar bend is input between the selected notes.
Write mode Notations input Vibrato bar techniques on page 1185 Properties panel on page 692 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Inputting guitar post-bends You can input guitar post-bends on any existing notes belonging to fretted instruments. You can also specify that post-bends are microtonal. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input 2. Optional: If you want to input vibrato bar dives onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 4. Open the ornaments popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-O . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Ornaments . 5. Enter fallsmooth into the popover to input a smooth fall jazz articulation. 6. Press Return to close the popover. 7.
Write mode Notations input Changing the line style of smooth jazz articulations on page 1197 Deleting jazz articulations on page 1198 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 431 Playing technique duration on page 1239 Inputting vibrato bar dives and returns with the popover You can input vibrato bar dives and returns between existing notes using the ornaments popover. You can input vibrato bar dives and returns between both adjacent and non-adjacent notes.
Write mode Notations input Vibrato bar dives and returns automatically point upwards or downwards on tablature according to the pitch direction of the notes they join.
Write mode Notations input Vibrato bar dives and returns automatically point upwards or downwards on tablature according to the pitch direction of the notes they join.
Write mode Notations input Inputting vibrato bar scoops with the panel You can input vibrato bar scoops using the Ornaments panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the notes to which you want to add vibrato bar scoops. 2.
Write mode Notations input 3. Open the ornaments popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-O . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Ornaments . 4. Enter vibdip into the popover. 5. Press Return to close the popover. 6. Optional: During note input, input a note or press Space to advance the caret and input the vibrato bar dip. RESULT During note input, vibrato bar dips are input at the caret position.
Write mode Notations input Inputting vibrato bar indications/lines with the popover You can input vibrato bar indications/lines using the ornaments popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. When vibrato bar indications are input across a range of items, they are input with duration and show a duration line, which is dashed by default. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input a vibrato bar indication. If you want to input a vibrato bar line, select items on the staff that span the required duration. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels , then Ornaments 3. In the Guitar section, click Vibrato Bar Line to show the Ornaments panel. . RESULT During note input, vibrato bar indications are input at the caret position.
Write mode Notations input 3. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 4. Open the ornaments popover in any of the following ways: 5. ● Press Shift-O . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Ornaments . Enter the appropriate entry for the hammer-on/pull-off you want into the popover. For example, enter ho for a hammer-on or hopo for a hammer-on then pull-off. 6. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The hammer-on/pull-off you specify is input on the selected notes.
Write mode Notations input TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the notes to which you want to add tapping indications. NOTE If you want to input tapping with pull-offs, you must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with descending pitch directions, such as D-C. 2.
Write mode Notations input Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams You can input playing techniques with the keyboard by using the playing techniques popover, and with the mouse by using the Playing Techniques panel. Pedal lines are considered playing techniques in Dorico Pro because both affect the sound that the instrument produces.
Write mode Notations input Playing techniques Playing technique Popover entry Vibrato vibrato Senza vibrato senza vibrato Naturale (nat.) nat Con sord.
Write mode Notations input Playing technique Popover entry Strum up strum up Strum down strum down Left hand lh Right hand rh This list is not comprehensive as there are many valid playing techniques. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input different types of common playing techniques. If you do not know the correct entry for a playing technique, start entering part of the playing technique and see if it becomes available in the popover menu.
Write mode Notations input Type of pedal line, retake, or pedal level change Popover entry Una corda pedal line unacorda Stop una corda pedal line u* Harp pedaling Example harp pedaling Popover entry D, C, Bb, Eb, F, G, A DCBbEbFGA, BbEb, or --^|^--- D, C♯, B, E, F♯, G♯, A DC#BEF#G#A, C#F#G#, or -v-|-vv- TIP The pipe character is optional.
Write mode Notations input Common Contains commonly used playing techniques that also apply to multiple different instrument families, such as “mute” and “legato”. Wind Contains playing techniques typically only used for wind instruments, such as “key clicks” and “whistle tones”. Brass Contains playing techniques typically only used for brass instruments, such as “cup mute” and “stopped”.
Write mode Notations input PREREQUISITE You have created any custom playing techniques you want to input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input a playing technique. If you want to input playing techniques with duration, select items on the staff that span that duration. 2. Optional: If you want to input playing techniques onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves.
Write mode Notations input During note input, playing techniques are input at the caret position and extend automatically if you included an open-ended playing technique with duration. When adding playing techniques to a single selected item, they are input at that rhythmic position only and have no duration. When adding playing techniques to a range of selected items, they are input at the rhythmic position of the earliest select item and have duration, which applies until the end of the selection.
Write mode Notations input 3. In the Playing Techniques panel, click the playing technique you want. RESULT The specified playing technique is input. It is considered voice-specific by default, meaning it only applies to the voice indicated by the caret indicator during step input or the selected voice when adding playing techniques to existing notes. It is automatically placed above the staff for up-stem voices and below the staff for down-stem voices.
Write mode Notations input 5. Optional: During note input, advance the caret and extend the pedal line in any of the following ways: ● Press Space . ● In the Keyboard, Fretboard, or Drum Pads panel toolbar, click Advance Caret . The pedal line also extends automatically as you continue inputting notes. 6.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item on each staff and at each rhythmic position where you want to input retakes or pedal level changes. 2. Optional: If you want to input notes and retakes or pedal level changes onto multiple staves with sustain pedal lines at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Open the playing techniques popover in any of the following ways: 4. ● Press Shift-P . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Playing Techniques .
Write mode Notations input RESULT The pedal line is input across the selected range. TIP Alternatively, when nothing is selected, you can click the pedal line you want in the Keyboard section of the Playing Techniques panel, then click and drag in the music area to input a pedal line and extend it to the duration you want. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can add retakes and pedal level changes within the ranges of sustain pedal lines.
Write mode Notations input ● You can also input retakes and pedal level changes by selecting notes within the ranges of sustain pedal lines and choosing Edit > Notations > Pedal Lines > [Retake or pedal level change]. You can also choose these options from the context menu.
Write mode Notations input Calculating harp pedal diagrams based on existing music You can automatically calculate suitable harp pedal diagrams based on the notes you have already input, either from a single point onwards or within a selected region. If you do not input any harp pedaling, Dorico Pro assumes all harp pedals are in their natural setting, as they would be for C major.
Write mode Notations input 6. Optional: During note input, stop open-ended string indicators by opening the playing techniques popover again and entering ? into the popover. This leaves the current string indicator with a duration line. You can also enter another string indicator into the popover, but this joins the current string indicator to the following one with a continuation line rather than a duration line, which is a less common notation. RESULT The specified string indicators are input.
Write mode Notations input ● Start note input. ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input a string indicator outside the staff. If you want to input a string indicator with a duration line, select items on the staff that span that duration. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels Techniques panel. , then Playing Techniques 3. In the Playing Techniques panel, expand the Guitar section. 4. Click the string indicator you want.
Write mode Notations input 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show in the String Indicators group. RESULT String indicators are shown in the staff beside each selected note. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Unless you have specified a string for each note, the string number shown in the string indicators is calculated automatically.
Write mode Notations input Lines panel The Lines panel contains the different types of lines available in Dorico Pro. It is located in the right zone in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Lines panel by clicking Panels toolbox. , then Lines in the Notations You can also hide/show the right zone by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-9 . The Lines panel contains the following sections: Horizontal Contains the different horizontal lines available.
Write mode Notations input TIP The notes can be in different voices, on different staves, and belong to any instruments held by the same player. ● If you want to input barline-/rhythmic position-attached lines, select items that span the required duration of the line. ● If you want to input horizontal lines that are attached to noteheads at one end but are attached to barlines/rhythmic positions at the other end, select the required note and any item at the required rhythmic position of the other end.
Write mode Notations input Inputting vertical lines You can input vertical lines on existing notes using the Lines panel, including across notes in multiple voices and on different staves that belong to the same instrument, such as piano or harp. NOTE ● If you want to input vertical lines to represent arpeggios, you can instead input arpeggio signs directly. ● You can only input one vertical line at a time.
Write mode Notations input Adding text to lines on page 1260 Showing vertical lines on the right/left of notes on page 1251 Changing the horizontal order of vertical lines on page 1252 Inputting arpeggio signs with the popover on page 346 Inputting text items You can input text at specific rhythmic positions in the score using text items. You can input staff-attached text for single staves or input system-attached text that applies to all staves and appears in all applicable layouts.
Write mode Notations input ● If you override the paragraph style of text in an individual text item or text frame, such as by making text bold, any changes you later make to corresponding parameters of the paragraph style are not applied to the overridden text. However, font size overrides are combined with the font size in the paragraph style.
Write mode Notations input 5 Font Size Allows you to change the size of selected text. TIP You can also change the font size using the following key commands: 6 ● Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-. to increase the font size ● Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-, to decrease the font size Font Stretch Allows you to make selected text wider or narrower. 7 Baseline Shift Allows you to shift the baseline of selected text gradually up or down.
Write mode Notations input style are not applied to the overridden text. However, font size overrides are combined with the font size in the paragraph style.
Write mode Notations input You can also insert music symbols by pressing Return . Editing text in text items You can edit the text shown in text items, for example, to replace individual words or to change their formatting. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Open the text editor for an existing text item in any of the following ways: ● Select the text item and press Return . ● Double-click the text item. Edit the text in the text item. For example, you can format the text using the text editor options.
Write mode Notations input ● If you do not want the syllable to be followed by an extension line or hyphen, press Right Arrow . TIP For lyrics sung over multiple notes, you can press these key commands multiple times until the lyrics popover reaches the note where you want to input the next lyric. 6. Continue entering words and syllables into the popover for the rest of the notes to which you want to add lyrics. 7. Press Return or Esc to close the popover.
Write mode Notations input Lyric lines The popover automatically opens ready to input lyrics into Line 1, except if you are changing an existing lyric. The number shown on the left-hand side of the lyrics popover indicates the lyric line into which the lyric is input. The lyrics popover with an example entry for Line 1 You can change the lyric line number by pressing Up Arrow and Down Arrow when the lyrics popover is open.
Write mode Notations input Popover navigation Key command Finish the current syllable and advance the popover to the next note or chord. - (hyphen) Advance the popover to the next note without showing an extension line or hyphen. Right Arrow Move the cursor to the next/previous letter. If the next/previous letter is in another lyric, the popover advances to that lyric. Right Arrow / Left Arrow Move the popover forwards/backwards from syllable to syllable within lines of lyrics.
Write mode Notations input 4. Figured bass popover when inputting a global Figured bass popover when inputting a local figure figure Enter the figure you want into the figured bass popover. For example, enter 4->3d=4r=2 for a 4-3 suspension that lasts a whole note, with the resolution to the third after a half note. For bracketed figures, include parentheses around the required figures or accidentals, such as (#)64(3). 5.
Write mode Notations input ● You can move figures graphically in Engrave mode, including changing the graphical length of hold lines. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can hide/show figured bass above specific players in each layout independently. ● You can simplify compound figures, that is, figures 9 and above. ● You can show figures on individual rests.
Write mode Notations input Type of figure Example popover entry Figures determined by chord symbols Em7, Amaj7, or G/B, and so on Dorico Pro automatically converts chord symbols, as you would enter into the chord symbols popover, into correct figured bass. tasto solo ts or tasto Hold duration d=2 (number of quarter notes) or d=1/2n (fraction of bass note duration) Multiple figures 6#42 or 6,#4,2 TIP You can separate figures with commas to remove ambiguity.
Write mode Notations input of resulting figures depends on the options you have set on the Figured Bass page in Engraving Options. ● The appearance of tasto solo indications depends on your setting in Engraving Options > Figured Bass > Design > Tasto Solo and the formatting of the Figured Bass Tasto Solo paragraph style. Accidentals and alterations Type of accidental/alteration Popover entry Sharp # or s TIP For raised thirds, you can enter just without the number.
Write mode Notations input Navigation during figured bass input You can move the figured bass popover manually by different amounts to input figured bass figures at other positions without closing and reopening the popover each time. Popover navigation Key command Advance the popover to the next beat, according to the prevailing time signature. Space Move the popover back to the previous beat, according to the prevailing time signature. Shift-Space Advance the popover to the start of the next bar.
Write mode Notations input RESULT The figured bass input setting is changed in the current project. This affects all subsequent figured bass you input, but does not affect any existing figured bass in the project. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can input figured bass using your chosen setting. ● You can reset existing figured bass so it follows your engraving options, regardless of the input setting when you input them.
Write mode Notations input Rehearsal marks on page 1269 Changing the index of rehearsal marks on page 1271 Changing the rehearsal mark sequence type on page 1272 Adding prefixes/suffixes to rehearsal marks on page 1273 Changing the rehearsal mark enclosure type on page 1270 Going to rehearsal marks on page 442 Mouse input settings on page 207 Inputting markers/timecodes You can input markers at specific positions in time.
Write mode Notations input The Add Marker dialog contains the following options: Text Allows you to enter custom text that is shown in the marker. Timecode Allows you to specify the timecode at which you want to input the marker. For example, if you already know the timecodes for each marker, you can enter them directly rather than positioning the playhead at the position of each marker. Valid range Displays the timecode range of the flow.
Write mode Notations input ● Delete Marker : Deletes the selected marker. NOTE You can only delete one marker at a time. RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 196 Video Properties dialog on page 185 Find Tempo dialog The Find Tempo dialog allows you to calculate tempos that best accommodate your important markers, for example, by identifying which tempos cause markers to coincide as closely as possible with strong beats.
Write mode Notations input Tempo range Allows you to set the minimum/maximum tempos you want to consider. Tempo increments Allows you to filter the suggested tempos according to their precision. ● Integral only: Only whole number tempos, that is, tempos without decimal places, are suggested. ● Allow increment by 0.25: Allows tempos with decimal places of .25, .5, and .75 to be suggested.
Write mode Notations input Metronome marks on page 1436 Input methods for repeats and tremolos You can input repeats and tremolos, including repeat endings, repeat markers, and rhythm slashes, with the keyboard by using the repeats popover, and with the mouse by using the Repeat Structures panel. Tremolos are included in the Repeat Structures panel because they indicate that notes are repeated, either individually as single-note tremolos or in sequences as multi-note tremolos.
Write mode Notations input Repeat endings Part of repeat ending Popover entry Whole repeat ending end or ending Additional repeat ending segment add Repeat markers Type of repeat marker Popover entry D.C. dc, D.C., da capo, and so on D.C. al Fine dcalf, DC al Fine, D.C. al Fine, and so on D.C. al Coda dcalc, DC al Coda, D.C. al Coda, and so on D.S. ds, D.S., dal segno, and so on D.S. al Fine dsalf, DS al Fine, D.S. al Fine, and so on D.S. al Coda dsalc, DS al Coda, D.S.
Write mode Notations input Type of tremolo Popover entry Z on stem (buzz roll) z or zonstem Remove all tremolos 0 or clear Multi-note tremolos Type of tremolo Popover entry One stroke /2, \2, or 12 Two strokes //2, \\2, or 22 Three strokes ///2, \\\2, or 32 Four strokes ////2, \\\\2, or 42 Z on stem (buzz roll) z or zonstem Remove all tremolos 0 or clear Slash regions Slash region Popover entry New slash region slash Numbered bar regions Numbered bar region Popover entry New numbe
Write mode Notations input Type of bar repeat Popover entry Repeat last bar, group in 4 %1,4 Repeat last 2 bars, group in 2 %2,2 Repeat last 4 bars, group in 4 %4,4 RELATED LINKS Notations toolbox on page 196 Inputting repeat endings with the popover on page 407 Inputting repeat markers with the popover on page 410 Inputting tremolos with the popover on page 412 Inputting slash regions on page 414 Inputting bar repeats on page 415 Bars and barlines popover on page 302 Repeat endings on page 1284 Re
Write mode Notations input Bar Repeats Allows you to input a region that indicates that the preceding bar is repeated without re-notating the bar. TIP You can input bar repeat regions with different bar groupings when using the repeats popover. Inputting repeat endings with the popover You can input repeat endings using the repeats popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the bars that you want to include in the additional ending. NOTE Your selection must start from the first bar following the previous repeat ending segment. 2. Open the repeats popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-R . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Repeats . 3.
Write mode Notations input TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select at least one item in each bar that you want to include in the first ending. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels Structures panel. , then Repeat Structures 3. In the Repeat Endings section, click Create Repeat Ending to show the Repeat .
Write mode Notations input RESULT A new repeat ending segment is added. The existing previous repeat ending segment now ends with a closed line, with an end repeat barline created if necessary. TIP You can also add additional repeat ending segments by selecting the repeat ending and changing the value for No. endings in the Repeat Endings group of the Properties panel. However, No.
Write mode Notations input RESULT During note input, repeat markers are input at the caret position. Coda sections are automatically formatted so that there is a gap between the coda and the preceding material. When adding repeat markers to existing music, they are input at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. Repeat markers that indicate the end of a section, such as Fine and D.C. al Coda, are right-aligned with the selected rhythmic position.
Write mode Notations input Inputting tremolos with the popover You can input both single-note and multi-note tremolos using the repeats popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the notes to which you want to add tremolos.
Write mode Notations input EXAMPLE Multi-note tremolos with three tremolo strokes across tuplets AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can enable independent voice playback for individual instruments, for example, if you have tremolos in one voice and slurs in another voice.
Write mode Notations input For example, click Two Strokes Single-note Tremolo to input single-note tremolos with two strokes or click Three Strokes Multi-note Tremolo to input multi-note tremolos with three strokes. RESULT Single-note tremolos are input on the selected notes with the number of tremolo strokes specified. Multi-note tremolos with the number of tremolo strokes specified are input between selected individual notes and the notes immediately after them, or between selected pairs of notes.
Write mode Notations input 3. Enter slash into the popover. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT During note input, slash regions are input spanning the duration of the selected note or item, which is usually the last input note. When adding slash regions to existing music, they span the selected duration. Slash regions are automatically formatted as appropriate for the meter.
Write mode Notations input NOTE ● You can also input bar repeat regions during note input; however, this inputs bar repeat regions from the bar containing the currently selected note. As bar repeats are mostly shown in empty bars, this is likely to produce unintended results. ● You can also input one-bar repeat regions by clicking Create Bar Repeat Region in the Bar Repeats group of the Repeat Structures panel or choosing Write > Create Bar Repeat Region.
Write mode Notations input Numbered bar region counts on page 1310 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 431 Inputting cues You can input cues by using the cues popover. PROCEDURE 1. On the staff where you want to input a cue, select items that span the duration in which you want to show a cue. NOTE You cannot input multiple cues at the same rhythmic position. If you input a cue at the same position as an existing cue, the new cue replaces the existing cue.
Write mode Notations input Hiding/Showing cues in layouts on page 949 Overlapping cues on page 956 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 431 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 459 Switching between layouts on page 42 Cues popover The cues popover allows you to input cues that refer to other instruments in the project, using the names of instruments as they are set in your project and language.
Write mode Notations input Create Cue Contains the Create Cue button which you can click to open the cues popover with the mouse. Suggest Cues Allows you to generate suggested locations for cues based on how long players have been resting. Cue suggestions Cue suggestions are places in the current flow that Dorico Pro has identified as useful locations to input cues, based on a set span of time during which players have not played.
Write mode Notations input ● Sec.: The length of time in seconds the destination instrument has been resting before the entry shown in the Bar column. Click to show the length of resting period in descending order, longest period down to shortest period. Click rows in the cue suggestions table to navigate directly to that location. By default, an area with an equivalent rhythmic duration of 5 to 10 seconds prior to the entry in the destination instrument is highlighted.
Write mode Selecting notes/items Cue suggestions are highlighted for the equivalent rhythmic duration of 5-10 seconds. You can choose not to see highlighted areas by deactivating Highlight suggestions. 8. On the staff where you want to input a cue, select items that span the duration in which you want to show a cue. 9. Open the cues popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-U . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Cues . 10.
Write mode Selecting notes/items Playing all/individual notes in chords during note input/selection on page 431 Selecting/Deselecting notes and items individually You can select/deselect existing notes and other notation items individually in the music area, for example, if you want to add articulations to a selection of notes or delete a short passage of music. TIP If you want to select a large number of notes/items, we recommend that you use one of the larger selection methods. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Selecting notes/items Selecting more items of the same type You can incrementally extend your current selection to more items of the same type and notes in the same voices, which is particularly helpful if you want to select multiple different items at once, such as dynamics and lyrics. PREREQUISITE is selected in the Engrave toolbox. If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes and items you want to select more of. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode.
Write mode Selecting notes/items 2. In the music area, click and drag across the area where you want to select everything. A gray rectangle indicates which notes and notations will be selected. We recommend that you click in one corner of the area you want to select and drag diagonally across to the other corner. RESULT When you release the mouse, all notes and notations in the area within the gray rectangle are selected. NOTE Only items completely within the area are selected.
Write mode Selecting notes/items 2. The second expansion in page view is to the boundaries of the current system, both to the left and right. In galley view, the second expansion is to the rest of the flow, as there is only a single system in galley view. 3. In page view, the third expansion is to the entire flow.
Write mode Selecting notes/items 1 Set Edit Stop Position Allows you to set and delete Insert mode stop positions. 2 Delete Allows you to delete the selected region. NOTE When you hover over Delete, the highlight color of the selected region changes. 3 System Track Select Allows you to select all items, including system objects, on all staves in the system across the selected region. 4 Add Allows you to add bars or beats of the same duration as the selection in the system track.
Write mode Selecting notes/items TIP If you do not want the system track to be shown in all future projects by default, deactivate Show system track in new projects in the View section of the General page in Preferences. RELATED LINKS Preferences dialog on page 56 Selecting bars with the system track The system track allows you to select all items, including system objects, on all staves in the system across the selected bars. PREREQUISITE The system track is shown. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Selecting notes/items NOTE You cannot Shift -click when selecting beats. 3. Click System Track Select your selection is narrow. System Track Select in the system track. It can also appear above the system track if appears filled in when you hover your mouse pointer over it. RESULT Everything on all staves in the selected beats is selected and highlighted, including system objects, notations, and signposts. NOTE If you then delete your selection, any signposts included are also deleted.
Write mode Selecting notes/items NOTE There is no filter for barlines. You also cannot filter fingerings, beams, articulations, or tremolos, as they are considered part of the notes to which they apply. RELATED LINKS Filters for lyrics on page 1076 Filter Notes by Pitch dialog The Filter Notes by Pitch dialog allows you to specify notes that you want to filter from a larger selection by their pitch. You can specify pitches in only a single octave or in all octaves.
Write mode Selecting notes/items Add Adds the currently set parameters as a filter. RELATED LINKS Large selections on page 424 Changing filters to select/deselect You can change whether the available filter options select or deselect the specified items. By default, filters select items, meaning that the resulting selection only includes the item being filtered. When filters are set to deselect, the resulting selection includes everything except the item being filtered.
Write mode Editing items Input methods for dynamics on page 310 Playing all/individual notes in chords during note input/selection You can change your default setting for whether all notes in chords are played when you select any note in the chord or whether only the selected notes are played. PREREQUISITE Notes are played during note input/selection. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click Note Input and Editing. 3.
Write mode Editing items NOTE 2. ● When multiple items are selected, you can only lengthen/shorten them by the current rhythmic grid resolution. ● You can only lengthen/shorten one of the following items at a time: slurs, gradual dynamics, groups of gradual dynamics, and bar repeat regions. ● When using the mouse, you can only lengthen/shorten a single item at a time. Figured bass and playing techniques, including string indicators and vibrato bar lines, must have duration already.
Write mode Editing items Dynamic groups are lengthened/shortened proportionally by lengthening/shortening the gradual dynamics and moving any other type of dynamic in the group. This retains the relative durations of the gradual dynamics in the group. NOTE ● The minimum length of a bar repeat region is one bar. If you shorten regions with longer groupings, such as every four bars, the length of the region is halved until a one-bar repeat region remains.
Write mode Editing items Cross-staff and cross-voice slurs on page 1356 Groups of dynamics on page 988 Showing consecutive hairpins as continuous on page 981 Hiding/Showing figured bass suspension hold lines on page 1000 Changing existing items You can change all items that have an associated popover, rather than deleting them and inputting new ones. For example, if you want to change an 8va octave line into a 15va octave line or change a short fermata into a long fermata. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Editing items Changing the size of notes/items You can change the size of individual notes and items using the default scale sizes for cues, grace notes, a custom scale size, or a custom scale size in addition to a default scale size. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. TIP ● If you want to change the size of notes because you want them to be grace notes or cues, you can input them as either grace notes or cues instead.
Write mode Editing items Grace for Scale then set Custom Scale to 50, the size of the selected notes/items is half the size of grace notes.
Write mode Editing items RESULT The staff-relative placement of the selected items is changed by setting Placement, Position, or Direction properties appropriately in the corresponding groups of the Properties panel. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain for items whose staff-relative placement properties are local. Deactivating these properties resets items to their default placement.
Write mode Editing items TIP To select multiple items of the same type, you can use large selections and/or filters. 2. Choose Edit > Reset Appearance. RESULT All properties that affect the appearance of the selected items are reset to their default settings. If the property scope was set to Locally, any properties that are layout-specific and frame chain-specific are only reset in the current layout and frame chain.
Write mode Hiding non-printing elements Hiding non-printing elements You can temporarily hide all visible elements that do not print, such as signposts, selection highlights, and frames. This allows you to view the current layout as it will appear when printed/ exported without switching to Print mode. PROCEDURE ● Press and hold \ (Windows) or ` (macOS) . RESULT All non-printing elements in the current layout are hidden until you release the key command.
Write mode Navigation Navigating to other items in the music area You can navigate to other notes and items in the music area after you have selected a note/item, for example, if you want to move the selection to other notes along the staff without using the mouse. NOTE In Engrave mode, navigating to other items always moves the selection to the closest item graphically, rather than the next/previous item of the same type. PROCEDURE 1. Select an item in the music area.
Write mode Navigation 4. Optional: After switching the selection to another type of item, navigate to other items of that type. RELATED LINKS System objects on page 1403 Going to flows You can go to the next/previous flow in the current layout, which automatically brings the start of that flow into view in the music area. This is particularly useful when navigating around layouts that contain many flows. These steps function in Setup, Write, and Engrave modes.
Write mode Navigation RELATED LINKS Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 58 Page arrangements for page view on page 40 Moving the view in the music area on page 442 Zooming in/out of the music area on page 443 Going to bars You can go to any specific bar in any flow in the current layout, for example, to jump quickly to the exact bar that requires changes when editing music. These steps function in Setup, Write, Engrave, and Play modes. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Navigation PROCEDURE ● Move the view in any of the following ways: ● To move the view upwards/downwards, scroll upwards/downwards on a mouse wheel or swipe upwards/downwards on a touchpad. ● To move the view to the right/left, Shift -scroll upwards/downwards on a mouse wheel or swipe to the right/left on a touchpad. ● To navigate to the next page, press End (horizontal page arrangements) or Page Down (vertical page arrangements) .
Write mode Instrument filters ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-- or X . ● Pinch two fingers together on a touchpad. ● Ctrl/Cmd -scroll downwards on a mouse wheel. ● Use the zoom options in the status bar. RESULT The zoom level in the music area is changed. If you had anything selected, Dorico Pro uses your selection as the focal point of the zoom. If you had nothing selected, Dorico Pro focuses on the area previously in the center of the view.
Write mode Instrument filters Selecting notes/items on page 421 Editing items on page 431 Arranging tools on page 454 Hiding/Showing empty staves on page 619 Instrument filter overlay The instrument filter overlay allows you to apply instrument filters to layouts and add new instrument filters. It only appears in galley view in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the instrument filter overlay in Write mode by choosing View > Instrument Filter Overlay.
Write mode Instrument filters The Manage Instrument Filters dialog comprises the following: 1 Managing instrument presets for Displays the name of the layout whose instrument filters are listed in the dialog. 2 Instrument filters list Contains the instrument filters set for the layout. Each instrument filter displays its name and the instruments it contains. If multiple instrument filters contain the same instruments, Dorico Pro displays a warning.
Write mode Instrument filters Activating/Deactivating instrument filters You can activate/deactivate instrument filters at any time in each layout independently. For example, if you want to show only woodwind staves whilst working on the woodwind section. PREREQUISITE ● You are in galley view. ● The instrument filter overlay is shown. ● You have added the instrument filters you want to use. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, open the layout in which you want to activate/deactivate instrument filters. 2.
Write mode Signposts Adding instrument filters You can add any number of instrument filters to each layout independently. PREREQUISITE ● You are in galley view. ● The instrument filter overlay is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, open the layout to which you want to add instrument filters. 2. Select at least one item belonging to each instrument you want to include in the instrument filter. 3. In the instrument filter overlay, click Add Instrument Filter .
Write mode Insert mode you can use signposts to change properties of hidden/invisible items, for example, by selecting system break signposts in order to change the staff size from that position. Selected signposts appear solid, while unselected signposts appear opaque. Signposts include a text summary of the hidden/invisible item to help you identify it. For example, time signature signposts include the time signature, expressed as a fraction, and its beat subdivision.
Write mode Insert mode For example, if you input four quarter notes with Insert mode activated, all subsequent notes are pushed four quarter note beats back to accommodate the new notes. Edits outside of note input that are affected by Insert mode include copying/pasting notes, deleting notes, changing the duration of notes including by adding/removing rhythm dots, or inputting time signatures. The voices and staves affected by Insert mode depend on the Insert mode scope.
Write mode Insert mode ● Choose Write > Insert Scope > [Scope]. In Dorico Pro, there are the following Insert mode scopes: Voice Insert mode only affects the selected voices. During note input, this is the voice indicated by the caret indicator. Outside of note input, this includes all selected voices, such as when you copy and paste material across multiple staves. Player Insert mode affects all voices and instruments belonging to the selected players.
Write mode Insert mode Changing the Insert mode scope You can change the Insert mode scope, for example, if you want to switch from inserting notes into the selected voice only to inserting rhythmic time for all players. The current Insert mode scope is indicated in the Notes toolbox and by the caret during note input. PROCEDURE ● In Write mode, change the Insert mode scope in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-I to cycle through the different Insert mode scopes.
Write mode Insert mode EXAMPLE Insert mode stop position across two piano staves RELATED LINKS System track on page 425 Deleting Insert mode stop positions You can delete Insert mode stop positions after they have been set. PROCEDURE ● In Write mode, delete Insert mode stop positions in any of the following ways: ● Select an item at the rhythmic position of the Insert mode stop position and press Shift-Alt/Opt-I .
Write mode Arranging tools Arranging tools Arranging tools in Dorico Pro allow you to allocate notes to different staves and voices quickly and efficiently. These tools include copying notes and items to multiple staves at the same time, and multiple times within a selected range, moving notes between staves, and changing the voices of notes. You can also explode notes onto more staves and reduce notes onto fewer staves.
Write mode Arranging tools TIP You can also delete markers by selecting them in the Markers section of the Video panel and clicking Delete in the action bar. If a slur began or ended on a deleted note, the slur is automatically repositioned to the next/ previous notehead. If only one note is left under a slur, the slur is automatically deleted. Holds and pauses are not automatically deleted if they are not selected when you delete notes.
Write mode Arranging tools Turning existing notes into tuplets on page 1508 Turning tuplets into normal notes on page 1509 Insert mode on page 449 Groups of dynamics on page 988 Linked dynamics on page 989 Accidental duration rules on page 813 Changing the rehearsal mark sequence type on page 1272 Inputting notes on page 215 Notations input on page 271 Copying and pasting notes/items You can copy and paste items, including notes and notations, to other rhythmic positions and staves in different ways.
Write mode Arranging tools Musical transformations on page 467 Numbered bar regions on page 1309 Insert mode on page 449 Chord mode on page 250 Copying and pasting notes into different voices You can copy and paste notes into voices that are different to their original voices, including into slash voices. For example, you can copy notes from an up-stem voice on one staff into a down-stem voice on another staff. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes you want to copy. 2.
Write mode Arranging tools TIP If you selected a range of notes/items on each staff, the selected notes/items are also pasted multiple times to fill the selected range.
Write mode Arranging tools Disabling automatic linking of dynamics and slurs when pasting By default, dynamics and slurs are automatically linked when you copy them to other staves at the same rhythmic position. You can disable this behavior so dynamics and slurs are not linked by default. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. In the category list, click Note Input and Editing. 3. In the Editing section, deactivate Link dynamics and slurs to existing items when pasting. 4.
Write mode Arranging tools NOTE 2. ● If you want tuplet notes to remain tuplets, you must also select their tuplet numbers/ ratios, brackets, or tuplet signposts, otherwise notes become normal notes of their rhythmic value when you move them beyond the boundaries of tuplets. ● You can only move a single slur, marker, repeat ending, or bar repeat region at a time. ● When using the mouse, you can only move a single item at a time.
Write mode Arranging tools RESULT The selected notes, items, and/or signposts are moved to new rhythmic positions. Attachment lines link items to the rhythmic positions to which they apply. Most items move according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. However, a single selection of some items automatically moves to adjacent noteheads, bars, or barlines. Single cues are moved according to the rhythm in the source instrument.
Write mode Arranging tools EXAMPLE An ossia staff with signposts shown The same ossia staff after moving the start signpost to the right and end signpost to the left RELATED LINKS Rhythmic grid on page 208 Notes toolbox on page 191 Note spacing on page 574 Chord mode on page 250 Insert mode on page 449 Note and rest grouping on page 882 Tuplet brackets on page 1511 Tuplet numbers/ratios on page 1514 Changing the duration of notes on page 224 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 431 Changing the staff-re
Write mode Arranging tools Moving notes/items to other staves You can move notes and items to other staves of any type, for example, if you want to move individual notes from one keyboard staff to another after importing a keyboard part from a MIDI file. NOTE ● These steps do not apply to pedal lines or system objects. ● If you want notes to appear on a different staff but remain attached to their original staff, such as to create a cross-staff beam, you can cross notes to other staves instead.
Write mode Arranging tools PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the range of music on two staves that you want to swap. 2. Choose Edit > Paste Special > Swap. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT The contents of the selected staves for the selected duration are swapped.
Write mode Arranging tools Exploding music onto multiple staves You can explode music onto more staves than it was originally notated for, for example, to get notes in dense piano chords onto all the woodwind staves quickly. PREREQUISITE ● You have chosen the appropriate settings for the music you want to explode on the Paste Special page in Note Input Options. ● You have reset any cross-staff notes to their default staves. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the music you want to explode. 2.
Write mode Arranging tools ● To change the selected notes to a new normal voice, press Shift-V or click Create Voice in the Notes toolbox. ● To change the selected notes to a new slash voice, press Shift-Alt/Opt-V . You can also in the Notes toolbox, then click Create Slash Voice . click and hold Create Voice ● To change the selected notes to an existing voice, press V or click Next Voice Notes toolbox to cycle through active voices on the staff.
Write mode Musical transformations RESULT The contents of the voices are swapped. For example, the notes previously in an up-stem voice are now in a down-stem voice, and the notes previously in a down-stem voice are now in an up-stem voice. NOTE Depending on the pitches involved in the swap and their stem directions, the notes might overlap.
Write mode Musical transformations Pitch mapping Specified pitches are transposed to become other specified pitches, such as mapping all C♯s to D♭s. Scale mapping All notes in the specified source scale are transposed to become the equivalent notes in the destination scale according to their scale degree. TIP You can change the default behavior of musical transformations on the Musical Transformations page in Note Input Options.
Write mode Musical transformations RELATED LINKS Reverse and Invert Pitches and Reverse Rhythms dialogs on page 469 Note tools popover on page 477 Note Input Options dialog on page 703 Large selections on page 424 Arranging tools on page 454 Inputting notes on page 215 Reversing pitches/rhythms You can reverse notes, including pitches and/or rhythms, and staff-attached items so that selections are played backwards, for example, the first note of a phrase becomes the last note.
Write mode Musical transformations ● To open the Reverse and Invert Pitches dialog, choose Write > Transform > Pitches > Reverse and Invert Pitches. ● To open the Reverse and Invert Pitches and Reverse Rhythms dialog, choose Write > Transform > All > Reverse and Invert Pitches and Reverse Rhythms. The dialogs contain the following options: Invert using Allows you to change the inversion behavior. ● Outermost pitches: Inverts pitches within the range of the highest and lowest notes in the selection.
Write mode Musical transformations RELATED LINKS Tonality systems on page 1068 Changing the tonality system on page 1069 Rotating pitches/rhythms You can rotate notes, including pitches and/or rhythms, and staff-attached items by a specified number of steps either forwards or backwards, so that, for example, the first note in a phrase’s original pitch is given to the second note, the second note’s pitch to the third note, and so on. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Musical transformations The dialogs contain the following options: Number of steps Allows you to set the number of steps in the rotation. Direction Allows you to set the rotation direction. ● Forwards: Rotates forwards, that is, pitches/rhythms shift to the right. ● Backwards: Rotates backwards, that is, pitches/rhythms shift to the left.
Write mode Musical transformations The Repeat Pitches dialog contains the following option: Number of pitches to repeat Allows you to set the number of pitches you want to repeat across the selection, starting from the first selected note. Mapping notes to pitches You can map multiple source pitches to destination pitches in a single transformation, for example, if you want to transform all C♯s, F♯s, and A♯s into D♭s, G♭s, and B♭s. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Musical transformations The Map Pitches dialog contains the following options: Map pitch Allows you to specify the source pitch you want to map to the destination pitch. You can select a note name and accidental, and you can also optionally specify the octave. The available accidentals depend on the prevailing tonality system. Include enharmonic equivalents When activated, enharmonic equivalents to the specified source pitch are included in the mapping.
Write mode Musical transformations Mapping list Contains the set mappings for the transformation. Mapping notes to scales You can map all notes in a specified source scale to equivalent degrees of a destination scale, for example, if you want to transform a passage from major to minor with the same root. You can also exclude individual pitches in both scales from the mapping. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes whose pitches you want to map. 2.
Write mode Musical transformations The Map Scale dialog contains the following options: Use source root When activated, allows you to specify the source scale root you want to map to the destination scale root. You can select a note name and accidental. The available accidentals depend on the prevailing tonality system. When deactivated, Dorico Pro uses the scale root implied by the prevailing key signature.
Write mode Musical transformations Destination scale overrides Allows you to specify any pitch overrides you want to apply to the destination scale. For example, if you want to exclude specific pitches from the transformation. Direction Allows you to specify the octave selection for the mapping. ● Closest: Destination pitches use the octave the smallest interval from the source pitch. ● Up: Destination pitches are higher than the source pitch.
Write mode Musical transformations Note Tools button in the Notations toolbox Note tools popover with an example entry The following tables contain examples of what you can enter into the note tools popover to transform selections, transpose notes, or add notes above/below existing notes.
Write mode Musical transformations Type of addition Popover entry Add notes [n] octave divisions above, using the 5 8 div in any tonality system note name a fifth above 5 8 st in 12-EDO 5 16 qt in 24-EDO Add notes [n] octave divisions below, using the -6 9 div in any tonality system note name a sixth below -6 9 st in 12-EDO -6 18 qt in 24-EDO Add chords containing multiple notes 3,6 or -3,3,4 Add notes only to the top notes in chords top Add notes only to the bottom notes in chords bottom NOTE ● W
Write mode Musical transformations EXAMPLE To transpose C♮ upwards by nine quarter tones in 24-EDO, you can enter t 3 9 qt for E or t 4 9 qt for F.
Write mode Musical transformations Type of reversal Popover entry Specify pitches only pitch or pt Specify rhythms only rhythm or rm Reverse and invert pitches ret invert, rev inv, and so on TIP You can also include additional specifications for the inversion. Include additional items belonging to the same player as the selection player Include only items belonging to the same voice voice as the selection EXAMPLE To reverse the pitches and items in the selected voice only, enter rev pt voice.
Write mode Musical transformations Type of repetition Popover entry Repeat the first eight pitches in the selection across the selection repeat 8 pitches This list is not comprehensive as you can repeat any number of pitches. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry. Pitch mapping Type of pitch mapping Popover entry Specify source and destination pitches c4=eb4,f4=g4,a4=bb5 For example, to map C4 to E♭4, F4 to G4, and A4 to B♭4.
Write mode Musical transformations Type of scale mapping or scale Popover entry Specify snapped pitches should be lowered down or lower Respell notes to the specified scale spell [scale], such as spell Cmaj Snap notes to the specified scale snap [scale], such as snap cmin Scale roots c, Db, e, f#, g, and so on Alterations #4, b6, and so on Major maj or M Minor min or m Ionian major ion maj or ion M Harmonic minor harm m or hmc min Melodic minor (ascending) me m or mdc min Dorian dor
Write mode Musical transformations Type of scale mapping or scale Popover entry Half-whole diminished half whole dimin, halfwhole dimin, hw dim, half-tone dimin, half tone dimin, halftone dimin, htone dim, hton dim, half dim, or ht dim Half-whole octatonic half whole octa, halfwhole octa, hw oct, half-tone octa, half tone octa, halftone octa, htone oct, hton oct, half oct, or ht oct Whole-half diminished whole half dimin, wholehalf dimin, wh dim, whole tone dimin, whole-tone dimin, wholetone dimin,
Write mode Splitting flows Arranging tools on page 454 Inputting notes on page 215 Splitting flows You can split flows at specific rhythmic positions. Flows in Dorico Pro are independent of each other, meaning they can contain different players, have different time signatures and key signatures, and have different options for notations, including note grouping and accidental duration rules.
Write mode Comments A passage with comments and replies By default, comments are shown in the music area. They appear as speech bubble symbols as close as possible to their attached position. Comments that are replies are stacked vertically below the original comment. All comments in the current layout are listed in the Comments panel in Write mode. Clicking a comment, either in the Comments panel or in the music area, automatically moves the view to bring that rhythmic position into focus.
Write mode Comments Comments panel The Comments panel shows all the comments in the current layout as a list. Replies to comments are indented to indicate their relationship to the original comment. The Comments panel is located in the right zone in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Comments panel by clicking Panels Notations toolbox. , then Comments You can also hide/show the right zone by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-9 . Comments panel Each comment in the panel shows the following: 487 Dorico Pro 4.1.
Write mode Comments 1 Author name: This uses either the current user account or a custom name, depending on the preference that was set when the comment was added. 2 Comment content 3 Date the comment was added to the project 4 Instrument to which the comment applies 5 Bars to which the comment applies The action bar at the bottom of the panel contains the following options: Create Comment Adds a comment to the selected rhythmic position and staff.
Write mode Comments Adding comments You can add comments at any rhythmic position in your project, including adding different comments to multiple staves at the same rhythmic position. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to add a comment. If you want your comment to apply to a range, select multiple items. 2. Press Alt/Opt-C to open the Comment dialog. 3. Enter your comment into the dialog. 4.
Write mode Comments TIP You can also reply to comments by clicking Reply to Comment choosing Write > Reply to Comment. in the Comments panel, or by EXAMPLE A reply to a comment Editing existing comments You can change the contents of existing comments after you have added them, for example, to correct misspellings or add further information. PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the comment you want to edit to open the Comment dialog. You can do this in the music area and in the Comments panel. 2.
Write mode Comments 6. Click Apply, then Close. Exporting comments You can export all comments from all flows in the layout currently open in the music area to an HTML file. For example, if you want to view them all in a single place. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, open the layout whose comments you want to export. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Panels 3. In the Comments section action bar, click Export Comments , then Comments to show the Comments panel. .
Engrave mode Engrave mode allows you to manipulate and modify every item in your project, but without deleting them, moving them rhythmically, or changing the pitch of notes. You can also determine how the pages in each layout of your project are formatted for printing or exporting. Project window in Engrave mode The project window in Engrave mode contains a toolbox and panels with all the tools and functions that allow you to format the pages, systems, and properties of individual notations in your score.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode 3 Pages panel Allows you to control how pages are formatted, such as by adding and customizing page templates and flow headings. 4 Lower zone Can display either the Properties panel or Mixer panel, according to the current selection in the lower zone toolbar. RELATED LINKS Project window on page 29 Properties panel on page 692 Engrave toolbox The Engrave toolbox allows you to change the panel shown in the left zone and to activate note and staff spacing.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode TIP By default when you switch to Engrave mode, Dorico Pro remembers the tool you last selected. You can choose always to select Graphic Editing when you switch to Engrave mode instead on the General page in Preferences.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Moving Bars Between Systems The Moving Bars Between Systems allows you to move selected bars to other systems. Move to Previous System Moves the selected bars to the previous system. Inserts system breaks at the start and end of the system to which the bars were moved. You can also move bars to the previous system by pressing , . Move to Next System Moves the selected bars to the next system.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Fixes the formatting of the selected frames, even if you change the formatting of surrounding frames. Make into Frame Forces all music between the selected items into the same frame. You can use this option to force music onto a single page. Lock Layout The Lock Layout section allows you to fix and reset all systems and pages in the current layout.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Joins the staves on which you have selected items with a sub-sub-bracket. NOTE The selected staves must be within a bracket and sub-bracket. Insert brace Joins the staves on which you have selected items with a brace. NOTE Staves cannot be joined by both a brace and a sub-bracket or sub-sub-bracket simultaneously. Change barline joins Joins the barlines across the staves on which you have selected items.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Insert Music Frame Allows you to insert a music frame. On pages in layouts, this inserts a music frame that belongs to a layout frame chain. On page templates in the page template editor, this inserts a frame that belongs to a page template frame chain. Insert Text Frame Allows you to insert a frame into which you can enter text and tokens. Insert Graphics Frame Allows you to insert a frame that can contain an image or an illustration.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode The Graphic Slices panel contains the following: 1 Create Slice Allows you to draw a graphic slice. 2 Graphic slices table Contains all the graphic slices in the current flow. The table contains the following columns: ● Slice name: Displays the current name for the corresponding graphic slice, which is used for its file name when exported. Allows you to enter a new name or edit the existing name.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode Allow you to change the graphics file format, color mode, and image resolution of the selected graphic slices. 4 Destination folder field Displays the export path where exported graphic slices will be saved. By default, this is the same folder as the Dorico project. If you change the export path, subsequent graphic slices you create use your most recently specified export path.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode The action bar at the bottom of the section contains the following options: ● Insert Pages : Allows you to insert pages before/after specified pages. Inserted pages can be empty or can use a page template as a starting point. ● Insert Page Number Change selected page onwards. ● Insert Page Template Change : Allows you to assign a different page template to the selected page or from the selected page onwards.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode The action bar at the bottom of the section contains the following options: : Allows you to add a new page template to the current ● New Page Template page template set. ● Edit Page Template : Opens the page template editor in which you can change the formatting of the selected page template. You can also open the page template editor by double-clicking a page template in the Page Templates section.
Engrave mode Project window in Engrave mode The action bar at the bottom of the section contains the following options: ● New Flow Heading template set. : Allows you to add a new flow heading to the current page ● Edit Flow Heading : Opens the flow heading editor in which you can change the formatting of the selected flow heading. You can also open the flow heading editor by double-clicking a flow heading in the Flow Headings section. ● Rename Flow Heading ● Delete Flow Heading template set.
Engrave mode Page templates Page format changes on page 519 Page templates Page templates in Dorico Pro allow you to achieve consistent page formatting by applying the same arrangements of frames to multiple pages and in different layouts. NOTE You can set the page size, margins, page orientation, and staff size for each layout in Layout Options. All pages in your scores and parts inherit their default formatting from page templates.
Engrave mode Page templates The Page Templates section of the Pages panel in Engrave mode, showing the two default page templates in the Default Full Score page template set. You can customize the default page templates in the page template editor as required for the current project. You can also create new, custom page templates in each page template set, for example, for title pages and performance instructions.
Engrave mode Page templates Page template sets In Dorico Pro, page templates are provided as parts of page template sets. Page template sets group page templates and flow headings together, so there is suitable page formatting available for all possible situations in your project. New projects contain the following page template sets by default: ● Default Full Score: Used for full score and custom score layouts by default. ● Default Part: Used for part layouts by default.
Engrave mode Page templates RESULT A new page template set that is a duplicate of the selected page template set is created. It appears immediately in the list of page template sets. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can rename the page template set and add new page templates to it. ● You can apply the page template set to layouts. ● You can export the page template set if you want to use it in other projects.
Engrave mode Page templates Exporting page template sets You can export page template sets so you can send them to other users or use them in other projects. By default, any page template sets you create or edit are available in the current project only. PREREQUISITE The right zone is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In the Page Template Sets section of the Pages panel, select the page template set you want to export. 2. Click Export Page Template Set 3. Specify a name and location for the page template set file.
Engrave mode Page templates Deleting page template sets You can delete page template sets that you no longer need, including the default page template sets. PREREQUISITE The right zone is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In the Page Template Sets section of the Pages panel, click the page template set that you want to delete. 2. In the action bar, click Delete Page Template Set .
Engrave mode Page templates First page template open in the page template editor The First page template contains the following tokens in text frames: 1 Layout name (Default Part page template set only) 2 Project title 3 Project lyricist 4 Project composer 5 Project copyright Default A page template that is usually used for the second page of music onwards. It contains a single large music frame and text frames to show the running header and page number.
Engrave mode Page templates Default page template open in the page template editor The Default page template contains the following tokens in text frames: 1 Page number 2 Flow title (Default Full Score page template set) or Layout name (Default Part page template set) Custom A page template that can have any formatting.
Engrave mode Page templates Adding page templates You can add new page templates to page template sets. For example, you can create a title page template and assign it to the first page of each part layout. Each page template set can contain a single First, a single Default, and multiple Custom page templates. TIP You can share page templates between page template sets by importing page templates.
Engrave mode Page templates 6. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT A new page template of the selected type is added to the selected page template set. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can assign page templates to individual pages in layouts that use their page template set. ● You can customize your new page template. ● You can import your new page template into other page template sets in the current project.
Engrave mode Page templates both page templates, for example, changing the text in an existing text frame. Deleting frames and inputting new ones breaks this link. Type Allows you to choose the type of the new page template. NOTE If you select First or Default, the new page template replaces that existing page template, as each page template set can only have a single first and default page template.
Engrave mode Page templates If you import a First or Default page template, the imported page template replaces the corresponding page template in the destination page template set, as each page template set can only have a single first and default page template. Music frames on imported page templates are automatically assigned to their own frame chain, regardless of the frame chain to which they were originally assigned in their source page template set.
Engrave mode Page templates The Import Page Template dialog comprises the following: Page template set menu Allows you to select the page template set from which you want to import a page template. You can only select page template sets already in the current project. Page template to import Contains the page templates in the selected page template set, displayed in a list. You can only select and import a single page template at a time.
Engrave mode Page templates Deleting page templates You can delete page templates from page template sets. NOTE You cannot delete Default page templates. Each page template set must contain at least a Default page template. You can replace Default page templates by adding a page template and setting its type to Default. PREREQUISITE The right zone is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, open a layout that uses the page template set containing the page template you want to delete.
Engrave mode Page templates A page template open in the page template editor, showing its left and right pages RELATED LINKS Pages panel on page 500 Tokens on page 551 Frames on page 536 Customizing page templates You can customize page templates according to your needs in the page template editor. Changing a page template affects the appearance of all pages in all layouts that use that page template.
Engrave mode Page templates For example, you can change the size and shape of frames. 3. Optional: If you want both the left and right pages to be the same, click one of the following Copy Page Layout buttons at the top of the music area, depending on which page you changed: ● Left to Right ● Right to Left NOTE 4. ● This copies the page template layout exactly from one page to the other, not as a mirror. For example, text frames for page numbers are not kept on the outside edge automatically.
Engrave mode Page templates Pages with page template overrides no longer automatically inherit changes that are made to the page template. To return overridden pages to following the page template format, you must remove page template overrides. Pages with page template overrides are shown with a red marking in their top left corner. Page template override Page number changes A change to the default page number sequence, such as numbering prefatory pages with Roman numerals.
Engrave mode Page templates ● Flow heading changes from the page onwards: along left and bottom edges. Flow heading change to single page only Flow heading change from selected page onwards NOTE ● If you inserted a page in the middle or at the end of your layout using a custom page template and remove the override, that page is automatically assigned the Default page template of the page template set. ● You cannot save overrides you have made to individual pages as a page template.
Engrave mode Page templates ● To remove overrides from selected pages only, click Remove Overrides section action bar. in the Pages ● To remove overrides from all pages, right-click in the Pages section of the Pages panel and choose Remove All Page Overrides from the context menu. RESULT Any overrides you made to the page template format are removed from either the selected pages only or from all pages in the layout currently open in the music area.
Engrave mode Page templates 5. In the First page number field, enter the new page number that you want the selected page to have. For example, if you want to change your current page 3 to page 5, enter 5. 6. 7. Select one of the following numeral styles for Sequence type: ● Number ● Roman numeral Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The page number of the selected page is changed.
Engrave mode Page templates The Page Number Change dialog contains the following options: From page Allows you to select the page from which you want to change page numbers. The number indicates its position within the layout. The Displayed preview shows how the page number of the selected page currently appears. If you have inserted page number changes in the layout, the displayed page number might be different to the underlying page number.
Engrave mode Page templates Removing page number changes You can remove page number changes you have made to individual pages, which reverts pages to their default page numbers. Any pages whose page number has been changed are shown with a colored triangle in their bottom right corner in the Pages section of the Pages panel. PREREQUISITE The right zone is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, open the layout whose page number changes you want to remove. 2.
Engrave mode Page templates 2. In the Pages section of the Pages panel, click the page whose page template assignment you want to change. 3. In the action bar, click Insert Page Template Change Change dialog. 4. Optional: Change the start page for the page template change using the From page option. 5. Select the page template that you want to assign from the Use page template menu. 6. Choose one of the following options for Range: 7.
Engrave mode Page templates ● To remove page template changes from all pages, right-click in the Pages section of the Pages panel and choose Remove All Page Template Changes from the context menu. RESULT All page template changes are removed from either the selected pages only or from all pages in the layout currently open in the music area. Pages return to using either the First or Default page template, depending on their position in the layout and your per-layout settings.
Engrave mode Page templates RESULT If you selected Current Page Only, the selected flow heading is applied to all flow headings on the selected page only. If you selected From This Page Onwards, the selected flow heading is applied to all flow headings on the selected page and all subsequent pages in the layout or until the next existing flow heading change.
Engrave mode Page templates Use flow heading Allows you to specify the flow heading design you want to apply. The menu contains all available flow headings in the current page template set. Range Allows you to specify the range to which you want to apply the flow heading change. ● Current Page Only applies the flow heading change only to the selected page.
Engrave mode Flow headings If you removed flow heading changes from selected pages only, any other pages with flow heading changes in the layout are unaffected.
Engrave mode Flow headings Dashed lines showing the edges of a flow heading text frame Any changes you make to flow headings in the flow heading editor are automatically reflected on the pages that use those flow headings. For example, if you delete a token from a flow heading in the flow heading editor, that token is removed from all the pages that use that flow heading, so long as those pages do not have page template overrides.
Engrave mode Flow headings Flow heading editor The flow heading editor allows you to view and change the format of flow headings. It functions similarly to the page template editor; however, the background of the flow heading editor is a different color to help you identify what you are editing. You can open the flow heading editor in the following ways: ● Double-click a flow heading in the Flow Headings section of the Pages panel.
Engrave mode Flow headings Customizing flow headings You can customize flow headings according to your needs in the flow heading editor, such as by inputting a graphics frame or changing the tokens in an existing text frame. Changing a flow heading affects the appearance of flow headings in all layouts that use that flow heading. PREREQUISITE The right zone is shown. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, open a layout that uses the page template set containing the flow heading you want to customize. 2.
Engrave mode Flow headings 4. Select the existing flow heading on which you want to base the new flow heading from the Based on menu. NOTE 5. ● Flow headings based on existing flow headings retain a link to the Based on flow heading. Any changes you make to frames shared between the flow headings affect both flow headings, for example, changing the text in an existing text frame. Deleting frames and inputting new ones breaks this link.
Engrave mode Flow headings NOTE You can also select the page template set from the Current set menu in the Page Templates section of the Pages panel when any layout is open in the music area. However, this changes the page template set applied to the layout. 2. In the Flow Headings section of the Pages panel, click the flow heading pair that you want to rename. 3. In the action bar, click Rename Flow Heading 4. Enter the name you want in the Name field. 5.
Engrave mode Frames Frames Frames are boxes that allow you to position music, additional text, and graphics on pages. Frames can be any size and shape, as long as they fit within the page margins. In Engrave mode, you can adjust frames according to your needs, including defining frame constraints that control the relationship between the sides of frames and page margins. ● You can edit frames when Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Engrave mode Frames EXAMPLE The first page of a piano piece. It contains a music frame, text frames for the title, dedication, and composer, a flow heading frame inside the top of the music frame, and graphics frames in the top corners.
Engrave mode Frames 2. ● Insert Music Frame ● Insert Text Frame ● Insert Graphics Frame Click and drag in the music area to input the selected frame type. You can draw a frame of any size and shape, as long as it fits within the page margins. RESULT When you release the mouse, the type of frame you chose is input on the page. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can change the size/shape of the frame or define its constraints.
Engrave mode Frames PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the frames you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move a single frame at a time. 2. Move the frames in any of the following ways: ● To move frames a standard amount to the right, left, up, or down, press Alt/Opt plus the corresponding arrow key. For example, press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move frames to the left.
Engrave mode Frames PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the middle handle on an edge of the frame whose size or shape you want to change. NOTE You can only select a single handle on a single frame at a time. 2. Move the handle in any of the following ways: ● To move it a standard amount to the right, left, up, or down, press Alt/Opt plus the corresponding arrow key. For example, press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move handles to the left.
Engrave mode Frames Selecting frame handles You can select an individual handle on a frame, and you can switch between having a handle selected and having the whole frame selected. PREREQUISITE Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select a frame handle in any of the following ways: ● Select any handle on the frame and press Right Arrow / Left Arrow / Up Arrow / Down Arrow to select other handles around the edge of the frame.
Engrave mode Frames ● Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, open the layout in which you want to copy frames to other pages. 2. In the music area, select the frames you want to copy. TIP The frames can be on multiple pages. 3. In the Pages section of the Pages panel, select the pages to which you want to copy the selected frames. You can Shift -click adjacent pages and Ctrl/Cmd -click individual pages. 4.
Engrave mode Frames NOTE ● If you delete page template music frames on individual pages, Dorico Pro automatically adds extra pages as required to display the flows assigned to the page template frame chain. If you want to delete frames because you do not want to show certain flows, you can instead remove those flows from the layout or the page template frame chain.
Engrave mode Frames Flow and player selectors grayed out on a page template music frame By default, the page templates in the page template sets provided by Dorico Pro include page template music frames assigned to a single page template frame chain. This frame chain is set to display all players in all flows in each layout. These page templates are set to apply to all pages in all layouts in your project by default according to the layout type.
Engrave mode Frames Page template frame chains Page template frame chains can be created and fully edited only on page templates in the page template editor; you cannot change the flow and player filters for page template frame chains in individual layouts. Whenever you create a music frame on a page template, you automatically start a frame chain. Frame chains that start with an “M”, such as “MA”, are page template frame chains.
Engrave mode Frames RELATED LINKS Page templates on page 504 Page template editor on page 517 Layouts in Dorico on page 26 Importing page templates on page 514 Assigning music frames to frame chains on page 547 Assigning flows to frame chains on page 548 Assigning players to frame chains on page 549 Deleting frames on page 542 Music frame selectors When Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox, music frames show selectors that allow you to change what music is displayed in the frame, for example, by chang
Engrave mode Frames RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 493 Frame constraints on page 564 Changing the size/shape of frames on page 539 Showing blank staves in frames on page 623 Assigning music frames to frame chains You can change the frame chains to which music frames belong, for example, to control what music appears in specific music frames. This applies to both page template and layout music frames. NOTE New music frames on a page always start a new frame chain, regardless of their type.
Engrave mode Frames ● If you want to unlink frames from music frame chains on a page template, you have opened the page template in the page template editor. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, click Frame Chain 2. At the bottom of the Frame Chain list, click Unlink. in the music frame you want to unlink. RESULT The music frame is unlinked from its previous frame chain. A new frame chain is automatically created for the unlinked frame.
Engrave mode Frames ● Changing the assigned flows affects all frames in the same frame chain. PREREQUISITE ● Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● If you want to change the flows assigned to music frame chains on a page template, you have opened the page template in the page template editor. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, click Flows in a music frame belonging to the frame chain whose assigned flows you want to change. 2.
Engrave mode Frames PREREQUISITE ● Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● If you want to change the players assigned to music frame chains on a page template, you have opened the page template in the page template editor. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, click Players in a music frame belonging to the frame chain whose assigned players you want to change. 2. In the Filter by Player list, activate each player you want to assign to the music frame. 3. Click outside of the selector to close it.
Engrave mode Frames Text frames on the first page in a piano part layout, with the project title frame selected NOTE Adding text frames to pages individually, and not on a page template, is considered a page template override, which is a type of page format change.
Engrave mode Frames ● You can access all the available tokens from the context menu when the cursor is inside a text frame. In the context menu, tokens are organized into submenus.
Engrave mode Frames Music symbol Token Natural accidental: ♮ {@natural@} Treble clef (G clef) {@gClef@} Bass clef (F clef) {@fClef@} Alto clef (C clef) {@cClef@} Fermata above {@U+E4C0@} TIP ● This list is not comprehensive, as you can enter the code point for any SMuFL symbol within a token. You can find the necessary code points in the SMuFL specification online. ● Music symbol tokens in text frames automatically use the Music text character style, which is set to Bravura Text by default.
Engrave mode Frames Field in the Project Info dialog Token for Project page Token for Flow pages Copyright {@projectcopyright@} {@flowcopyright@} Work number {@projectworknumber@} {@flowworknumber@} Composer dates {@projectcomposerdates@} {@flowcomposerdates@} Composition year {@projectcompositionyear@} {@flowcompositionyear@} Other information {@projectotherinfo@} {@flowotherinfo@} Flow tokens Per-flow token function Token Flow number of the current flow, according to its position in t
Engrave mode Frames Page number token function Token The displayed page number on which the specified flow “n” begins, such as {@flow3FirstPage@} {@flownFirstPage@} NOTE {@flowPage@} and {@flowPageCount@} tokens only consider the flow that is active at the beginning of the first system of the music frame closest to the top left corner of the page on which the tokens are used.
Engrave mode Frames Time/Date description Time/Date example Token Hours:minutes, hour in 24hour clock range 23:10 {@projectdatetimeHHMM@} Hours:minutes:seconds, hour in 24-hour clock range 13:02:24 {@projectdatetimeHHMMSS@} Hour in 24-hour clock range 23 {@projectdatetimehour24@} Hour in 12-hour clock range 11 {@projectdatetimehour12@} Minute as decimal number, range 00-59 10 {@projectdatetimeminute@} Second as decimal number, range 00-59 44 {@projectdatetimesecond@} Time/Date tokens:
Engrave mode Frames Time/Date description Time/Date example Token Day month year 31 December 2017 {@datedmy@} Time representation (locale dependent) 11:10:12 {@datetime@} Hours:minutes, hour in 24hour clock range 23:10 {@datetimeHHMM@} Hours:minutes:seconds, hour in 24-hour clock range 13:02:24 {@datetimeHHMMSS@} Hour in 24-hour clock range 23 {@datetimehour24@} Hour in 12-hour clock range 11 {@datetimehour12@} Minute as decimal number, range 00-59 10 {@datetimeminute@} Second as de
Engrave mode Frames 3. ● To insert a token, right-click in the text frame and choose the required token from the context menu. ● To insert a music symbol, right-click in the text frame and choose Insert Music Text from the context menu to open the Insert Music Text dialog. Select the music symbol you want to insert, then click OK. ● To insert a line break, press Return . Optional: Format the text using the text editor options.
Engrave mode Frames Allows you to change the font family of selected text. 4 Font Style Allows you to change the font style of selected text. NOTE 5 ● Depending on the font selected, some font styles might not be available. ● You can also change the font style using the following standard key commands: ● Ctrl/Cmd-B for bold ● Ctrl/Cmd-I for italic Font Size Allows you to change the size of selected text.
Engrave mode Frames ● Superscript ● Subscript 13 Foreground Color Allows you to change the color of selected text. 14 Background Color Allows you to change the background color of selected text. NOTE If you override the paragraph style of text in an individual text item or text frame, such as by making text bold, any changes you later make to corresponding parameters of the paragraph style are not applied to the overridden text.
Engrave mode Frames Changing the thickness of text frame borders You can change the thickness of text frame borders individually. There is no default setting for the thickness of text frame borders. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Frames ● If you want to change the thickness of text frame borders on a page template, you have opened the page template in the page template editor. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Engrave mode Frames ● Frames is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● If you want to change the vertical alignment of text on a page template, you have opened the page template in the page template editor. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the frames whose text vertical alignment you want to change. 2.
Engrave mode Frames TIP When Frames press Return . 2. is selected in the Engrave toolbox, you can also select text frames and Select the text in the text frame whose horizontal alignment you want to change. TIP Each paragraph in the same text frame can have a different horizontal alignment. 3. Choose the horizontal alignment you want in the text editor. 4. Press Esc or Ctrl/Cmd - Return to close the text editor. RESULT The horizontal alignment of the selected text is changed.
Engrave mode Frames Loading images into graphics frames You can load images from your computer or server into your score. PREREQUISITE You have input a graphics frame, either on a page template or an individual page. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, double-click in the graphics frame to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. TIP When Frames press Return . is selected in the Engrave toolbox, you can also select graphics frames and 2. Locate and select the file you want to load into the graphics frame. 3.
Engrave mode Frames Constraints set for a header text frame In the Frames panel, you can define the constraints for all types of frames that are available in Dorico Pro. All new frames have four locked constraints by default. You can unlock the top or bottom constraint to give frames a fixed height, and unlock the right or left constraint to give frames a fixed width. NOTE Frames must have at least one locked constraint from each pair of top/bottom and right/left, such as top and right.
Engrave mode Graphic slices NOTE Frames must have at least one locked constraint from each pair of top/bottom and right/left, such as top and right. RESULT The constraints of the selected frame are changed. This affects which edges are locked to the corresponding page margin and whether the size and/or shape of the frame is changed on pages with different page sizes, orientations, and/or page margins. For example, frames with an unlocked top or bottom constraint have a fixed height.
Engrave mode Graphic slices A passage with multiple graphic slices positioned around specific notes and gestures to be included in performance instructions NOTE ● Graphic slices are only shown on pages when Graphic Slices toolbox. is selected in the Engrave ● Graphic slices are layout-specific and fixed to pages rather than to music. They may appear with different sizes/shapes if you change the page size, orientation, or margins in the layout.
Engrave mode Graphic slices RESULT When you release the mouse, a graphic slice is created on the page. It is automatically named Slice [n] according to how many graphic slices with default names already exist, such as Slice 2 for the second slice. The new slice is added to the graphic slices table in the Graphic Slices panel, ordered by page number. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can move the graphic slice around the page or change its size/shape.
Engrave mode Graphic slices PROCEDURE 1. Select the middle handle on an edge of the graphic slice whose size or shape you want to change. NOTE You can only select a single handle on a single graphic slice at a time. 2. Move the handle in any of the following ways: ● To move it a standard amount to the right, left, up, or down, press Alt/Opt plus the corresponding arrow key. For example, press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move handles to the left.
Engrave mode Graphic slices Selecting graphic slice handles You can select an individual handle on a graphic slice, and you can switch between having a handle selected and having the whole graphic slice selected. PREREQUISITE Graphic Slices is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select a graphic slice handle in any of the following ways: ● Select any handle on the graphic slice and press Right Arrow / Left Arrow / Up Arrow / Down Arrow to select other handles around its edge.
Engrave mode Graphic slices Changing the image settings for graphic slices You can change the graphics file format, color mode, and image resolution of graphic slices individually, for example, if you want to export some graphic slices as PDF files but others as PNG files. PREREQUISITE ● The left zone is shown. ● Graphic Slices is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In the Graphic Slices panel, select the graphic slices whose image settings you want to change. 2.
Engrave mode Graphic slices Changing the export path for graphic slices You can specify an export path to any folder to which you want to export graphic slices. You can specify a different export path for each graphic slice and still export them all simultaneously. By default, Dorico Pro exports graphic slices into the same folder as your project file. If you have not saved your project yet, graphic slices are saved in your Dorico Projects folder. PREREQUISITE ● The left zone is shown.
Engrave mode Graphic slices PREREQUISITE ● The left zone is shown. ● Graphic Slices is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In the Graphic Slices panel, select the graphic slices you want to export in one of the following ways: ● To export all graphic slices, select no graphic slices. ● To export specific graphic slices only, select those graphic slices. 2. Optional: Change the image settings for the selected graphic slices. 3.
Engrave mode Note spacing TIP You can also delete graphic slices by selecting them in the music area and pressing Backspace or Delete . RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 493 Hiding/Showing zones on page 43 Graphic Slices panel on page 498 Creating graphic slices on page 567 Moving graphic slices on page 568 Casting off on page 652 Note spacing The positions of notes and rests relative to each other, and the automatic gaps between them, are known as note spacing.
Engrave mode Note spacing and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Note Spacing. 4. Change the values of the options you want to change. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The default note spacing is changed in the selected layouts.
Engrave mode Note spacing Make space for lyrics Controls whether or not lyrics are included in note spacing calculations. When deactivated, lyrics are excluded from note spacing calculations, producing a result where notes are spaced as if lyrics were not there. We recommend using this option with caution and only if you intend to space lyrics manually, such as in tightly-spaced hymnals.
Engrave mode Note spacing Note Spacing Change dialog The Note Spacing Change dialog allows you to change or reset values affecting the spacing and scaling of notes from selected rhythmic positions in layouts, including the scale factor for grace notes and cues. ● You can open the Note Spacing Change dialog in Engrave mode by choosing Engrave > Note Spacing Change when Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox and an item is selected in the music area.
Engrave mode Note spacing Scale space for cue notes by Sets the note spacing for cues as a percentage of the note spacing normally used for notes of their duration. The value cannot be greater than 100%. Increasing the value increases the note spacing for cues, decreasing the value decreases the note spacing for cues. Make space for lyrics Controls whether or not lyrics are included in note spacing calculations.
Engrave mode Note spacing Deleting note spacing changes You can delete note spacing changes you have made using the Note Spacing Change dialog, which returns note spacing to either the previous existing note spacing change in the flow or the default settings in the layout. PROCEDURE 1. Select the signposts of the note spacing changes you want to delete. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The selected note spacing changes are deleted.
Engrave mode Note spacing ● To increase the space to the left of selected handles, press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow . ● To decrease the space to the left selected handles, press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . NOTE ● To move handles by large increments, press Ctrl/Cmd plus the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● To move handles by moderate increments, press Shift plus the standard key command, for example, Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow .
Engrave mode Note spacing Changing note spacing from rhythmic positions on page 576 Moving the start/end of systems on page 583 System breaks on page 656 Signposts on page 448 System fullness indicator The system fullness indicator is a highlighted region in the right page margin that is shown when Note Spacing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. The system fullness indicator uses colors and percentages to indicate the fullness of the system.
Engrave mode Note spacing A circular handle appears beside each voice/item. 2. Press Tab to select the circular handle. 3. Move the handle in any of the following ways: ● To move it a standard amount to the right or left, press Alt/Opt plus the corresponding arrow key. For example, press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move handles to the left. ● To move it a large amount, press Ctrl/Cmd plus the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow .
Engrave mode Note spacing Removing individual changes to note spacing You can remove changes you have made to the note spacing at individual rhythmic positions and reset note spacing handles to their original default positions. PREREQUISITE Note Spacing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the note spacing handles you want to restore to their original positions. 2. Press Backspace or Delete .
Engrave mode Moving items graphically ● To move them a standard amount to the right or left, press Alt/Opt plus the corresponding arrow key. For example, press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move handles to the left. ● To move them a large amount, press Ctrl/Cmd plus the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● To move them a moderate amount, press Shift plus the standard key command, for example, Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow .
Engrave mode Moving items graphically cannot move individual lyrics upwards/downwards, but you can move lyric lines upwards/ downwards on a per-system basis. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select any of the following that you want to move.
Engrave mode Moving items graphically continuation/hold lines independently of the item. Dorico Pro automatically lengthens hold lines between figured bass suspensions and resolutions when you move resolution figures. Lengthening/Shortening lyric hyphens does not change the size or shape of the hyphens themselves. Instead, you increase/decrease the distance between the handles in which hyphens can appear.
Engrave mode Moving items graphically Frames on page 536 Selecting handles on items In Engrave mode, you can select individual handles on items, for example, if you want to move the graphical end of a gradual dynamic without moving its start. NOTE These steps do not apply to frame, note spacing, or staff spacing handles. PROCEDURE 1. Select a handle in any of the following ways: ● Select the whole item and press Tab until the handle you want is selected. ● Click the handle you want.
Engrave mode Moving items graphically EXAMPLE Crosshairs shown Crosshairs hidden RELATED LINKS Moving items graphically on page 584 Selecting/Deselecting notes and items individually on page 422 Large selections on page 424 Hiding/Showing signposts on page 449 Hiding non-printing elements on page 439 Annotations on page 610 588 Dorico Pro 4.1.
Print mode Print mode allows you to print your layouts or to export them as graphics files, such as PDF and SVG. ● When printing layouts, you can specify the paper size and other options, such as duplex or booklet printing. ● When exporting layouts, you can specify different graphics file types and the information you want to include in their exported file names.
Print mode Project window in Print mode NOTE The layout selector in the toolbar is disabled in Print mode. To show a different layout in the print preview area, select it in the Layouts panel. 2 Print Options panel Contains options for printing or exporting your layouts. 3 System Dialogs (macOS only) Contains macOS-specific printing options.
Print mode Project window in Print mode The Layouts panel contains all the layouts in your project, displayed as cards. Each layout card shows the following: 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the layout card. 2 Layout type Shows the type of layout from the following options: 3 ● Full score layout ● Instrumental part layout ● Custom score layout Layout name Shows the name of the layout.
Print mode Project window in Print mode ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-9 . ● Click the disclosure arrow on the right edge of the main window. ● Choose Window > Show Right Zone. All the options that you set in the Print Options panel are saved with your project. The options are divided into the following sections: Destination Allows you to select a physical printer for printing or a file location for exporting a graphics file. ● For layouts set to print, you can change the number of copies.
Print mode Project window in Print mode Duplex Printing Allows you to specify whether to print on one or on both sides of each sheet of paper. Only available when Printer is selected in the Destination section. Annotations Allows you to activate options that are often required by publishing houses or printing agencies, such as crop marks or a border around the printed image. 593 Dorico Pro 4.1.
Print mode Printing layouts Print button Allows you to print/export selected layouts according to the settings you have set in the Print Options panel. Depending on your selection, the print button can appear in one of the following ways: ● Print ● Export ● Print and Export For example, if you selected layouts that are all set to print, Print is shown. If you selected some layouts set to export graphics and some layouts set to print, Print and Export is shown.
Print mode Printing layouts NOTE The layout selector in the toolbar is disabled in Print mode. To show a different layout in the print preview area, select it in the Layouts panel. 2. In the Print Options panel, enter the number of copies you want into the Copies field in the Destination section. NOTE The Copies field appears blank when you have selected layouts with different values. 3. Activate/Deactivate Collate copies. 4.
Print mode Printing layouts Printers on page 602 Paper size and orientation setup on page 607 Export File Names dialog on page 600 Page arrangements for printing/exporting on page 603 Print Options panel on page 591 Duplex printing on page 605 Annotations on page 610 Changing the page size and/or orientation on page 614 Exporting layouts as graphics files on page 598 Specifying ranges of pages/flows By default, Dorico Pro prints/exports all pages in the selected layouts.
Print mode Printing layouts Print Flows dialog The Print Flows dialog allows you to select the flows you want to print/export from the selected layouts. Ranges of flows include all pages on which those flows appear, in full or in part. ● You can open the Print Flows dialog in Print mode by clicking Choose in the Job Type section of the Print Options panel. Choose is available when the selected layouts are set to print/export a range of flows.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files Exporting layouts as graphics files You can export layouts as a variety of graphics files, such as PDF or PNG. TIP You can export layouts with different image settings and export paths simultaneously. PROCEDURE 1. In the Layouts panel, select the layouts you want to export. NOTE The layout selector in the toolbar is disabled in Print mode. To show a different layout in the print preview area, select it in the Layouts panel. 2.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files TIP You can assign key commands to different printing and exporting commands on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files RELATED LINKS Graphics file formats on page 608 Image resolution on page 608 Monochrome and color graphics processing on page 609 Embedding of fonts in PDF and SVG files on page 609 Changing the export path for layouts You can specify an export path to any folder to which you want to export layouts as graphics files. You can specify a different export path for each layout and still export them all simultaneously.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files ● In Print mode, click File Name Options in the Destination section of the Print Options panel when the currently selected layout is set to Graphics. ● In Preferences > General > Exporting Files, click Edit. NOTE Your settings are linked between both ways of accessing the dialog and are saved as the default for all future projects.
Print mode Printers Allow you to add ingredients to the file name recipe quickly that are automatically populated as appropriate for each layout. For example, the ingredient $l becomes Piano when used to export a piano part layout. The buttons for each ingredient display both the information to which the ingredient refers and the characters for it. When you click file name ingredients, they are added to the end of the file name recipe.
Print mode Page arrangements for printing/exporting Page arrangements for printing/exporting Dorico Pro provides several page arrangements that you can use for printing/exporting your layouts. In the Job Type section of the Print Options panel, you can specify how you want the layouts to be printed/exported. You can select the following job types from the Job Type menu: Normal Prints one page on each sheet of paper.
Print mode Page arrangements for printing/exporting Pages Allows you to set a range of pages to be printed/exported. Choosing Pages makes the value field available. ● To specify a range, enter the first page and last page separated with a dash, such as 1-4. ● To specify individual pages or separate ranges, enter each page/range separated with commas, such as 1,3,5-8. Flows Allows you to set a range of flows to be printed/exported.
Print mode Duplex printing Duplex printing Dorico Pro allows duplex printing, which means that you can print on both sides of each sheet of paper. If your printer supports automatic duplex printing, you can use this function in Dorico Pro. If your printer can only print on one side of each sheet of paper, there is a manual duplex printing option.
Print mode Page vs. paper size Page vs. paper size In Dorico Pro, page sizes and paper sizes use different settings. This means that you can print layouts with any page size onto paper with a different paper size. For each layout in your project, you can define a page size on the Page Setup page in Layout Options, which sets the dimensions of the layout. When exporting layouts as graphics files, the layout’s page size is always used.
Print mode Page vs. paper size RELATED LINKS Changing the page size and/or orientation on page 614 Paper size and orientation setup Layouts can have different paper sizes and orientation settings. NOTE If you have selected Graphics in the Destination section of the Print Options panel, you can only change the paper orientation. No other options are available.
Print mode Graphics file formats Graphics file formats Dorico Pro supports multiple graphics file formats as which you can export your layouts. PDF Stands for Portable Document Format. Exporting layouts to PDF allows you to create a platform-independent document that contains a fixed version of each layout, for example, to send to someone who does not have access to Dorico Pro. PNG Stands for Portable Network Graphics. PNG files are losslessly compressed, meaning they produce high-quality images.
Print mode Graphics file formats Monochrome and color graphics processing Dorico Pro applies different settings when you export monochrome and color graphics. The most appropriate setting depends on your intended purpose for the graphics. Most musical scores are monochrome, meaning they use only black ink and are normally printed on white/near-white paper.
Print mode Annotations RELATED LINKS Exporting layouts as graphics files on page 598 Exporting graphic slices on page 572 Changing the image settings for graphic slices on page 571 Graphics file formats on page 608 Image resolution on page 608 Monochrome and color graphics processing on page 609 Annotations Annotations provide additional information for printed or exported documents, such as the date and time it was printed.
Print mode Annotations Hiding non-printing elements on page 439 611 Dorico Pro 4.1.
Page formatting The formatting of pages in Dorico Pro is determined by a number of factors, including the layout’s staff size, page margins, the page template applied to them, any casting off values applied to them, system and frame breaks, and frame padding. The most important factors that determine how pages are formatted in Dorico Pro are: Staff size Staff size refers to the distance between the top and bottom lines of staves.
Page formatting the contents of text frames, and editing/moving existing text and graphics frames. Deleting or editing individual flow headings is considered a page template override, which is a type of page format change. Music frame margins Music frames have margins at the top and bottom. Music frame margins provide padding to ensure that musical material displayed within the frame remains on the page.
Page formatting Changing the page size and/or orientation Changing the page size and/or orientation You can change the page size and/or orientation of each layout independently. For example, you can use a large, landscape page in full score layouts and a small, portrait page for part layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the page size and/or orientation.
Page formatting Changing page margins Changing page margins You can change the page margins of each layout independently, for example, if you want wider margins for layouts in your project that will be spiral bound. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the page margins. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Page formatting Changing the default staff size PREREQUISITE If you want to use a page template set not currently in the project, you have created or imported that page template set. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts whose page template set you want to change. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Page formatting Changing the default staff/system spacing PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts whose staff size you want to change. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3.
Page formatting Changing the vertical justification of staves/systems 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the default staff/system spacing. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing empty staves ● Justify distance only between systems when frame is at least [n]% full 6. Activate/Deactivate Justify staves when frame with single system is above this threshold. 7. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The automatic vertical justification of staves and systems in the selected layouts is changed. Braced staves are never vertically justified.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing empty staves 3. In the category list, click Vertical Spacing. 4. In the Staff Visibility section, choose one of the following options for Hide empty staves: ● After first system ● All systems ● Never 5. Activate/Deactivate Allow individual staves of multi-staff instruments to be hidden. 6. Optional: For Players excluded from Hide Empty Staves, activate the checkbox for each instrument you want to be shown regardless of your choice for Hide empty staves. 7.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing empty staves ● 3. If no system/frame break exists, choose Edit > Notations > Staff > Manual Staff Visibility. You can also choose this option from the context menu. Change staff visibility as required. For example, you can activate and change the setting for individual staves, or use the options in the action bar to change the setting for all staves simultaneously. 4. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing blank staves after final flows For each staff, the following staff visibility options are available: ● Reset: Resets the visibility of the staff to the default setting in the layout, as set on the Vertical Spacing page in Layout Options. ● Show: Shows the staff from the selected rhythmic position onwards, whether it is empty or not. ● Hide: Hides the staff from the selected rhythmic position onwards, whether it is empty or not.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing blank staves after final flows ● If you deactivated Show blank staves in systems identical to final flow, change the number of staff lines in blank staves by changing the value for Number of staff lines for blank staves. RESULT Blank staves are shown after the final flow in the selected layouts when Fill frame with blank staves is activated, and hidden when it is deactivated.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing blank staves after final flows NOTE We do not recommend showing blank staves in the default page template frame chain, which is usually “MA”. 2. At the bottom of the selector, click Blank Staves. 3. Click outside of the selector to close it. RESULT The selected music frame and all music frames in the same frame chain are updated to display blank staves.
Page formatting Inserting pages 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The number of blank staves shown in the selected music frames is changed.
Page formatting Inserting pages AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you want to add information to empty pages, you can edit them or assign a page template to them, for example, if you have created a title page template that you want to use in all the parts in your project.
Page formatting Deleting pages NOTE Pages inserted using a page template are still considered page template overrides. If you want such pages to get updated if you edit the page template, we recommend assigning page template changes to the pages and removing page overrides.
Page formatting Starting layouts on left-hand pages RESULT Once you have removed all overrides from all the pages you want to delete, they are deleted if they are empty. If they are not empty, removing all their overrides reverts them back to following their default page template.
Page formatting Changing when the First page template is used By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Page Setup. 4. In the Flows section, choose one of the following options for New flows: 5.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing flow headings 5. ● Never ● First flow only ● Any flow starting at top of page Click Apply, then Close. RESULT ● Choosing Never means the First page template is not used for any page in the selected layouts. ● Choosing First flow only means the First page template is used for the first page in the layout but no other pages, even if some subsequent flows start at the top of a page.
Page formatting Hiding/Showing information in running headers above flow headings ● Hiding flow headings does not hide the flow title shown at the top of the second page onwards by default. You can change running headers by customizing the Default page template in the corresponding page template set.
Page formatting Changing the horizontal justification of final systems NOTE In order to hide running header information, the top of the music frame containing the flow heading frame must be lower than the top of text frames containing the corresponding information. If the top of the music frame is the same height as a running header text frame, any corresponding information in the text frame is shown, regardless of your setting.
Page formatting Enabling/Disabling condensing Enabling/Disabling condensing You can enable/disable condensing in each layout independently, with separate options for condensing section players and divisi staves. For example, in a large-scale work with orchestra and chorus, you might want to condense vocal staves in the full score but show uncondensed vocal staves in a custom vocal score.
Page formatting Enabling/Disabling condensing ● Condensed music often requires different rhythmic spacing than uncondensed music, for example, to accommodate the width of notes that are a small interval apart. Therefore, enabling condensing can cause the casting off in the layout to change. ● Condensing is never enabled in galley view. If you want to see all staves separately without disabling condensing in the current layout, you can switch to galley view.
Page formatting Margins Margins Margins determine the spacing around music on pages, such as on all four edges of each page and above/below flow headings. In Dorico Pro, there are the following types of margins: 1 Page margins The gaps between the four edges of pages and the boundary of the content on them. For example, systems that are horizontally justified span the full width of pages between the left and right page margins. You cannot position frames beyond the page margins.
Page formatting Margins NOTE Notes and notations above the highest staff and below the lowest staff extend into margins.
Page formatting Margins NOTE ● If you want to change the margins above/below flow headings on individual pages, you can do this by inserting a flow heading change and changing the margins at the change. ● If you want to move individual flow headings upwards/downwards, you can do this by moving the system handle of the first system of the flow to which the flow headings apply.
Page formatting Margins 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The margins within all music frames in the selected layouts are changed. ● Top sets the gap between the top edges of music frames and the top staff line of the highest staff in the frame. ● Bottom sets the gap between the bottom edges of music frames and the bottom staff line of the lowest staff in the frame.
Page formatting Staff size ● Bottom padding sets the gap between the bottom edge of the selected music frames and the bottom staff line of the lowest staff in each frame. For example, when the bottom padding is set to 0, the bottom staff line of the lowest staff in the frame aligns with the bottom edge of the music frame. NOTE ● Deactivating the properties returns the selected music frames to your settings for music frame margins for the layout.
Page formatting Staff size Changing the staff size from system/frame breaks You can change the staff size of all staves from the rhythmic position of system/frame breaks onwards in layouts. For example, you can have smaller staves only on pages with more staves, and larger staves on other pages with fewer staves.
Page formatting Staff size TIP If you want to change the staff size to represent an alternative version of a passage, you can instead add an ossia staff, which you can show for specific regions. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select an item on the staff whose size you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE You can only change the size of a single staff at a time. 2.
Page formatting Staff spacing Custom Staff Size dialog The Custom Staff Size dialog allows you to change the size of individual staves by a custom scale factor. ● You can open the Custom Staff Size dialog by selecting an item on a staff and choosing Edit > Notations > Staff Size > Custom Staff Size. The Custom Staff Size dialog contains the following options: Default staff size Displays the default size of staves in the current layout. This size is set on the Page Setup page in Layout Options.
Page formatting Staff spacing ● We recommend that you add extra pages and finish laying out your pages before moving individual staves, as individual staff spacing changes are automatically deleted if the frame in which they occur changes. For example, if you move staves individually and then add a blank page at the start of the layout, all individual staff spacing changes in the layout are deleted. ● Moving individual staves/systems vertically does not affect the casting off.
Page formatting Staff spacing These gaps do not apply in frames that are automatically justified. ● Braced staff to braced staff and Ossia staff to staff These gaps always apply, including in frames that are automatically justified, because braced and ossia staves are never justified. This includes extra staves. NOTE ● Divisi staves are vertically justified when they use the Staff to staff gap.
Page formatting Staff spacing follow your per-layout ideal gap settings. This helps keep a clear distance between systems on very full pages. ● Justify staves when frame with single system is above this threshold: When activated, all the staves in a single system taller than the set threshold are vertically justified, which distributes them evenly to fill the height of the frame. Staff Visibility Contains options allowing you to control when and which empty staves are hidden in the layout.
Page formatting Staff spacing 3. In the category list, click Vertical Spacing. 4. In the Ideal Gaps section, change the value for In galley view, expand ideal staff gaps to. 5. Click Apply, then Close.
Page formatting Staff spacing ● Staff spacing handle ● System spacing handle NOTE 2. ● You can switch between having a staff or system spacing handle selected by pressing Tab . ● When using the mouse, you can only move one staff/system at a time. Move the selected staves/systems in any of the following ways: ● To move them a standard amount upwards or downwards, press Alt/Opt plus the corresponding arrow key. For example, press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move handles upwards.
Page formatting Staff spacing EXAMPLE Staff spacing handles at their default positions The second staff has been moved upwards AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can copy manual changes you have made to the staff spacing on individual pages to other pages in the layout.
Page formatting Staff spacing Frame comfortably full Frame over-full RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 493 Per-layout vertical spacing options on page 643 Changing the default staff/system spacing on page 617 Changing the vertical justification of staves/systems on page 618 System fullness indicator on page 581 Changing the default music frame margins on page 637 Removing individual changes to staff spacing You can remove changes you have made to the staff/system spacing and reset staff/system spaci
Page formatting Staff spacing NOTE ● You can only move multiple systems closer together, you cannot use this method to move them further apart. ● You cannot follow these steps for staff spacing handles on tacets. ● Moving individual staves/systems vertically does not affect the casting off. If you want to show more/fewer systems in a frame, you can change the casting off by, for example, using frame breaks or setting a fixed number of systems per frame.
Page formatting Staff spacing PROCEDURE 1. In the music area, select an item on the page whose staff spacing you want to copy. 2. Choose Engrave > Staff Spacing > Copy Staff Spacing to open the Copy Staff Spacing dialog. 3. Optional: Change the page whose staff spacing you want to copy by changing the value for From page. By default, the page on which you selected an item is set in the value field. 4.
Page formatting Casting off Casting off “Casting off” is the term used to encompass fixing the layout of pages of music, such as setting the number of systems per page. When calculating how much music can fit in each system and on each page, Dorico Pro considers multiple aspects of the layout, including note spacing and vertical spacing settings. You can change these settings to change the default casting off in each layout.
Page formatting Casting off RELATED LINKS Bar repeats on page 1301 Inserting system breaks on page 657 Inserting frame breaks on page 660 Making selections into systems on page 657 Changing the horizontal justification of final systems on page 632 Fixing the number of systems per frame You can define a fixed number of systems you want included in each music frame in each layout independently.
Page formatting Casting off ● To move all bars between the start of the current system and the selection to the previous system, press , or click Move to Previous System in the Move Bars Between Systems section of the Formatting panel. ● To move all bars between the selection and the end of their current system to the next system, press . or click Move to Next System in the Move Bars Between Systems section of the Formatting panel. RESULT The selected bars are moved to the previous or next system.
Page formatting Casting off ● You can assign a key command for Lock Layout on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Page formatting System breaks 3. In the Note Input section, activate/deactivate Snap system and frame breaks to barlines when creating in the Breaks subsection. 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT System/Frame breaks are allowed within bars when the option is activated, and disallowed when it is deactivated. When breaks are disallowed within bars, inserted breaks snap to the barline before the earliest selected item.
Page formatting System breaks Hiding/Showing staff labels at system/frame breaks on page 1374 Locking layouts on page 654 Resetting casting off on page 655 Properties panel on page 692 Inserting system breaks You can insert system breaks at any rhythmic position, for example, so that musical phrases fit in systems for readability.
Page formatting System breaks ● The left zone is shown. ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select an item at the rhythmic position that you want to be the start of the system. NOTE We recommend that you select noteheads or barlines. Selecting other items, such as slurs, can cause system breaks to be inserted earlier/later than you might have intended. 2. 3.
Page formatting Frame breaks Hiding/Showing system break signposts You can hide/show system break signposts at any time. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Signposts > System Breaks. RESULT System break signposts are hidden/shown. RELATED LINKS Signposts on page 448 Deleting system breaks You can delete system breaks after you have inserted them. PREREQUISITE System break signposts are shown. PROCEDURE 1. Select the system break signposts of the system breaks you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete .
Page formatting Frame breaks ● You can also control the content of music frames by fixing the number of systems per music frame in each layout.
Page formatting Frame breaks Allowing/Disallowing breaks within bars on page 655 Per-layout note spacing options on page 575 Per-layout vertical spacing options on page 643 Hiding/Showing multi-bar rests on page 1337 Splitting multi-bar rests on page 1341 Locking layouts on page 654 Making selections into frames You can force all musical material between two selected rhythmic positions into a single frame, for example, if you want specific bars to appear on the same page.
Page formatting Tacets Deactivating Wait for next frame break allows Dorico Pro to cast off subsequent music as normal. Hiding/Showing frame break signposts You can hide/show frame break signposts at any time. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Signposts > Frame Breaks. RESULT Frame break signposts are hidden/shown. RELATED LINKS Signposts on page 448 Deleting frame breaks You can delete frame breaks after you have inserted them. PREREQUISITE Frame break signposts are shown. PROCEDURE 1.
Page formatting Tacets An extract of a part layout where the player is tacet in the second flow In Engrave mode, tacets behave like systems, meaning they have their own staff spacing handle is activated. This allows you to move individual tacets and their flow when Staff Spacing headings upwards/downwards. You can also insert system and frame breaks at the start of tacets. NOTE We do not recommend that you use Copy Staff Spacing and Lock Frame on pages where tacets are the first or last system in frames.
Page formatting Tacets Hiding/Showing tacets You can hide/show tacets in each layout independently, for example, if you want to show empty bars or multi-bar rests in some layouts to allow those players to add in notes on those staves later. PREREQUISITE ● You have removed the player from the flows in which they do not play. ● The flows are assigned to the part layout. ● The flows are assigned to the page template frame chain in the part layout. PROCEDURE 1.
Page formatting Tacets 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts whose tacet text you want to edit. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Players. 4.
Page formatting Condensing RELATED LINKS Flow headings on page 530 Paragraph Styles dialog on page 712 Condensing Condensing is the process of showing the music for multiple players on fewer staves than normal, usually by allowing multiple instruments of the same type to share a staff, such as Flutes 1-2 or Horns 1-4. In Dorico Pro, this is an automatic process that allows you to show condensed staves in some layouts, such as full score layouts, and uncondensed staves in others, such as the part layouts.
Page formatting Condensing We recommend familiarizing yourself with the calculations and considerations that Dorico Pro makes for condensing and the options available to you to customize your condensing results. NOTE ● In Write mode, you cannot select anything on condensed staves. In Engrave mode, you can select notes and items on condensed staves but you can only edit them graphically.
Page formatting Condensing a staff if some of their pitches cross, or if you never want players to condense if their phrases contain any crossed pitches. ● Allow unlimited pitch crossing: Condensing is always allowed, regardless of pitch crossing. ● Limit pitch crossing: Condensing is only allowed in regions that contain the set number of crossed pitches or fewer.
Page formatting Condensing Condensing for players inactive for some of the system Allows you to choose how to condense and represent inactive players when they are both active and inactive in the same system and other players in their condensing group have notes. ● Hide rests and label active player: Only the music for active players appears on condensed staves with player labels for active players shown where rests are hidden for inactive players.
Page formatting Condensing Condensing calculations and considerations In order to produce clear and legible results, Dorico Pro considers a number of factors in its condensing calculations, including the type of instruments and the rhythms and pitches of notes. IMPORTANT Having condensing enabled in any layout in a project can cause Dorico Pro to operate more slowly, due to the large number of calculations involved.
Page formatting Condensing Two phrases separated by a rest. They have different condensing results due to the parts in the first phrase having different rhythms. The phrases belonging to all the players on each condensed staff are considered together in order to calculate the best condensing result, for example, whether or not phrases can share a single stem or require separate voices. Rhythms and pitches Within each phrase, the rhythms and pitches of notes are considered.
Page formatting Condensing NOTE Condensed music often requires different rhythmic spacing than uncondensed music, for example, to accommodate the width of notes that are a small interval apart. Therefore, enabling condensing can cause the casting off in the layout to change. TIP If the automatic condensing produced by Dorico Pro does not suit your requirements, you can change the condensing manually from selected rhythmic positions onwards and for selected condensing groups using condensing changes.
Page formatting Condensing Shared stem In phrases where the rhythms are the same, the pitches are different, and the pitches do not cross, each part on the condensed staff has a separate notehead but the noteheads share a single stem. NOTE Phrases must start at the same rhythmic position to produce a shared stem condensing result.
Page formatting Condensing ● Condensed staves always use a maximum of two voices, one up-stem and one down-stem. Each voice can include the parts of multiple players. ● If you want to change the automatic condensing results, you can do so from selected rhythmic positions onwards using condensing changes. You might find that using condensing changes simply to start new phrases is sufficient to achieve the desired condensing result.
Page formatting Condensing 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to create custom condensing groups. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Players. 4.
Page formatting Condensing RESULT Condensing groups are excluded from condensing when their checkbox is activated, meaning players in those condensing groups are always shown on their own staves. Condensing groups are included in condensing when their checkbox is deactivated.
Page formatting Condensing 9. Optional: Repeat steps 5 to 8 for each condensing group whose condensing options you want to change from the selected rhythmic position. 10. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The condensing result is changed in the current layout from the selected rhythmic position onwards.
Page formatting Condensing The Condensing Change dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Condensing groups list Contains all the condensing groups in the current layout. Activating condensing groups includes them in the condensing change, which starts new phrases from the rhythmic position of the condensing change. This allows Dorico Pro to recalculate the condensing result before and after the condensing change separately, even if there are no rests at that position.
Page formatting Condensing ● 3 In order to be more concise, the exact wording of some notation options is different in the Condensing Change dialog than in Notation Options. Manual Condensing section Allows you to assign players in the selected condensing group to specific voices and staves. Activating manual condensing for a condensing group shows the players in that group in the players list on the left of the Manual Condensing section.
Page formatting Condensing Manually condensing players You can manually change the allocation of players to voices and staves in each condensing group from selected rhythmic positions onwards in individual layouts. IMPORTANT We recommend only condensing players manually if changing the per-flow default condensing options, creating custom condensing groups, starting new phrases from selected rhythmic positions, and overriding selected condensing options has not produced the required condensing result.
Page formatting Condensing By default, the top player in the players list is automatically assigned to the up-stem voice on the new staff. 11. Optional: Continue assigning players to voices/staves in any of the following ways: ● Click and drag them across to the required voice and staff in the list on the right. An insertion line indicates where the player will be assigned. ● Select the player in the players list, select the destination voice and staff in the list on the right, and click Add to Voice .
Page formatting Condensing PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, open the layout in which you want to reset condensing changes. 2. Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to reset condensing. TIP The item does not have to be on a condensed staff. Only one condensing change can exist at a rhythmic position, but it can change and reset different options for multiple condensing groups. 3. Choose Engrave > Condensing Change to open the Condensing Change dialog. 4.
Page formatting Condensing RELATED LINKS Filters on page 428 Player labels Player labels identify the players to which notes on condensed staves belong. They are usually used to indicate a change in how music is condensed, such as going from having different parts to playing in unison or from all players having separate stems to some players sharing a stem. Player labels are placed above the staff for up-stem voices and below the staff for down-stem voices.
Page formatting Condensing RELATED LINKS Paragraph Styles dialog on page 712 Staff labels on condensed staves on page 1386 Divisi change labels on page 1417 Instrument numbering on page 127 Player, layout, and instrument names on page 175 Project-wide engraving options for player labels You can find options for the project-wide appearance and position of player labels on the Condensing page in Engraving Options.
Page formatting Condensing Editing player label text You can override the text shown in player labels individually, for example, if you want to describe condensing on a staff in a different format than is shown by default. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the player labels whose text you want to edit. 2.
Page formatting Condensing 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The “to” and/or unison indications are changed in all divisi change and player labels project-wide. RELATED LINKS Player labels on page 683 Divisi change labels on page 1417 Paragraph Styles dialog on page 712 Showing player labels on one/two lines By default, player labels appear on a single line. You can insert line breaks in individual player labels to show instrument numbers and the a2 indication spread across two lines.
Page formatting Condensing 3. In the Player Labels subsection, activate/deactivate Erase background with padding. 4. Optional: If you activated Erase background with padding, change the value in the value field to change the erasure padding around player labels. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT All player labels project-wide have erased backgrounds when Erase background with padding is activated, and do not have erased backgrounds when it is deactivated.
Page formatting Part formatting propagation Part formatting propagation The propagation of part formatting involves copying the layout options and system formatting that determine the layouts of pages in specific part layouts and applying them to other part layouts. This can save time when formatting similar parts. System formatting includes the positions of system and frame breaks, but also note spacing changes that affect the horizontal space that notes require.
Page formatting Part formatting propagation 4. In the Propagate formatting to list, select the part layouts to which you want to copy part formatting. You can use the selection options in the action bar, click and drag across multiple layouts, Shift -click adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -click individual layouts. 5. Activate/Deactivate Include layout options. 6. Activate/Deactivate Include system formatting. 7. Click OK to copy part formatting to the selected layouts and close the dialog.
Page formatting Part formatting propagation The Propagate Part Formatting dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Copy formatting from list Contains a list of all the part layouts in the project. You can only select a single part layout as the source layout. 2 Propagate formatting to list Contains a list of all the part layouts in the project. You can select multiple part layouts as destination layouts.
Page formatting Part formatting propagation Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains Local properties are layout- and frame chain-specific, meaning that by default, changing local properties for an item in one layout does not affect the same item in other layouts or other frame chains.
Properties Properties are settings that apply to individual notes and items and allow you to edit them, such as by changing their appearance or position. You can access properties in the Properties panel. Properties can affect items only in the current layout and frame chain, known as “local properties”, or in all layouts and frame chains, known as “global properties”.
Properties Local vs. global properties Properties panel in Write mode, filtered by a search term The Properties panel toolbar contains the following options: Search Allows you to filter properties according to your entry. Show (active status) Allows you to filter properties according to their activated status. ● Active: Shows only activated properties. ● All: Shows all properties. Show (property scope) Allows you to filter properties according to their property scope.
Properties Changing the property scope or other frame chains. This is particularly useful for local properties that control the graphical position of items, as usually this needs to be different in the part layout compared to the full score. You can force local properties to apply globally by changing the property scope in the Properties panel to Globally before changing their setting.
Properties Changing values in numeric value fields ● This only applies to subsequent properties you change. If you want to change the property scope of existing properties, you can copy property settings to other layouts and frame chains. Changing values in numeric value fields You can change the values in numeric value fields in multiple different ways, such as doubling or halving the existing values. In Dorico Pro, value fields are most commonly used in the Properties panel and in options dialogs.
Library In Dorico Pro, the library is the total compilation of visual items and options that are available in all projects on your computer. It combines factory default settings, custom items/options you have saved as default, and items/options only available in the current project. Library Manager The Library Manager gives you an overview of all visual items and options in the current project and allows you to compare these against another project, your user library, or Dorico’s factory library.
Library Library Manager Allows you to select the source library against which you want to compare the current project. You can select individual flows when comparing Notation Options and individual layouts when comparing Layout Options. TIP We recommend comparing similar layouts with each other, such as two full score layouts. You can select one of the following library sources: ● Factory settings: Dorico’s default settings.
Library Layout Options dialog ● For individual options NOTE ● When comparing two Dorico projects, only custom items and items used in the selected projects appear in collections. ● When you import items into the current project, Dorico Pro also imports any items they depend on. For example, if you import a playing technique that uses a font style not available in your current project, both the playing technique and font style are imported.
Library Layout Options dialog ● In Setup mode, click Layout Options in the Layouts panel. The Layout Options dialog contains the following: 1 Search categories field Allows you to filter categories and section titles according to your entry. TIP You can set the focus to the Search categories field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-L . You can set the focus away by pressing Tab . 2 Category list Contains the categories of options that you can view and change in the dialog.
Library Layout Options dialog 6 ● Previous match: Allows you to navigate to the previous match on the page. You can also navigate to the previous match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-G . ● Next match: Allows you to navigate to the next match on the page. You can also navigate to the next match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-G . ● Close: Closes the bar and removes all match highlights. You can also close the bar by pressing Esc . Layouts list Contains all the layouts in your project.
Library Notation Options dialog Notation Options dialog The Notation Options dialog allows you to change how music is notated by default in each flow independently. For example, there are options for beam, note, and rest grouping, voices, accidentals, barlines, and condensing. Options in Notation Options affect only the selected flows but apply to all layouts in which those flows appear. TIP If you want to change notes and notations individually, you can use properties in the Properties panel.
Library Notation Options dialog Shows the titles of any sections on the selected category’s page. You can click these section titles to navigate directly to that section of the page. 4 Section Pages are divided into sections, which can contain multiple options. Sections that contain many options are divided into subsections. For options that have multiple possible settings, the active setting is highlighted.
Library Note Input Options dialog Note Input Options dialog The Note Input Options dialog provides multiple options that allow you to determine how Dorico Pro interprets the data and MIDI you input by default.
Library Engraving Options dialog The bar contains the following options: 5 ● Search pages field: Allows you to enter the term you want to search for. You can set the focus to the Search pages field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-F . ● Previous match: Allows you to navigate to the previous match on the page. You can also navigate to the previous match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-G . ● Next match: Allows you to navigate to the next match on the page.
Library Engraving Options dialog The Engraving Options dialog contains the following: 1 Search categories field Allows you to filter categories and section titles according to your entry. TIP You can set the focus to the Search categories field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-L . You can set the focus away by pressing Tab . 2 Category list Contains the categories of options that you can view and change in the dialog.
Library Playback Options dialog 6 ● Next match: Allows you to navigate to the next match on the page. You can also navigate to the next match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-G . ● Close: Closes the bar and removes all match highlights. You can also close the bar by pressing Esc . Save as Default Saves all options currently set and applied in the dialog as the default for new projects. 7 Reset to Saved Defaults Resets all the options in the dialog back to your saved defaults.
Library Playback Options dialog The Playback Options dialog contains the following: 1 Search categories field Allows you to filter categories and section titles according to your entry. TIP You can set the focus to the Search categories field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-L . You can set the focus away by pressing Tab . 2 Category list Contains the categories of options that you can view and change in the dialog.
Library Music Fonts dialog 6 ● Next match: Allows you to navigate to the next match on the page. You can also navigate to the next match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-G . ● Close: Closes the bar and removes all match highlights. You can also close the bar by pressing Esc . Save as Default Saves all options currently set and applied in the dialog as the default for new projects. 7 Reset to Saved Defaults Resets all the options in the dialog back to your saved defaults.
Library Text formatting Changing the music font used in the Music Fonts dialog changes the fonts used for notations, glyphs, and other items that are not text, such as clefs, dynamics, and bold tuplet numbers/ ratios. TIP You can change the fonts used for these items individually by changing the Default Text Font style in the Edit Font Styles dialog, and the Default Text paragraph style in the Paragraph Styles dialog.
Library Text formatting Text items on page 1446 Text frames on page 550 Entering text in text frames on page 557 Changing the vertical alignment of text in text frames on page 561 Changing the horizontal alignment of text in text frames on page 562 Changing the default font family on page 717 Edit Font Styles dialog The Edit Font Styles dialog allows you to edit the formatting of fonts used for items that you cannot edit using the text editor, such as changing the font size of rehearsal marks, dynamics, or
Library Text formatting ● Revert to Factory its saved settings. ● Delete : Removes all your changes to the selected font style, returning it to : Deletes the selected font style. NOTE You cannot delete predefined font styles or any font style that is currently used in your project. 3 Name Allows you to enter a name for new font styles or edit the name of existing font styles. 4 Parent Allows you to choose a parent font style from which the selected font style inherits settings.
Library Text formatting RELATED LINKS Missing Fonts dialog on page 71 Changing the default font family on page 717 Types of text on page 1447 Staff size on page 639 System objects on page 1403 Brackets according to ensemble type on page 887 Paragraph Styles dialog The Paragraph Styles dialog allows you to change existing paragraph styles for text and create new styles.
Library Text formatting The action bar at the bottom of the list contains the following options: ● New : Creates a new paragraph style with default values. ● New from Selection : Creates a copy of an existing paragraph style that you can edit separately from the original. The new paragraph style uses the original as its parent by default. ● Save as Default : Saves the selected paragraph style to your user library, allowing you for paragraph styles saved as default. to use it in multiple projects.
Library Text formatting Adding borders to text items on page 1454 Aligning text items with the start of systems on page 1452 Erasing the background of text items on page 1456 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Staff size on page 639 System objects on page 1403 Creating paragraph styles You can create new paragraph styles from scratch, and you can duplicate existing paragraph styles and edit the settings. For example, if you want to format text consistently in multiple text frames. PROCEDURE 1.
Library Text formatting 3. Choose the Alignment option you want. 4. Optional: Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other paragraph styles whose horizontal alignment you want to change. 5. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The default alignment of the selected text style is changed. TIP You can also override the horizontal alignment of text in individual text frames.
Library Text formatting ● Revert to Factory : Removes all your changes to the selected character style, returning it to its saved settings. ● Delete : Deletes the selected character style. NOTE You cannot delete predefined character styles or any character style that is currently used in your project. 2 Name Allows you to enter a name for new character styles or edit the name of existing paragraph styles.
Library Edit Chord Diagrams dialog RESULT The new character style is created. If you clicked Save as Default character style is available in all future projects on your computer. so that it appears as , the RELATED LINKS Inputting text items on page 385 Entering text in text frames on page 557 Changing the default font family You can change the font family of the default font and paragraph styles, which affect all other font and paragraph styles in the project whose font family has not been overridden.
Library Edit Chord Diagrams dialog ● You can open the Edit Chord Diagrams dialog by choosing Library > Chord Diagrams. The Edit Chord Diagrams dialog contains the following options and sections: 1 Category menu Allows you to select which shapes are available in the chord diagram shapes list by selecting the number of instrument strings required. 2 Search field Allows you to filter chord diagrams according to your entry.
Library Edit Chord Diagrams dialog ● Delete : Deletes the selected chord diagram shape. NOTE You cannot delete predefined chord diagram shapes. You must click Delete twice to delete your own chord diagram shapes that you have saved as default. 4 Name Displays the name of the chord whose chord diagram you are editing in the dialog. Optionally includes other relevant identifying information, such as “movable” or “open-g”.
Library Custom chord symbols ● Starting fret number offset: Changes the offset of the starting fret number. For example, if you want the starting fret label to appear beside the second fret down the chord diagram in order to include a barré. ● Add fret ● Remove fret ● Reset Chord Diagram its default shape. : Adds a fret to the bottom of the chord diagram. : Removes a fret from the bottom of the chord diagram.
Library Custom chord symbols promote overrides to single chord symbol instances to the project default appearance for that chord symbol.
Library Custom chord symbols Allows you to enter the chord symbol whose default project-wide appearance you want to edit. Click Add Project Default or press Return to add the chord symbol to the Project Default Appearances list, which allows you to edit the chord symbol in the editor. 2 Project Default Appearances list Contains the chord symbols whose project default appearance you have edited in the project.
Library Custom chord symbols Clicking either button opens the Edit Chord Symbol Component dialog, in which you can create new chord symbol components and edit existing chord symbol components. Editing components from inside the Project Default Chord Symbol Appearances dialog affects all chord symbols that use the component project-wide.
Library Custom chord symbols ● Press the standard key commands for moving items. For example, press Alt/ Opt-Right Arrow to move components to the right, or press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/OptRight Arrow to move components to the right by larger increments. ● Click and drag each component. NOTE You cannot move the first component in chord symbols.
Library Custom chord symbols ● To create a new component for all instances of a specific chord symbol project-wide: Open the Project Default Chord Symbol Appearances dialog, select the component you want to duplicate in the components list, and click Add Component in the components list action bar.
Library Custom chord symbols ● 3 Composite: Allows you to select a composite from the list. Click Add Composite to add the selected composite to the chord symbol component. Editor Allows you to arrange and edit the components that make up your chord symbol component. You can arrange and edit components using the controls at the bottom of the dialog. 4 Editor action bar Contains selection and view options for the editor. 5 ● Zoom: Allows you to change the zoom level in the editor.
Library Custom chord symbols 1 Top Left 2 Top Center 3 Top Right 4 Middle Left 5 Middle Right 6 Baseline Left (text only) 7 Baseline Center (text only) 8 Baseline Right (text only) 9 Bottom Left 10 Bottom Center 11 Bottom Right RELATED LINKS Chord symbol appearance presets on page 899 Project Default Chord Symbol Appearances dialog on page 721 Edit Chord Symbol Appearance dialog on page 723 Setting single chord symbol overrides as the project default You can set overrides you have made to
Library Music symbols Resetting the appearance of chord symbols with single overrides You can reset the appearance of single chord symbol instances whose appearance you have overridden back to the project default appearance for that chord symbol. PROCEDURE 1. Choose Library > Chord Symbols to open the Project Default Chord Symbol Appearances dialog. 2. In the Single Overrides list, select the single override that you want to reset. 3. Click Remove Overrides .
Library Music symbols The Edit Music Symbol dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Category menu Allows you to select which type of music symbol is available in the music symbol list. 2 Search field Allows you to filter music symbols according to your entry. 3 Music symbol list Contains all the music symbols in the project within the currently selected category and your search filter, if applicable.
Library Music symbols ● 6 Graphic: Allows you to load a new graphics file or select an existing graphic from the Select existing list in SVG, PNG, or JPG format. You can see a preview of the graphic in the Preview box. Click Add Graphic to add the selected graphic to the music symbol. Editor Allows you to arrange and edit the components that make up the music symbol. You can arrange and edit components by clicking and dragging them in the editor and by using the controls at the bottom of the dialog.
Library Custom notehead sets The attachment points have the following names in the Edit Music Symbol dialog: 1 Top Left 2 Top Center 3 Top Right 4 Middle Left 5 Middle Right 6 Baseline Left (text only) 7 Baseline Center (text only) 8 Baseline Right (text only) 9 Bottom Left 10 Bottom Center 11 Bottom Right RELATED LINKS Notations input on page 271 Insert Music Symbol dialog on page 388 Custom playing techniques on page 739 Custom lines on page 747 Custom notehead sets on page 731 Custom k
Library Custom notehead sets Edit Notehead Sets dialog The Edit Notehead Sets dialog allows you to add, edit, and delete custom notehead sets. It also allows you to change various settings relating to the appearance and function of noteheads within each notehead set. ● You can open the Edit Notehead Sets dialog by choosing Library > Notehead Sets.
Library Custom notehead sets ● Delete : Deletes the selected notehead set. NOTE You cannot delete predefined notehead sets. 3 Notehead Set section Displays the noteheads in the notehead set currently selected in the notehead set list, and contains the following options that apply to the notehead set: ● Name: Allows you to enter a new name or edit the existing name for the selected notehead set. ● Category: Allows you to select a category for the notehead set, such as Crosses.
Library Custom notehead sets 6 ● Stem direction: Allows you to specify that the selected notehead should be used for up-stem or down-stem notes only. This is particularly important for noteheads with shapes, for example, the triangles in triangular noteheads point in different directions according to their stem direction. ● Double whole note: Allows you to specify whether the selected notehead is Round or Square.
Library Custom notehead sets The Edit Notehead dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Name Contains the saved name for predefined noteheads, or an automatically generated name for new noteheads. You cannot change this name. 2 Component selector Allows you to choose components to add to the notehead. You can add different types of components by clicking the respective tab titles. ● Glyph, for example, ♮ or ♯.
Library Custom notehead sets We recommend that you position the notehead in the center of the editor so that its left edge is aligned with the thicker vertical grid line and its middle is aligned with the thicker horizontal grid line. 4 Editor action bar Contains selection and view options for the editor. 5 ● Zoom: Allows you to change the zoom level in the editor. ● Select: Allows you to select the next/previous component.
Library Custom notehead sets There are eight attachment points for glyphs and graphics, and eleven for text, due to the extra space required for letters that extend below the baseline. The example diagram helps you visualize how these points relate to components.
Library Custom notehead sets 7. ● To add an existing notehead, click Add Notehead to Set bar and select the notehead you want from the menu. in the Notehead Set action ● To create a new notehead with default settings, click New Notehead action bar. ● To create a new notehead that is a copy of an existing one, select the existing notehead in the Notehead action in the Notehead Set section and click New from Selection bar.
Library Custom playing techniques PREREQUISITE If you want to create custom noteheads in a custom notehead set, you have created that notehead set. PROCEDURE 1. Choose Library > Notehead Sets to open the Edit Notehead Sets dialog. 2. Select the required notehead set category from the Category menu. 3. In the notehead sets list, select the notehead set in which you want to create custom noteheads. 4. Create a new notehead in one of the following ways: 5.
Library Custom playing techniques You can find your custom playing techniques in their assigned category in the Playing Techniques panel in Write mode. You can also input them using the popover by entering the popover text assigned to them.
Library Custom playing techniques 2 Playing techniques list Contains all the playing techniques in the project within the currently selected category. The action bar at the bottom of the list contains the following options: ● New : Adds a new blank playing technique. ● New from Selection : Creates a copy of an existing playing technique that you can edit separately from the original.
Library Custom playing techniques ● Popover text: Allows you to set the text you want to enter into the popover to input the playing technique. ● Playback technique: Allows you to choose the playback technique for the playing technique, that is, the action/switch that changes the sample sound used. Multiple playing techniques can use the same playback technique.
Library Custom playing techniques clicking Edit Composite in the action bar below the preview. Its Type must be set to Glyph in order for you to do this. The Edit Playing Technique dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Name Contains the saved name for predefined playing techniques, or an automatically generated name for new playing techniques. You cannot change this name. 2 Component selector Allows you to choose components to add to the playing technique.
Library Custom playing techniques controls at the bottom of the dialog. You can also use the handles on each component to change their size. 4 Editor action bar Contains selection and view options for the editor. 5 ● Zoom: Allows you to change the zoom level in the editor. ● Select: Allows you to select the next/previous component. ● Show Attachments ● Delete : Shows all the attachments on all components in the editor. : Deletes the selected component.
Library Custom playing techniques 3 Top Right 4 Middle Left 5 Middle Right 6 Baseline Left (text only) 7 Baseline Center (text only) 8 Baseline Right (text only) 9 Bottom Left 10 Bottom Center 11 Bottom Right RELATED LINKS Edit Playing Techniques dialog on page 740 Creating custom playing techniques You can create custom playing techniques, including choosing their continuation line styles and playback techniques, for example, if the default glyph used for a particular playing technique is no
Library Custom playing techniques 9. Select the playback technique you want the playing technique to use in playback from the Playback technique menu. 10. Optional: If you want to use a playback technique that is not available, click Edit to open the Edit Playback Techniques dialog, in which you can add and edit playback techniques.
Library Custom lines Edit Playing Techniques dialog on page 740 Custom lines Custom lines allow you to design lines that appear any way you want and save them for use in multiple projects. Custom lines comprise the same components as the default lines in Dorico Pro. However, there are many possible combinations, and you can create new components and edit existing ones. ● Lines can have custom annotations as caps or as centered annotations, which can appear repeated across the duration of lines.
Library Custom lines 7. Customize the appearance and default position of the line using the available line options. For example, you can select a different annotation for each cap and set the minimum distances between the line and the staff or other items. 8. 9.
Library Custom lines ● To create a new line body that is a copy of an existing one, select the existing line body in the line bodies list and click New from Selection in the action bar. 4. Enter a name for the new line body in the Name field. 5. Customize the appearance of the line body using the available line body options. For example, you can change the width of generic lines/wedges and add multiple repeatable symbols to repeatable symbol line bodies. 6.
Library Custom lines 4. Customize the appearance of the line annotation in one of the following ways: ● For Arrowhead, Hook, Terminal Line, and Text annotations, use the available line annotation options. For example, you can change the width of arrowheads, hooks, and terminal lines, and change the font style and attachments of text.
Library Custom lines RESULT The new custom repeatable symbol is added to the project. If you clicked Save as Default so that it appears as , the custom repeatable symbol is available in all future projects on your computer AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can add your new custom repeatable symbol to repeatable symbol line bodies.
Library Custom lines Contains all the lines in the project within the currently selected category and your search filter, if applicable. The action bar at the bottom of the list contains the following options: ● New : Adds a new line with default settings. ● New from Selection from the original. ● Save as Default : Saves the selected line to your user library, allowing you to use it in multiple projects. Appears as for lines saved as default.
Library Custom lines staff. When deactivated, the line follows your settings on the Lines page in Engraving Options. 9 ● Hooks follow dash pattern (lines with dashed/dotted line bodies only): Allows you to choose whether or not hook or terminal line caps use the line body style pattern, provided the hooks/terminal lines are long enough to display the pattern. For line patterns with multiple dash-gap values, the first is used.
Library Custom lines ● Position: Allows you to select the vertical position of text relative to the line body.
Library Custom lines ● New from Selection : Creates a copy of an existing line body that you can edit separately from the original. ● Save as Default : Saves the selected line body to your user library, allowing you to use for line bodies saved as default. it in multiple projects. Appears as ● Revert to Factory : Removes all your changes to the selected line body, returning it to its saved settings and appearance. ● Delete : Deletes the selected line body.
Library Custom lines ● Symbol selector: Contains the available repeatable symbols. The action bar contains the following options: ● Add to Start: Adds the selected symbol to the line body as the start symbol. Start symbols only appear at the start of lines and are not repeated. ● Add to Middle: Adds the selected symbol to the middle of the line body. It is added to the right of any existing symbols. ● Add to End: Adds the selected symbol to the line body as the end symbol.
Library Custom lines The Edit Line Annotations dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Category menu Allows you to select which type of line annotation is available in the line annotations list. 2 Search field Allows you to filter line annotations in the selected category according to your entry. 3 Line annotations list Contains all the line annotations in the project within the currently selected category and your search filter, if applicable.
Library Custom lines Allows you to enter a new name or edit the existing name for the selected line annotation. 5 Preview Displays the line annotation in its current form in all possible positions. 6 Line annotation options Contains options that control the appearance of the selected line annotation. The options available depend on the category of the current line annotation.
Library Custom lines ● Vertical attachment: Allows you to select the attachment point of the text annotation relative to horizontal lines. ● Gap above/Gap below: Allow you to set the gap between the text annotation and line bodies above and below respectively. ● Gap to the left/Gap to the right: Allow you to set the gap between the text annotation and line bodies to the left and right respectively.
Library Custom lines The Edit Line Annotation dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Name Contains an automatically generated name for the new music symbol annotation. You cannot change this name. 2 Component selector Allows you to choose components to add to the music symbol annotation. You can add different types of components by clicking the respective tab titles. ● Glyph, for example, ♮ or ♯.
Library Custom lines 5 ● Zoom: Allows you to change the zoom level in the editor. ● Select: Allows you to select the next/previous component. ● Show Attachments ● Delete : Shows all the attachments on all components in the editor. : Deletes the selected component. Controls Contains controls that allow you to edit individual components. Controls are divided into tabs according to the aspect of the selected component they affect.
Library Custom lines The Edit Repeatable Symbols dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Search field Allows you to filter repeatable symbols according to your entry. 2 Repeatable symbols list Contains all the repeatable symbols in the project. The action bar at the bottom of the list contains the following options: ● New : Adds a new blank repeatable symbol and opens the Edit Repeatable Symbol dialog, where you can design your new repeatable symbol.
Library Custom lines ● Symbol: Clicking Edit opens the Edit Repeatable Symbol dialog, where you can edit the appearance of the repeatable symbol. ● Repeat offset: Allows you to set the point along the repeatable symbol where the following symbol starts, measured in spaces from the left edge of the repeatable symbol.
Library Custom lines NOTE A full list of the different ranges of glyphs is available on the SMuFL website. 3 ● Text, including numbers and other text. You can use numbers and text from the available Preset text list or select any font available from the menu and enter your preferred text into the text box at the bottom. Click Add Text to add the selected or input text to the repeatable symbol.
Library Custom tonality systems Custom tonality systems Custom tonality systems allow you to specify a unique number of divisions of the octave for your project. This can be useful for music not based on traditional Western harmony. In Dorico Pro, you can design your own custom accidentals and combine them into custom key signatures within each custom tonality. You can create custom tonality systems and edit existing tonality systems in the Edit Tonality System dialog.
Library Custom tonality systems ● You cannot change the pitch delta when editing the default accidentals in the default 12-EDO and 24-EDO tonality systems. 7. Click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Accidental dialog. 8. Optional: Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each accidental you want in your custom tonality system. 9. In the Custom Key Signatures section, add a new custom key signature or edit one of the default custom key signatures.
Library Custom tonality systems PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, click Panels , then Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals in the Notations toolbox to show the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel. 2. In the Tonality System section, select the tonality system for which you want to create or edit custom accidentals from the menu. 3. Click Edit Tonality System 4.
Library Custom tonality systems PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, click Panels , then Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals in the Notations toolbox to show the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel. 2. In the Tonality System section, select the tonality system for which you want to create or edit custom key signatures from the menu. 3. Click Edit Tonality System 4.
Library Custom tonality systems The Edit Tonality System dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Name Allows you to enter a name for a new tonality system, or edit the name of an existing custom tonality system you created. 2 Divisions Allows you to specify how many divisions of the octave you want assigned to each interval.
Library Custom tonality systems 5 ● Edit Key Signature : Opens the Edit Custom Key Signature dialog and allows you to edit the selected custom key signature. ● Delete Key Signature : Deletes the selected custom key signature. Save As Default Saves the tonality system, either a new custom one or edits you have made to a default tonality system, as a default in your user library, allowing you to use it in all future projects.
Library Custom tonality systems Edit Accidental dialog The Edit Accidental dialog allows you to create new and edit existing custom accidentals. ● You can open the Edit Accidental dialog from inside the Edit Tonality System dialog by clicking either New Accidental , Duplicate Accidental , or Edit Accidental in the Accidentals section action bar. The Edit Accidental dialog contains the following sections: 1 Name Allows you to enter a name for your accidental.
Library Custom tonality systems 4 ● Text, including numbers and other text. You can use numbers and text from the available Preset text list or select any font available from the menu and enter your preferred text into the text box at the bottom. Click Add Text to add the selected or input text to the accidental. ● Graphic: Allows you to load a new graphics file or select an existing graphic from the Select existing list in SVG, PNG, or JPG format.
Library Custom tonality systems ● Delete : Removes the cut-out from the corresponding corner. There are eight attachment points for glyphs and graphics, and eleven for text, due to the extra space required for letters that extend below the baseline. The example diagram helps you visualize how these points relate to components.
Library Custom tonality systems Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel on page 280 Inputting key signatures with the panel on page 283 Edit Custom Key Signature dialog The Edit Custom Key Signature dialog allows you to create new and edit existing custom key signatures. ● You can open the Edit Custom Key Signature dialog from inside the Edit Tonality System dialog by clicking either New Key Signature or Edit Key Signature in the Custom Key Signatures section action bar.
Library Expression maps RELATED LINKS Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel on page 280 Edit Tonality System dialog on page 768 Edit Accidental dialog on page 771 Creating/Editing custom key signatures on page 767 Playback of custom tonality systems Dorico Pro can play back custom tonality systems with any number and distribution of octave divisions.
Library Expression maps ● Transpose up 1 octave: Allows the bottom octave of keyboards to be used for key switches instead of notes, but is also used by some bass instrument patches that sound an octave lower than written so that they can be played without needing a full range keyboard. You can edit, create, and import/export expression maps in the Expression Maps dialog. Expression maps are saved as .doricolib files.
Library Expression maps Expression maps list 1 Expression maps list: Contains the expression maps currently available in your project. 2 Search field: Allows you to filter expression maps according to your entry. 3 Show only expression maps used in this project: Allows you to filter the expression maps list so it only includes expression maps used in the current project.
Library Expression maps Name Allows you to set the name of the expression map that appears in the program, for example, in the Endpoint Setup dialog. ID Allows you to set the unique ID of the expression map. You can enter any content in the ID field. It can be useful to include the instrument and sound library for which you created the map, as well as your name, for example, xmap.user.paulsmith.hso.violinpizz. Creator Allows you to name the creator if you are sharing your expression map with other users.
Library Expression maps The Base and Add-on Switches section contains the following: 1 Switches table: Contains the switches in the currently selected expression map. Allows you to add new switches and edit existing ones. 2 Name: Allows you to change the name that appears for the currently selected switch in the Switches table, for example, so it appears the same as in your sound library.
Library Expression maps The Switches table comprises the following: 1 2 Type column: Displays the switch type. Switches can be any of the following types: ● Base ● Add-on ● Init Name column: Displays the name of the switch. By default, this is the same as the playback technique or playback technique combination it triggers. In simple cases, each switch triggers an individual playback technique, such as Staccato or Accent.
Library Expression maps ● Delete Technique : Deletes the selected switch. Selecting a switch in the Switches table allows you to edit its controls and actions. Different options are available in the Base and Add-on Switches section depending on the switch type. NOTE ● Most instruments have a “natural” playback technique, which is the most common way of playing the instrument. Dorico Pro requires every instrument to have a defined natural playback technique.
Library Expression maps NOTE 4 ● You can change the values of cells in the Actions table by double-clicking them, or selecting them and pressing Return . ● You can only select one action at a time in the Actions table. Actions table action bar: Contains the following options: : Adds a control change action with default settings. ● Add Control Change Action ● Add Program Change Action : Adds a program change action with default settings.
Library Expression maps ● ● !=: Not equal to ● <: Less than ● <=: Less than or equal to ● >: More than ● >=: More than or equal to Third column: Controls the note length used by the condition. The following note length values are available: ● Very short: A dotted 16th note at 120 bpm, or 0.1875 seconds ● Short: A dotted eighth note at 120 bpm, or 0.375 seconds ● Medium: A dotted quarter note at 120 bpm, or 0.75 seconds ● Long: A dotted half note at 120 bpm, or 1.
Library Expression maps ● Volume dynamic: Allows you to choose whether the volume dynamic for the selected switch is controlled by its Note velocity or a Control change. If you choose Control change, you must specify the controller by number. You can consult the documentation for the VST instrument and/or MIDI controller you are using to find the appropriate controller number.
Library Expression maps libraries supports a particular playback technique combination for an instrument but another sound library does not. You can hide/show the Mutual Exclusion Groups section by clicking the section header. The Mutual Exclusion Groups section contains the following options and columns: 1 Auto: Allows Dorico Pro to define mutual exclusion groups automatically. NOTE Activating Auto permanently deletes any manual exclusion groups you have created.
Library Expression maps Reset to Library Defaults Allows you to revert any changes you have made to the expression maps from the Default Library. Import Library Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, where you can select the .doricolib files that you want to import as expression maps. You can also import Dorico and Cubase expression maps by dragging and dropping them into the Expression Maps dialog.
Library Expression maps 1 Techniques list Allows you to select playback techniques to include in a new switch or to change the playback techniques in an existing switch. You can select multiple playback techniques to combine by Ctrl/Cmd -clicking each playback technique. 2 Name Displays the name of the selected playback technique. If you select multiple playback techniques, each name is automatically separated by a + symbol.
Library Expression maps Add-on A switch that applies in addition to the existing base switch. For example, some sound libraries allow you to use the same legato switch in addition to different base switches. Add-on switches do not remove or change base switches. Add-on switches can only trigger simple key switch notes and controller values. Init A switch that sends instructions when playback starts, such as ensuring a MIDI controller always starts at a set value.
Library Expression maps and want to use the same switches for all four trumpets, you might use a relative channel change action to switch from the “natural” original channel to “muted” on the +1 relative channel. Relative channel numbers relate to the original channel number of the endpoint for the corresponding instrument. A 0 relative channel change switches back to the original channel. TIP You can add actions to individual switches in the Expression Maps dialog.
Library Expression maps Adding/Editing switches in expression maps You can create new and edit existing switches that trigger playback techniques or combinations of playback techniques in individual expression maps, for example, to add an add-on switch to an existing base switch or to create a new base switch with note length conditions.
Library Expression maps ● C3 ● C4 ● C5 NOTE Steps 11 to 15 only apply to base switches. For init and add-on switches, you can skip to step 16. 11. Optional: Repeat steps 6 to 10 for each action you require for the currently selected switch. 12. In the Conditions table, add a condition for the currently selected base switch in one of the following ways: ● To create a new condition, click Add Technique in the action bar.
Library Expression maps 7. In the Mutual Exclusion Groups column, select the mutual exclusion groups whose playback techniques you want to change. 8. Change the playback techniques in the selected mutual exclusion group in any of the following ways: 9. ● To add new playback techniques to the mutual exclusion group, click Add in the Has techniques column action bar to open the Playback Technique Combinations dialog. Select the playback techniques you want to add, then click OK.
Library Percussion maps RESULT The selected expression maps are exported as a .doricolib file and saved in the selected location. Percussion maps Unpitched percussion instruments are played back using patches that map unpitched sounds onto different MIDI notes. The pitches required to produce different unpitched sounds vary by device, sound library, manufacturer, and so on, and have no connection to the position of percussion instruments on five-line staves.
Library Percussion maps The Percussion Maps dialog is divided into the following sections: 1 Percussion maps list Contains the percussion maps currently available in your project. You can add and delete percussion maps using the following buttons in the action bar at the bottom of the percussion maps list: ● Add Percussion Map ● Duplicate Percussion Map : Creates a copy of an existing percussion map that you can edit separately from the original.
Library Percussion maps ● ID: Allows you to set the unique ID of the percussion map. You can enter any content in the ID field. It can be useful to include the instrument and sound library for which you created the map, as well as your name, for example, xmap.user.paulsmith.hso.cowbell. ● Version: Allows you to indicate the percussion map version so you can identify the most recent one.
Library Percussion maps You can change the data for the currently selected drum kit note in the Edit Drum Kit Note subsection. 7 Edit Drum Kit Note subsection Allows you to specify data in the following fields for the drum kit note currently selected in the Drum Kit Note Map table: ● Name: The displayed name for the specific combination of instrument and playback technique. You may choose to input the name used in the manufacturer’s documentation for your VST instrument or MIDI output device.
Library Percussion maps It can be useful to include the instrument and sound library for which you created the map, as well as your name, in the identification name for percussion maps, for example, xmap.user.paulsmith.hso.cowbell. 6. Choose one of the following options for Map defines sounds for, as appropriate for the current percussion map: ● Multiple Instruments ● Single Instruments 7. In the Drum Kit Note Map section, click Show all to show unmapped notes. 8.
Library Percussion maps 3. Locate and select the percussion map file you want to import. 4. Click Open. RESULT The selected percussion map is imported into your project. It appears in the percussion maps list. Exporting percussion maps You can export percussion maps so you can use them in other projects. Percussion maps are saved as .doricolib files. PROCEDURE 1. Choose Library > Percussion Maps to open the Percussion Maps dialog. 2.
Library Playback techniques TIP You can select a single playback technique or combine multiple playback techniques. To select multiple playback techniques, Ctrl/Cmd -click each playback technique. 6. Click OK to add the selected playback techniques and close the Playback Technique Combinations dialog. 7. Choose one of the following options: ● Replace: Allows you to use this playing technique instead of the default playing technique defined for this combination of notehead and staff position.
Library Playback techniques For example, if you input a new playing technique without cancelling an existing playing technique, the expression map cannot process the two corresponding playback techniques together if the expression map does not have an entry for those two techniques combined. To avoid playback technique clashes, you can add playback techniques that cannot be in use concurrently to the same mutual exclusion group in the corresponding expression maps.
Library Playback techniques Allows you to filter the list of playback techniques by selecting a category from the menu, such as Techniques or Dynamics. 2 Playback techniques list Contains all the playback techniques in the project within the currently selected category. The action bar at the bottom of the list contains the following options: ● New : Adds a new blank playback technique.
Notation reference
Introduction This notation reference contains information about the accepted conventions for presenting different notations and how to change their appearance and placement in Dorico Pro, both for individual items and by changing default settings. It also contains instructions for inputting more complex notations, such as cross-staff glissando lines, which are described in the corresponding chapter.
Accidentals Accidentals are shown beside notes to indicate their pitch, both when notated on a staff and written out in text. In music based in Western tonality, they usually show that the pitch of a note has been altered so that it does not conform to the prevailing key signature. In Dorico Pro, each note has its own fixed pitch that is independent of the prevailing key signature, and accidentals are automatically hidden and shown as appropriate.
Accidentals Deleting accidentals Deleting accidentals You can delete accidentals according to their type, and you can delete all accidentals from a selection of notes with different accidentals at the same time. This changes the pitch of the selected notes. NOTE These steps do not apply to cautionary accidentals, such as those shown on natural notes that follow the same notes with an accidental but in a different octave.
Accidentals Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing accidentals brackets. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose accidentals you want to hide/show or parenthesize.
Accidentals Changing the size of accidentals Ties on page 1459 Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Changing the size of accidentals You can change the size of accidentals individually without changing the size of the noteheads to which they apply, for example, to show editorial accidentals at a smaller size than normal accidentals. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Accidentals Stacking of accidentals ● Accidentals that are a second apart are arranged in adjacent columns, with the higher accidental in the right-hand column. These rules minimize the amount of extra space that is required between successive notes or chords and ensure that accidentals appear as close as possible to the noteheads to which they apply. At the same time, they produce a contour that resembles a C-curve on the left-hand side of the chord.
Accidentals Stacking of accidentals Changing the column of accidentals You can change the column of individual accidentals, independently of your project-wide settings for accidental stacking. For example, to show specific accidentals closer to the stem than other accidentals in the chord. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Accidentals Altered unisons NOTE You cannot move accidentals rhythmically. If you want to change the notes to which accidentals apply, you must delete them from their original notes and input new accidentals on the new notes or change the pitch of existing notes. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Accidentals Altered unisons NOTE If a chord contains notes a second interval apart and one of those notes has an altered unison, it is always shown with a split stem, regardless of your setting. This is to ensure clarity in clusters.
Accidentals Microtonal accidentals RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 493 Properties panel on page 692 Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Notation Options dialog on page 701 Microtonal accidentals Microtonal accidentals indicate pitches beyond the standard accepted chromatic scale in Western tonality, such as a quarter sharp or quarter flat.
Accidentals Accidental duration rules RELATED LINKS Changing the tonality system on page 1069 Input methods for key signatures on page 278 Accidental duration rules Accidental duration rules determine how long accidentals apply, such as within a bar, at a different octave, or just for a single note. Dorico Pro allows you to use different accidental duration rules. ● You can find the available accidental duration rules on the Accidentals page in Notation Options.
Accidentals Accidental duration rules Hiding/Showing cancellation naturals before key signature changes on page 1063 Changing the accidental duration rule You can change the accidental duration rule in each flow independently, for example, if the Modernist accidental duration rule is appropriate for certain flows in your project but common practice is appropriate for others. In Dorico Pro, common practice is the default accidental duration rule. PROCEDURE 1.
Accidentals Accidental duration rules RESULT Cautionary accidentals are hidden, shown, or parenthesized in the corresponding circumstances in the selected flows. TIP For flows using the Modernist accidental duration rule, options for cautionary accidentals are available in the Modernist Options section of the Accidentals page.
Articulations Articulations are markings that are drawn above or below notes and chords. Articulations tell a performer how to attack a note or how long to play a note relative to its notated duration. In Dorico Pro, articulations are defined as something that alters the way a note is played, in a way that is consistent across all instruments.
Articulations Project-wide engraving options for articulations Project-wide engraving options for articulations You can find options for the appearance and placement of articulations project-wide on the Articulations page in Engraving Options.
Articulations Positions of articulations ● In the Notes panel, click the articulations you want to delete. RELATED LINKS Notes panel on page 195 Hiding/Showing zones on page 43 Key commands for articulations on page 272 Positions of articulations There are established conventions for the position and placement of articulations relative to notes, the staff, and staff lines, which ensure articulations are always clearly visible.
Articulations Positions of articulations 2. Articulations of force are positioned outside articulations of duration. 3. Articulations of stress are positioned furthest from noteheads/stems. Order of articulations in relation to slurs Articulations of duration are positioned as follows: ● Inside slurs that start/end on a note or chord with an articulation. ● Inside the curvature of a slur. ● Inside tuplet brackets.
Articulations Positions of articulations TIP You can change the default position of each type of articulation relative to all tie chains projectwide in the Ties section of the Articulations page in Engraving Options.
Articulations Positions of articulations ● Notehead side ● Stem side RESULT The articulation is placed on the selected side of the notes or chords. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. If this creates a collision with other markings, such as playing techniques, Dorico Pro automatically makes adjustments to make sure all markings are clear and legible.
Articulations Positions of articulations Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the default placement of articulations You can change the default placement of all articulations according to their type, for example, if you want articulations of stress always to be placed above the staff but articulations of duration to be placed beside noteheads, both above and below the staff. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Articulations. 3.
Articulations Articulations in playback Articulations in playback Articulations affect how notes sound in playback. Depending on whether your sound library has specific samples for different articulations, Dorico Pro changes playback in different ways to reflect articulations. ● If your sound library includes samples for articulations, Dorico Pro loads the required samples using playback techniques. Additionally, Dorico Pro makes notes with staccatos sound shorter and notes with accents sound louder.
Bars Bars indicate a usually regular pattern of beats, determined by the prevailing time signature. Bars are separated from adjacent bars by vertical barlines, and each bar has a unique bar number. Dorico Pro automatically numbers bars and shows barlines between bars as required for the prevailing time signature.
Bars Deleting bars/beats For example, enter –6 to delete six bars, meaning the bar you selected and the subsequent five bars, or -2q to delete two quarter note beats, starting from the selected rhythmic position. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The number of bars or beats specified is deleted. Just as when Insert mode is activated, music to the right of the selection moves up to fill in the gap. NOTE ● Any signposts in the selection are also deleted.
Bars Deleting bars/beats NOTE ● Any signposts in the selection are also deleted. This can affect the page formatting, for example, by removing ossia staves whose signposts were included in the selection. ● Deleting some, but not all, beats from bars according to the prevailing time signature deletes the contents of those beats only.
Bars Changing the width of empty bars RESULT The contents of the selected bars are deleted. RELATED LINKS Large selections on page 424 Filters on page 428 Changing the width of empty bars You can change the width of empty bars individually in Engrave mode. PREREQUISITE Note Spacing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select a square note spacing handle at the rhythmic position of the barline at the end of each empty bar whose width you want to change. 2.
Bars Splits in bars Splits in bars You can split bars rhythmically by changing the number of beats in each bar. You can split bars visually across system or frame breaks, which might be required in music with an irregular meter or in passages of polymeter. Splitting bars by inputting new time signatures You can split bars into two or more bars by changing the time signature at any rhythmic position.
Barlines Barlines are vertical lines that cross staves in order to show how music is divided into bars, according to the time signature. The most commonly used barline is the single barline between adjacent bars, but there are different types, such as double or repeat barlines. The final system in a piece in 12/8 containing a key change with double barline, three normal barlines, and a final barline at the end Dorico Pro automatically shows barlines as required for the prevailing time signature.
Barlines Per-flow notation options for barlines There are musical examples for many options to demonstrate how they affect the appearance of your music. RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Barline spacing on page 836 Barlines on ossia staves on page 1400 Changing the barline shown before codas on page 1296 Per-flow notation options for barlines You can find options for the per-flow the appearance of barlines on the Barlines page in Notation Options.
Barlines Types of barlines Final A final barline consists of two lines: one of normal width, the other thick. It marks where the music ends. Dashed A dashed barline has the same thickness as a normal barline, but has gaps within it to give it a dashed appearance. It is used to subdivide bars to make complex time signatures easier to read, and to differentiate editorial barlines from ones originally in the manuscript. Tick A tick barline is a short line that spans only the top or bottom line of the staff.
Barlines Types of barlines It shows the start of a repeated section. It is used alongside end repeat lines, which show the end of a repeated section. End repeat An end repeat line is the mirror of a start repeat line, so it consists of either two or four dots, followed by a normal barline, followed by a thick barline. It shows the end of a repeated section. It is used alongside start repeat lines, which show the start of a repeated section.
Barlines Types of barlines 5. ● Final ● Tick ● Short (Center) ● Short (Top) ● Thick ● Start Repeat ● End Repeat ● End and Start Repeat Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The default barline type in the selected flows is changed. This does not override any explicit barlines you have input, such as repeat barlines in repeat endings, or the final barlines in the selected flows.
Barlines Types of barlines NOTE You can override individual final barlines by inputting a barline of a different type, but you cannot delete individual final barlines. Changing the barline shown at key signature changes You can change the default barline shown at all key signature changes that occur at barlines project-wide. By default, Dorico Pro shows double barlines at key signature changes. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Barlines. 3.
Barlines Hiding/Showing systemic barlines on single-staff systems ● Tick (top) ● Short (center) ● Thick ● Triple ● Short (top) ● Tick (bottom) ● None RESULT The barline type shown at the selected barlines is changed. TIP You can change the default barline shown at the end of all systems followed by start repeat barlines project-wide on the Barlines page in Engraving Options.
Barlines Hiding/Showing wings on repeat barlines ● 6. Show for two or more staves Click Apply, then Close. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids on page 921 Hiding/Showing clefs at the start of systems on page 936 Hiding/Showing key signatures at the start of systems on page 1062 Hiding/Showing wings on repeat barlines You can hide/show wings on all repeat barlines project-wide. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Barlines.
Barlines Barline spacing Moving barlines graphically You can adjust the spacing between barlines and neighboring notes, time signatures, key signatures, or rests. PREREQUISITE Note Spacing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select a square note spacing handle at the rhythmic position of each barline you want to move. 2. Move the handles in any of the following ways: ● To increase the space to the left of selected handles, press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow .
Barlines Barlines across staff groups Barlines across staff groups In order to make it easier to find a particular instrument within a score, barlines can extend across instrumental and staff groups. Barlines across default staff groups When a barline only appears on individual staves, it is much harder to locate individual lines at a glance. However, when barlines continue across instrumental groups in the score, instrument families are shown as blocks, which makes finding an instrument much easier.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups Barlines drawn between staves Custom barline groups You can create custom barline joins and bracket groups by manually arranging your players into groups. If one or more players included in your group were previously in another group, any remaining instruments in their previous group remain grouped. You can put a single player in its own player group so they appear separately, for example, to separate the soloist from the remainder of the ensemble in a concerto.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups Hiding/Showing zones on page 43 Properties panel on page 692 Inputting custom barline joins You can input custom barline joins at any position that change which staves are joined with barlines. PREREQUISITE ● The left zone is shown. ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select an item on the top staff you want to join with a barline, at the start of the system from which you want this change to apply. 2.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups EXAMPLE Divisi cello staves with default staff grouping Divisi cello staves with separate barline joins across each instrument RELATED LINKS Signposts on page 448 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Formatting panel on page 494 Hiding/Showing zones on page 43 Resetting bracket and barline changes on page 895 Deleting bracket and barline changes on page 896 Deleting barline joins You can delete individual barline joins independently of other barline joins and bracket/brace
Barlines Barlines across staff groups PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select a handle at either the top or bottom of each barline join you want to lengthen/shorten. TIP You only need to select a handle on one barline join for each bracket and barline change, as they apply from their signpost until the next existing change or the end of the flow, whichever comes first. 2. Move the handles in any of the following ways: ● To move them to the staff above, press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow .
Bar numbers Bar numbers provide crucial reference points in music and make the chronological sequence of music clear. By providing a unique number for each bar, they enable accurate references to specific parts of pieces and allow players to co-ordinate themselves easily in rehearsals and concerts. In Dorico Pro, bar numbers appear automatically, following the most common practice of showing a bar number at the start of each system in all layouts by default.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar numbers You can hide/show bar numbers in each layout independently, including showing them at different frequencies. For example, you can show bar numbers every bar in full score layouts but only at the start of each system in part layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show bar numbers.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number enclosures full score layout so the conductor can easily see them but with no enclosures in part layouts, where pages tend to be less busy. Bar numbers in enclosures automatically erase their backgrounds. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the bar number enclosure type. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number ranges on multi-bar rests Hiding/Showing bar number ranges on multi-bar rests You can hide/show bar number ranges on multi-bar rests, for example, so it is clear in part layouts which bars the player does not play. Multi-bar rests can include bar repeat regions, if you have chosen to consolidate bar repeat regions as well as empty bars into multi-bar rests. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Bar numbers Bar number paragraph styles RESULT Guide bar numbers are hidden/shown for every bar and above every staff in the corresponding view type. EXAMPLE Guide bar numbers shown in page view RELATED LINKS Switching to galley/page view on page 49 Bar number paragraph styles In Dorico Pro, bar numbers use paragraph styles so that you can use different paragraph styles in different layouts. In particular, part layouts often require differently formatted bar numbers compared to full score layouts.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers 3. Optional: Select one of the available styles from the Parent menu. If you select a parent style, an activated switch is shown beside all the options that are different in the selected paragraph style compared to its parent style. 4. Activate and change the options you want for the selected paragraph style. 5. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The selected bar number paragraph style is changed.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers numbers in Engrave mode. For example, you might want to show bar numbers every bar in full score layouts but only at the start of each system in part layouts. Changing the horizontal position of bar numbers You can change the horizontal position of bar numbers in each layout independently. For example, you can have bar numbers centered in the middle of bars in full score layouts but centered on barlines in part layouts. PROCEDURE 1.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The vertical positions of bar numbers are changed in the selected layouts. For players holding multiple instruments, bar numbers appear above their top instrument staff. NOTE You can change the distances between bar numbers and the staff/other objects and your vertical spacing settings for the gaps between staves in order to accommodate bar numbers shown between staves.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers NOTE ● These options affect the minimum distance between bar numbers and the staff and other objects, so bar numbers might be positioned further away than this to avoid collisions. ● If you want bar numbers within systems to appear closer to the staff than bar numbers at the start of systems, such as in part layouts with treble clefs, we recommend deactivating Align bar numbers across width of system.
Bar numbers Bar number changes Hiding bar numbers at time signatures shown at system object positions You can choose to hide bar numbers at the same rhythmic position as time signatures shown at system object positions, as the resulting collision can be difficult to resolve in a visually clear way when bar numbers are centered on barlines. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Bar numbers Bar number changes Subordinate Adds a secondary bar number sequence that uses letters rather than numbers to indicate the sequence. This can be useful in situations where a new version of a piece has been created with more bars inserted, but the original bar numbers are required. Don’t Include Excludes the selected bar from the current bar number sequence. If bar numbers are shown every bar, no bar number is shown in bars in which you have chosen Don’t Include.
Bar numbers Subordinate bar numbers Deleting bar number changes You can delete any bar number changes you have added. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the bar number changes you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The bar number changes are deleted. Subsequent bars follow the previous bar number sequence until the next bar number change, or until the end of the flow.
Bar numbers Subordinate bar numbers 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Bar Numbers > Add Bar Number Change to open the Insert Bar Number Change dialog. You can also choose this option from the context menu. 3. Choose Subordinate for Type to activate the Subordinate value field. 4. Change the first letter in the subordinate bar number sequence by changing the value in the Subordinate value field. The corresponding alphabetical letter is shown to the right of the value field.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats Changing the appearance of subordinate bar numbers You can show all subordinate bar numbers project-wide as either lowercase or uppercase letters. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Bar Numbers. 3. In the Sequence subsection, choose one of the following options for Letter case for subordinate bar numbers: 4. ● Lower case ● Upper case Click Apply, then Close.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats EXAMPLE Bar numbers not counting repeats with only initial bar numbers shown Bar numbers counting repeats with bar numbers for subsequent repeats shown alongside the initial bar numbers RELATED LINKS Changing the appearance of bar numbers for subsequent repeats on page 858 Including/Excluding repeats from the bar number count You can choose to include/exclude repeats from the bar number count in all layouts project-wide.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change which playthroughs are shown in bar numbers. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats This field starts with a space by default so there is a gap between the initial bar number and the subsequent repeat bar number. 5. Optional: Enter the suffix you want into the Suffix field. 6. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The appearance of bar numbers for subsequent repeats in the select layouts is changed. For example, if you want multiple bar numbers for the same bar to be separated by pipes, enter | into the Prefix field and nothing into the Suffix field.
Beaming A beam is a line that connects notes with tails to show rhythmic grouping, which varies according to the metrical structure of the prevailing time signature. This way of grouping notes helps performers calculate quickly exactly how to play their given rhythm and helps them follow both their part and, if applicable, the conductor.
Beaming Beam grouping according to meters Musical examples demonstrate how each option affects the appearance of your music. RELATED LINKS Notation Options dialog on page 701 Rhythm dot consolidation on page 1104 Beam slants on page 866 Beam grouping according to meters According to accepted conventions, notes are beamed differently in different time signatures to make the meter clear and easily readable. In Dorico Pro, default beam groupings are determined by time signatures.
Beaming Beaming notes together manually Beaming notes together manually You can beam notes in the same voice together manually, including notes across barlines as well as system/frame breaks. For example, if you want to beam a phrase differently to how it is usually beamed in the prevailing time signature. Beams by default stay within bars and systems, so to have beams cross barlines, system breaks, and frame breaks, you must force the phrase to beam together.
Beaming Beaming notes together manually Unbeaming notes You can separate all notes in a beamed group so that each note shows its own tail, for example, when fast rhythms have syllabic text settings. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes you want to make unbeamed. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Beaming > Make Unbeamed. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Beaming Changing the thickness of beams ● You can change how beams and secondary beams are split by default in each flow independently on the Beam Grouping page in Notation Options ● You can assign key commands for Split Beam and Split Secondary Beam on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Beaming Beam placement relative to the staff 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The thickness of all beam lines in the selected beams is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Beaming Beam slants RESULT The beam appears on the side of the staff that corresponds to its forced stem direction. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Beaming Beam slants The amount by which a beam slants is typically determined by the interval between the first and last note in the beamed group, provided the pattern of notes in the beam does not dictate a horizontal beam instead. Smaller intervals require a shallower slant and larger intervals require a steeper one. However, the desired amount of slant is not the only factor that must be considered.
Beaming Centered beams 3. ● To move beam handles a large amount, press Ctrl/Cmd plus the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . This moves beam handles by 1 space per press. ● To move beam handles a moderate amount, press Shift plus the standard key command, for example, Shift-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . This moves beam handles by 1/2 space per press.
Beaming Centered beams A phrase with high and low notes with default beaming The same phrase with high and low notes, but with a centered beam TIP To center beams between the staves of grand staff instruments, you can create cross-staff beams. RELATED LINKS Changing the staff-relative placement of beams on page 865 Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos on page 870 Creating centered beams You can center beams between the notes in the beamed group.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos RESULT Beams are centered between the notes in the selected beam groups. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. If you select notes in multiple beams, each beam is centered separately. If you want to create a single centered beam, you can beam the notes in those beam groups together. You can do this both before and after centering the beams.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes you want to cross to another staff. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE You can only cross notes to other staves held by the same player. 2. Cross the notes to other staves in any of the following ways: ● To cross notes to the staff above, press N . ● To cross notes to the staff below, press M . ● Choose Edit > Notations > Cross Staff > Cross to Staff Above.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos Changing the stem direction of notes on page 1122 Hiding/Showing voice colors on page 1539 Tremolos on page 1497 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing to optical cross-staff beam spacing You can make the stems in cross-staff beams, rather than the noteheads, evenly spaced in each layout independently. This can make it easier to perceive the evenness of rhythmic spacing in cross-staff beams than when noteheads are evenly spaced. PROCEDURE 1.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams/tremolos A cross-staff beam across the upper two staves on an instrument with three staves A cross-staff beam across the lower two staves on an instrument with three staves If a beam group contains notes on all three staves, the placement of the beam depends on the stem directions of the notes in each staff. 1 If all notes in the beam group are stem-up, the beam is placed above the top staff.
Beaming Beam corners Resetting notes crossed to other staves You can reset notes that have been crossed to other staves so that they appear on their default staff. We recommend resetting cross-staff notes before copying and pasting them to other staves to avoid unexpected beaming. PROCEDURE 1. Select the cross-staff notes you want to reset. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Cross Staff > Reset to Original Staff.
Beaming Secondary beams A phrase of 64th notes, with secondary beams subdivided to show 16th and eighth note groups You can set per-flow options for splitting secondary beams and their appearance on the Beam Grouping page in Notation Options. RELATED LINKS Rests within beams on page 878 Notation Options dialog on page 701 Changing the gaps between beam lines on page 876 Changing the direction of partial beams Dorico Pro automatically inputs a partial beam if one is required.
Beaming Secondary beams PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes to the right of where you want to change the number of secondary beaming lines. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Beaming Tuplets within beams ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select all the noteheads in the beams whose beam line gaps you want to change. NOTE For the best results, we recommend selecting all notes in each beam. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Separation in the Beaming group. 3. Change the value in the value field.
Beaming Rests within beams Rests within beams There are different conventions for how beams interact with rests, including whether beams should extend over rests or split at rests. You can control how Dorico Pro handles rests within beams in the following ways: ● You can change how primary and secondary beams interact with rests in each flow independently on the Beam Grouping page in Notation Options, including showing stemlets on rests within beams.
Beaming Stemlets PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes you want to beam together with stemlets shown on rests. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. For example, to show a stemlet on a rest between two notes, select both notes. To show a stemlet on a rest at the end of a beamed phrase, select all notes in the beam and the rest. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Beaming > Stemlets > Force Stemlet Beam. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Beaming Fanned beams RESULT Stemlets are removed from all rests in the selected beams. Explicit rests within the beamed group remain explicit. NOTE ● Removing stemlets from beams does not reset the selected beams to your default beam grouping for the flow. ● You can choose not to show stemlets on rests in all beam groups in each flow on the Beam Grouping page in Notation Options.
Beaming Fanned beams Creating fanned beams You can create fanned beams across a group of any notes that can be beamed, such as eighth notes (quavers), 16th notes (semiquavers), and 32nd notes. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes you want to include in a fanned beam. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Beaming > Create Fanned Beam > [Direction and number of lines].
Note and rest grouping There are generally accepted conventions for how notes and rests of different durations are notated and grouped in different contexts and meters. In Dorico Pro, notes are automatically notated to fit within bars and are grouped according to your per-flow settings. Depending on the prevailing time signature, there can be many different ways to beam notes together.
Note and rest grouping Creating custom beat groupings for meters You can choose whether or not the time signature shows this custom beat grouping. You can also input time signatures only on single staves. NOTE The duration of beam groups in Dorico Pro depends on the beat grouping in the prevailing time signature and your per-flow beam grouping settings in Notation Options. For example, entering [1+1+1+1]/4 into the time signatures popover inputs a time signature with four quarter note (crotchet) groups.
Brackets and braces Brackets and braces are thick straight and curved lines in the left-hand margin that show instrument groupings. Brackets A bracket is a thick black line, the width of a beam, that groups staves together, most commonly according to instrument family. It often has winged ends that point inwards towards the score. It is always positioned directly to the left of a systemic barline.
Brackets and braces Project-wide engraving options for brackets and braces A brace connecting two piano staves NOTE ● Staves cannot be bracketed and braced simultaneously. Therefore, braced staves are excluded from bracketed groups. They also cannot show sub-brackets or sub-sub-brackets. ● System objects are only shown above instrument families that are bracketed or braced together. ● Blank staves can only show brackets/braces when they are shown after final flows.
Brackets and braces Changing bracket grouping according to ensemble type Changing bracket grouping according to ensemble type You can change which staves are included in brackets by changing the ensemble type for each layout independently, for example, if a part layout containing all percussion players requires different bracketing than used for percussion staves in the full score layout. The default setting is Orchestral. We recommend that you change this setting for projects containing small ensembles.
Brackets and braces Changing bracket grouping according to ensemble type Brackets according to ensemble type In Dorico Pro, default staff grouping is determined by the ensemble type chosen for each layout. This affects which staves are bracketed together and joined by barlines. The following ensemble types are available on the Brackets and Braces page in Layout Options: No brackets All staves appear separately, with no brackets. Grand staff instruments are still shown with braces.
Brackets and braces Changing the appearance of bracket ends ● Vocal staves are never joined by barlines, even when bracketed together. ● System objects are only shown above instrument families that are bracketed or braced together. RELATED LINKS Layout Options dialog on page 698 Project templates on page 75 System objects on page 1403 Custom staff grouping on page 891 Changing the appearance of bracket ends You can change the appearance of all bracket ends project-wide.
Brackets and braces Secondary brackets Secondary bracket as a sub-bracket Secondary bracket as a brace NOTE You cannot show sub-sub-brackets in addition to braces, you can only show sub-sub-brackets in addition to sub-brackets. You can input and delete sub-brackets from selected rhythmic positions using custom bracket/ brace groups.
Brackets and braces Sub-sub-brackets ● 6. Do not draw sub-bracket Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Secondary brackets are shown in the selected layouts when you choose Use secondary brackets, and hidden when you choose No secondary brackets. If you chose Use secondary brackets and Do not draw sub-bracket, secondary brackets are only shown when sub-bracketed groups contain at least two staves.
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping within bracketed and sub-bracketed groups. Sub-sub-brackets can only appear as brackets in Dorico Pro. Sub-sub-brackets cannot extend beyond their sub-bracket and cannot be shown on staves with a brace as either the primary or secondary group. You can input and delete sub-sub-brackets from selected rhythmic positions using custom bracket/brace groups.
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping A bracket and barline change signpost indicating sub-sub-brackets have been added to separate the divisi cello parts and barlines only join staves of the same instrument type rather than all strings. NOTE ● For best results, we recommend that you input any bracket/brace grouping or barline join changes you want only after adding any extra staves, ossia staves, or additional instruments you want and with all staves shown in the layout.
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping Inputting custom bracket/brace groups You can input custom bracket/brace grouping changes at any position that change which staves are grouped with brackets, sub-brackets, sub-sub-brackets, and braces. NOTE You cannot change brackets/braces on blank staves shown after final flows or show brackets/ braces on blank staves in music frames. PREREQUISITE ● The left zone is shown. ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping If necessary, any existing bracket or brace groupings are adjusted to accommodate the new group as brackets/braces cannot overlap. NOTE ● You cannot move bracket and barline change signposts, as they are intended to apply to system start positions. However, they can appear partway through systems if, for example, you move system breaks.
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select a handle at either the top or bottom of each bracket/brace you want to lengthen/shorten. TIP You only need to select a handle on one bracket/brace for each bracket and barline change, as they apply from their signpost until the next existing change or the end of the flow, whichever comes first. 2. Move the handles in any of the following ways: ● To move them to the staff above, press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow .
Brackets and braces Custom staff grouping TIP You can also reset changes to bracket/brace grouping and barline joins independently of each other by using the Change bracketing and Change barlines properties in the Bracket and Barline Changes group of the Properties panel. When they are set to Auto, the corresponding part of the selected changes is reset.
Chord symbols Chord symbols describe the vertical harmony of the music at a specific moment. They are frequently used in jazz and pop music, where players often improvise around chord progressions. Chord symbols shown above slashes on the Clarinet and Piano staves to help the players improvise around the notated Cornet melody. You can input chord symbols using the chord symbols popover and you can automatically generate chord symbols based on existing music.
Chord symbols Chord components Chord symbol appearance presets on page 899 Custom chord symbols on page 720 Chord symbol font styles on page 900 Hiding/Showing chord symbols on page 901 Chord diagrams on page 917 Capos on page 141 Capo vs. main chords on page 141 Hiding/Showing signposts on page 449 Chord components Chord symbols consist of a root and a quality, with intervals, alterations, and an altered bass note included if required.
Chord symbols Chord symbol appearance presets Chord symbol appearance presets There are many conventions for the appearance of chord symbols, so Dorico Pro provides a choice of preset conventions that you can use and edit. For example, you can edit default preset chord symbols, you can edit individual chord symbols without changing the default appearance for that chord symbol, and you can edit individual components within chord symbols.
Chord symbols Chord symbol font styles Default uses a set of symbols intended to be as unambiguous as possible. For example, Default avoids the use of symbols for major seventh, augmented, diminished, and half-diminished. This is the default preset for new projects. Custom is automatically selected when you change any of the preset options. RELATED LINKS Custom chord symbols on page 720 Chord symbol font styles There are different font styles for different chord symbol components.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols Hiding/Showing chord symbols You can hide/show chord symbols above particular staves or only within chord symbol/slash regions project-wide on a per-player basis. By default, chord symbols appear above rhythm section instrument staves, such as keyboards, guitars, and bass guitars. Any player on whose staff you input chord symbols is automatically set to show chord symbols for all instruments and in the current layout type. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols Hiding/Showing chord diagrams on page 919 Showing only chord symbols or chord diagrams on page 920 Showing chord symbols above one/multiple staves on page 902 Changing the staff-relative placement of chord symbols on page 904 Capo vs.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols 5. ● Above specific players’ staves ● Above top staff of system Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The vertical position of chord symbols is changed in the selected layouts. RELATED LINKS Inputting chord symbols on page 316 Showing only chord symbols or chord diagrams on page 920 Capo vs.
Chord symbols Chord symbol regions Changing the staff-relative placement of chord symbols You can show individual chord symbols either above or below the staff, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties.
Chord symbols Chord symbol regions When you input chord symbol regions in Dorico Pro, the corresponding players are automatically set to show chord symbols in chord symbol/slash regions. This is because it is common to use both slashes and chord symbols to aid players in improvisation sections. Any chord symbols outside chord symbol/slash regions are automatically hidden and are indicated by signposts.
Chord symbols Transposing chord symbols Transposing chord symbols You can transpose chord symbols after you have input them, independently of any notes. TIP ● Dorico Pro automatically shows the appropriate chord symbols for transposing instruments in transposing layouts. ● If you want to transpose chord symbols to reflect a capo, you can instead show capo chord symbols. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the chord symbols you want to transpose. 2.
Chord symbols Respelling chord symbols 4. Change the root name of the chord, but leave other details as they were, such as quality, interval, or alterations. For example, change just the root of D♭maj13 from Db to C#. 5. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The spelling of the chord symbol is changed in transposing layouts for all instruments with the same transposition.
Chord symbols Hiding/Showing the root and quality of chord symbols 2. ● If you want to reset the enharmonic spelling of the chord symbol for a single instrument transposition only, select the chord symbol on a staff belonging to an instrument with that transposition. For example, select it on the staff of any instrument in B♭ to reset the chord symbol for all instruments in B♭.
Chord symbols Changing the arrangement of compound chord symbols RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Hiding/Showing zones on page 43 Properties panel on page 692 Changing the arrangement of compound chord symbols You can change the arrangement of individual polychord and altered bass note chord symbols, independently of your project-wide settings. For example, if you want to show some polychord chord symbols stacked vertically but others in a horizontal row.
Chord symbols Erasing the background of chord symbols RELATED LINKS Chord components on page 898 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Inputting chord symbols on page 316 Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Erasing the background of chord symbols You can erase the background of individual chord symbols, for example, to ensure chord symbols remain legible when crossing barlines.
Chord symbols Parenthesized chord symbols Changing the erasure padding of chord symbols You can change the erasure padding of individual chord symbols, including changing the padding between chord symbols and each edge of their erased areas independently. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties.
Chord symbols Parenthesized chord symbols TIP You can change the default appearance of chord symbol parentheses project-wide, including suppressing parentheses around alterations inside parenthesized chord symbols in different circumstances, in Engraving Options > Chord Symbols > Parentheses.
Chord symbols Parenthesized chord symbols symbols are optional. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord symbols Parenthesized chord symbols PROCEDURE 1. Select the parenthesized chord symbols whose parenthesis style you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Parenthesis style in the Chord Symbols group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Thick ● Slender ● Slender/tall RESULT The parenthesis style of the selected parenthesized chord symbols is changed.
Chord symbols Chord symbols imported from MusicXML TIP You can change the default height of all chord symbol parentheses project-wide in Engraving Options > Chord Symbols > Parentheses. RELATED LINKS Chord symbol font styles on page 900 Large selections on page 424 Moving chord symbol parentheses graphically You can move individual chord symbol parentheses graphically to the right or left, independently of your project-wide setting.
Chord symbols Chord symbols imported from MusicXML during import, as there is no information to specify what notes these chord symbols are meant to describe. RELATED LINKS Calculating chord symbols based on existing music on page 325 916 Dorico Pro 4.1.
Chord diagrams Chord diagrams represent the pattern of strings and frets on fretted instruments and use dots to indicate the stopped finger positions required to produce the corresponding chord. This demonstrates the specific shape of chords in a compact way and is useful if a particular voicing is required. In Dorico Pro, chord diagrams are part of chord symbols, meaning you can show them below chord symbols wherever they are shown.
Chord diagrams Chord diagram components Chord diagram components Chord diagrams use a combination of symbols, dots, and lines to convey the information about strings, fret positions, and finger positions that performers require to play the corresponding chord. 1 Omitted string Indicates a string that must not sound. 2 Open string Indicates a string that must sound but must be left open, that is, not stopped.
Chord diagrams Project-wide note input options for chord diagrams the thickness of strings and lines and size of dots. You can also change the appearance and position of fret numbers, such as showing them as Roman numerals. The options are accompanied by diagrams to help you visualize how they affect the appearance of your music.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing chord diagrams each chord, that is, shapes with the most open strings, easy barré positions, or finger positions closest to the nut. If no chord diagram is available for a chord symbol, an empty chord diagram is shown. TIP ● You can also hide/show chord diagrams by right-clicking players and choosing these options from the context menu. ● You can edit empty chord diagrams to save a new chord diagram shape.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids ● Chord Diagram RESULT The selected chord symbols show only symbols or diagrams. In systems containing both chord symbols and chord diagrams, chord symbols are aligned further from the staff than chord diagrams. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show used chord diagrams grids at the start of flows. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing fingerings in chord diagrams AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the margins of pages, music frames, and/or flow headings if required to accommodate used chord diagrams grids.
Chord diagrams Changing the chord diagram shape EXAMPLE Fingerings hidden Fingerings shown inside dots Fingerings shown at the ends of strings AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the fingerings shown in chord diagrams when editing their shape.
Chord diagrams Changing the chord diagram shape NOTE You can only change the shape of a single chord diagram at a time. 2. 3. Change the shape in any of the following ways: ● To cycle through all the available shapes for the selected chord, press Alt/Opt-Q . ● To open the Choose Chord Diagram dialog and see all the available shapes for the selected chord at once, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Q . Optional: In the Choose Chord Diagram dialog, select the shape you want to use.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes 2 Edit Opens the Edit Chord Diagram dialog, which allows you to edit the shape of chord diagrams, including changing the number of frets shown, stopped fret positions, and the starting fret number. Creating new chord diagram shapes You can create new chord diagram shapes by editing an existing one, for example, if you want an alternative voicing for a chord or to show a barré.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes The Edit Chord Diagram dialog contains the following options and sections: 1 Name Displays the name of the chord whose chord diagram you are editing in the dialog. You cannot change this name. 2 Tuning Displays the fretted instrument and tuning for the current chord diagram.
Chord diagrams Chord diagram font styles 8 Chord diagram shape editor Displays the current arrangement of stopped frets using dots and allows you to change the chord diagram shape. You can move stopped frets by clicking at the required positions. You can change fingerings by double-clicking them and entering a new number. Each string can only have a single stopped fret position. If two or more strings are stopped at the same fret, you can hide/show a barré by clicking any of the dots at that fret position.
Chord diagrams Changing the horizontal position of starting fret numbers RELATED LINKS Edit Font Styles dialog on page 710 Hiding/Showing fingerings in chord diagrams on page 923 Changing the orientation of chord diagrams on page 930 Changing the chord diagram shape on page 924 Edit Chord Diagrams dialog on page 717 Changing the horizontal position of starting fret numbers You can choose whether all starting fret numbers in chord diagrams appear on the right or left of the diagram.
Chord diagrams Changing the orientation of chord diagrams Changing the orientation of chord diagrams You can change the default orientation of all chord diagrams project-wide, for example, if you want them to appear horizontal for educational purposes. By default, chord diagrams appear vertical. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Chord Diagrams. 3. In the Design section, choose one of the following options for Orientation: 4.
Clefs Clefs are symbols shown at the start of every system that give the notes on the staff context; that is, the clef tells you which note of the scale applies to each line or space of the staff. To minimize the number of ledger lines required for notes, different clefs are typically used according to the register of instruments. The common clefs are: ● Treble clef, or G clef, whose spiral shape centers around G, normally the G above middle C.
Clefs Showing clefs after grace notes RELATED LINKS Input methods for clefs and octave lines on page 327 Clefs with octave indicators on page 937 Instrument picker on page 108 Hiding/Showing clefs according to layout transpositions on page 935 Hiding/Showing clefs at the start of systems on page 936 Cautionary key signatures on page 1065 Cautionary time signatures on page 1482 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Showing clefs after grace notes According to convention, clefs are positioned before grace not
Clefs Moving clefs graphically Moving clefs graphically You can move individual clefs graphically without affecting the positions of any other items. PREREQUISITE Note Spacing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the square note spacing handle above the clef you want to move. A circular handle appears beside the clef. 2. Press Tab to select the circular handle. 3.
Clefs Changing the default size of mid-system clef changes Changing the default size of mid-system clef changes You can change the default scale factor of all clef changes that occur partway through systems project-wide, for example, if you want mid-system clef changes to appear larger. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Clefs. 3. Change the value for Clef change scale factor. 4. Click Apply, then Close.
Clefs Hiding/Showing clefs according to layout transpositions RESULT The clefs shown at the selected clef changes in layouts of the corresponding transposition are changed up to the next existing clef change or the end of the flow, whichever comes first. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you want to show the clefs in some layouts but hide them in others, you can hide/show clefs in layouts according to the layout transposition.
Clefs Hiding/Showing clefs at the start of systems RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 493 Concert vs. transposed pitch on page 168 Making layouts transposing/concert pitch on page 167 Signposts on page 448 Input methods for clefs and octave lines on page 327 Instrument picker on page 108 Hiding/Showing clefs at the start of systems By default, clefs are shown at the start of all systems.
Clefs Clefs with octave indicators ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have opened a layout with the required transposition in the music area. For example, if you want to change the octave of clefs in concert pitch, you have opened a concert pitch layout. ● If you want to change the octave of initial clefs, you have input clefs at the start of each flow or overridden the default clefs in the required layouts. PROCEDURE 1.
Clefs Clefs with octave indicators default. However, transposing instruments are always transposed correctly automatically. For example, notes belonging to piccolo instruments are automatically notated an octave lower than their pitch in playback, regardless of whether they have a clef with an octave indicator. You can change whether Dorico Pro respects or ignores clef octave indicators in each flow independently. RELATED LINKS Transposing instruments on page 132 Concert vs.
Octave lines Octave lines indicate where notes are played higher/lower than they appear in the score or part. They are dashed or dotted horizontal lines with an italic numeral at the start. The numeral indicates the number of pitches by which the phrase is changed, such as 8 for one octave and 15 for two octaves. Octave lines that indicate notes are played higher than notated are placed above the staff, while octave lines that indicate notes are played lower than notated are placed below the staff.
Octave lines Project-wide engraving options for octave lines Project-wide engraving options for octave lines You can find options for the project-wide appearance of octave lines on the Octave Lines page in Engraving Options. The options on this page allow you to change the appearance of continuation lines, continuation labels, the numeral at the start of octave lines, the position of octave lines relative to accidentals and noteheads, and their staff-relative placement.
Octave lines Positions of octave lines EXAMPLE An octave line with multiple corners, allowing it to fit better under the slur Resetting the angles of octave lines You can reset the angles and corners of octave lines to return them to a single horizontal line. PREREQUISITE If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes within the octave lines at the positions of the angles/corners you want to reset.
Octave lines Positions of octave lines Changing the alignment of octave line numerals relative to notes You can change whether the left edge, center, or right edge of individual octave line numerals is aligned with the first note to which each octave line applies. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Octave lines Octave lines in Engrave mode 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Notehead ● Accidental RESULT The alignment of the numerals of the selected octave lines is changed. For example, if you choose Accidental, the octave line numerals are aligned with the accidental on the first noteheads to which the octave lines apply. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Octave lines Tucking index properties However, rules for the order and placement of articulations, slurs, tuplets, and octave lines frequently vary, based on their lengths and musical context. Therefore, you can override the automatic order and manually change the order in which they appear in specific contexts. To allow you this flexibility, slurs, octave lines, and tuplets all have Tucking index properties in their respective Properties panel groups.
Cues Cues are passages of music shown in instrumental parts that are played by a different player, usually to help orientate players before entries or solos following a significant passage of rests. Cues can also be used to assist with co-ordination or tuning between players, or to indicate material that the player might be asked to double. In Dorico Pro, you can input correctly formatted cues quickly using the cues popover.
Cues Project-wide engraving options for cues Ties in cues on page 957 Note spacing on page 574 Viewing options for cues on page 961 Signposts on page 448 Project-wide engraving options for cues You can find options for the project-wide appearance, content, and position of cues on the Cues page in Engraving Options. The options on the Cues page allow you to change the size, appearance, placement, and precise position of cues.
Cues Rhythmic cues You can change the default staff positions for rhythmic cues and cues from unpitched percussion source instruments in the Rhythmic Cues and Unpitched Instruments sections of the Cues page in Engraving Options. You can also change the staff position of rhythmic cues and cues from unpitched percussion source instruments individually.
Cues Rhythmic cues PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the labels of the rhythmic cues whose distance from the staff you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Distance in the Cues group. 3. Change the value in the value field.
Cues Hiding/Showing cues in layouts 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The staff position of the selected cues is changed according to the new value. For example, 0 is the middle line of the staff, 4 is the top line of the staff, and -4 is the bottom line of the staff. TIP You can change the default staff position of all cues from unpitched percussion source instruments project-wide on the Cues page in Engraving Options.
Cues Changing the octave of cues ● You can hide/show cue signposts by choosing View > Signposts > Cues. RELATED LINKS Signposts on page 448 Hiding/Showing cues individually You can hide/show individual cues in layouts in which cues are shown. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. However, you cannot show individual cues in layouts where cues are hidden. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Cues Hiding/Showing octave transpositions in cue labels PROCEDURE 1. Select the labels of the cues whose octave you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Octave shift in the Cues group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The octave of the selected cues is changed. For example, 1 shifts cues up one octave, and -1 shifts cues down one octave.
Cues Cue contents TIP You can show/hide octave transpositions in all cue labels project-wide on the Cues page in Engraving Options.
Cues Cue labels Note Spacing Change dialog on page 577 Changing note spacing from rhythmic positions on page 576 Cue labels Cue labels usually indicate the source instrument from which the music is taken, but can also include other information, such as the transposition interval for transposing instruments. This information can help performers identify both where the sound is coming from in the ensemble and the type of sound to listen for.
Cues Cue labels TIP You can also edit cue labels individually. For example, if two instruments are playing in unison, you can edit the cue label that shows the name of one of the instruments to include both instrument names. Editing cue label text You can override the text shown in cue labels individually. For example, if two instruments are playing in unison, you can change the cue label that shows the name of one of the instruments to include both instrument names.
Cues Notations in cues Notations in cues It is beneficial to include musically significant notations from the source instrument in cues, as they can help performers identify the cued music more easily. However, only certain notations are included in cues to avoid overloading performers with too much information.
Cues Stem direction in cues NOTE ● Playing techniques that only indicate important information for the source instrument, such as bowing marks for string players, are not included in cues. ● You can change which notations are included in all cues project-wide on the Cues page in Engraving Options.
Cues Ties in cues NOTE You cannot input multiple cues at the same rhythmic position. However, you can input cues at different rhythmic positions, then move or lengthen/shorten them so they overlap. RELATED LINKS Inputting cues on page 417 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 459 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 431 Changing the stem direction of cues You can override the default stem directions of individual single-voice cues.
Cues Rests in cues RELATED LINKS Changing the shape/angle of ties on page 1471 Rests in cues If cues start/end partway through bars, they are padded with cue-sized rests up to bar boundaries or up to the next played entry, whichever comes first. This ensures it is clear to the player how the rhythm of the cue fits within the time signature and how it relates to their existing material. By default, full-sized bar rests also appear throughout cued passages.
Cues Clef changes in cues EXAMPLE Padding rests shown before/after the selected cue Padding rests hidden before/after the selected cue RELATED LINKS Implicit vs. explicit rests on page 1329 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Hiding/Showing bar rests in cues You can hide/show bar rests alongside all cues in each flow in your project. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-N to open Notation Options. 2. In the Flows list, select the flows in which you want to hide/show bar rests.
Cues Clef changes in cues Clefs required for cues appear immediately before the first note of the new system, to the right of key signatures and time signatures. When there are multiple adjacent cues, clef changes are created as needed: ● If two adjacent cues use the same clef that is different than the clef in the destination instrument, a single clef change appears at the start of the first cue, with a restorative clef at the end of the second cue.
Cues Viewing options for cues ● 4. Transposed clef: Shown if the layout uses transposed pitch Select one of the following clefs from the menu: ● None: Uses the clef of the destination instrument instead of the clef of the source instrument. ● Treble ● Alto ● Tenor ● Bass The same clefs are available for each property. RESULT The clef shown in the selected cues is changed.
Cues Viewing options for cues NOTE Cue highlights only appear in layouts where cues are shown. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Highlight Cues. RESULT Highlights on bars containing cues are hidden/shown. EXAMPLE Cue highlights shown on source staff and destination staff Hiding/Showing cue note colors You can show the material in cues, including notes and rests, in gray to help you identify cues. Cued material cannot be edited directly. Cue note colors are considered annotations and are not printed by default.
Dynamics Dynamics indicate the loudness of the music and can be combined with expressive text to give further clarification about how to perform the music. Dynamics can indicate an immediate change in volume or a gradual change over a specified duration. A phrase with multiple different dynamics You can add modifiers to dynamics that can give stylistic direction context alongside the volume level, such as espressivo, which indicates that a passage is played loudly but also with expressive feeling.
Dynamics Project-wide engraving options for dynamics Force/Intensity of attack These dynamics, such as and , indicate that a note has a stronger attack than is usually expected for the dynamic, similar to an accent articulation. Combined dynamics Combined dynamics, such as or –, specify a sudden change of dynamic. You can create custom combined dynamics in Dorico Pro, and control the intensity of each dynamic in the pair, in the Combined Dynamics section of the Dynamics panel.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics or harp, dynamics are usually placed between the two staves, but can be placed both above and below when each staff requires separate dynamics. In general, dynamics are not placed within the staff, as hairpins in particular become very hard to read. They are also not usually placed within tuplet brackets.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics EXAMPLE A dynamic positioned before the beat A dynamic positioned after the beat RELATED LINKS Erasing the background of dynamics on page 969 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Changing the alignment of dynamics relative to noteheads Immediate dynamics, such as and , are usually horizontally aligned with the optical center of noteheads.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics Aligning dynamics You can graphically align individually selected dynamics in a row without grouping/ungrouping them, for example, if system breaks in part layouts are different to the full score layout and so require parts of different groups of dynamics to be aligned. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics The hairpin ends are not aligned because the barline does not extend beyond the bottom staff You can allow/disallow hairpins across barlines if the hairpin ends on the first note in the next bar. Disallowing hairpins across barlines ensures hairpins appear the same length on all staves. You can also change the minimum distance before hairpins are allowed to extend beyond barlines.
Dynamics Parenthesizing dynamics TIP You can allow/disallow all hairpins project-wide to cross barlines in Engraving Options > Dynamics > Gradual Dynamics > Hairpins > Advanced Options. You can also change the minimum distance before hairpins are allowed to extend beyond barlines in the Horizontal Position section.
Dynamics Erasing the background of dynamics PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the dynamics whose backgrounds you want to erase. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Erase background in the Dynamics group. RESULT The backgrounds of the selected dynamics are erased. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Deactivating Erase background returns the selected dynamics to the default non-erased background.
Dynamics Changing dynamic levels ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. ● Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the dynamics whose erasure padding you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate the Erasure padding properties, individually or together, in the Dynamics group. 3. ● L changes the padding between dynamics and their left edge.
Dynamics Hiding/Showing immediate dynamics TIP You can assign key commands for these options on the Key Commands page in Preferences. RELATED LINKS Input methods for dynamics on page 310 Changing existing items on page 434 Dynamic modifiers on page 975 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 58 Hiding/Showing immediate dynamics You can hide/show individual immediate dynamics such as and , for example, if you only want to show the dynamic modifier, such as “sim.
Dynamics Hiding/Showing combined dynamic separators Hiding/Showing combined dynamic separators You can hide/show different separators in combined dynamics individually, independently of your project-wide setting. For example, if you want to separate some dynamics with slashes. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. By default, only combined dynamics with at least one mezzo dynamic in the pair, such as -, show a separator.
Dynamics Changing the appearance of sforzando/rinforzando dynamics Changing the appearance of sforzando/rinforzando dynamics You can change the appearance of individual and dynamics, independently of your projectwide setting. For example, if you want some dynamics to appear as . You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE These steps do not apply to force/intensity of attack dynamics with other intensities, such as .
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers give different dynamics to each staff for instruments with extra staves. Voice-specific dynamics change the dynamics of each voice in playback independently. NOTE ● You can only input voice-specific dynamics when the caret is active, such as during note input. Voice-specific dynamics apply to the voice indicated by the quarter note symbol beside the caret. ● Voice-specific dynamics only affect playback automatically for sounds that use velocity to control dynamics.
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers Showing consecutive hairpins as continuous on page 981 Adding modifiers to existing dynamics You can add modifiers both before and after dynamics after they have been input, for example, if you want to add “sim.” instead of repeating dynamics across multiple phrases. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers dynamics or sub. dynamics as . You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers only or for all layouts and frame chains. By default, modifiers appear at the start of and either above or below hairpins. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the hairpins whose modifiers you want to show centered inside hairpins.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics Gradual dynamics Gradual dynamics indicate a change in volume that happens incrementally over the specified duration. They usually appear either as hairpins or as text instructions, such as cresc. or dim.. The change in volume indicated by individual hairpins is shown in the distance between the two diverging lines at their apertures. Hairpins typically have a closed end and an open end.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics A hairpin with the start middle handle selected in Engrave mode TIP You can also change the aperture of individual hairpins by activating Hairpin open aperture and/or Hairpin closed aperture in the Dynamics group of the Properties panel. Increasing the value makes the corresponding aperture wider. Decreasing the value makes the corresponding aperture narrower. EXAMPLE A diminuendo that goes across a system break: aperture at the start is open, aperture at the end is closed.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics ● 4. 5. cre - scen - do Optional: Customize the appearance of the selected gradual dynamics in one of the following ways, depending on their Gradual style: ● If you selected Hairpin, activate Hairpin line style and choose one of the available options. ● If you selected cresc./dim., cresc..., or cre - scen - do, activate Diminuendo style and select one of the available options from the menu. ● If you selected cresc...
Dynamics Gradual dynamics 3. Activate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT Consecutive hairpins of the same direction in the selected groups appear as a single continuous hairpin. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change whether or not all consecutive hairpins of the same direction separated by immediate dynamics appear as continuous by default in Engraving Options > Dynamics > Gradual Dynamics > Hairpins.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics RESULT A flared end is shown on the selected dynamics when Flared end is activated, and hidden when it is deactivated. EXAMPLE Crescendo hairpin with flared end hidden Crescendo hairpin with flared end shown RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the size of flared ends on hairpins You can change the height and width of flared ends on individual hairpins. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics RELATED LINKS Project-wide engraving options for dynamics on page 964 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Moving items graphically on page 584 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Adding poco a poco text to gradual dynamics You can add poco a poco text to individual gradual dynamics after they have been input. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics Gradual dynamic spacing Dorico Pro ensures that hairpins can always be clearly distinguished by giving hairpins a minimum default length. However, this can affect note spacing. The default minimum hairpin length is three spaces. When hairpins are shorter than this, they can sometimes be confused with the accent articulation mark.
Dynamics Niente hairpins Gradual dynamics truncated by immediate dynamics A hairpin is automatically truncated if an immediate dynamic is positioned within its range, either before or after the hairpin is input. The hairpin remains tied to its originally designated rhythmic positions, even if graphically it appears shorter. This means that if the immediate dynamic that truncated it is ever deleted, the hairpin extends up to its end or the next immediate dynamic within its range.
Dynamics Niente hairpins Showing consecutive hairpins as continuous on page 981 Changing the appearance of niente hairpins You can show niente hairpins in two ways in Dorico Pro, and you can change how they appear individually, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Dynamics Groups of dynamics Groups of dynamics Groups of dynamics are automatically aligned in a row and can be moved and edited as a group. When you move immediate dynamics within a group, the length of the hairpins on either side automatically adjust to compensate. A group of dynamics The same group of dynamics adjusts to compensate when the middle dynamic moves rhythmically. A single dynamic, either immediate or gradual, is considered a group on its own.
Dynamics Linked dynamics 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Dynamics > Group Dynamics. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT The selected dynamics are grouped together. If the first dynamic in the group is linked to other staves, all dynamics in the group are added to those staves. This applies to all layouts in which the dynamics appear.
Dynamics Linked dynamics Similarly, if you change one linked dynamic, for example, from to , all dynamics linked to the changed dynamic are also changed. If you group other dynamics to one of the linked dynamics, such as a hairpin, the hairpin is added at the same position in all linked staves. If one staff has another immediate dynamic before the end of a hairpin, the hairpin is truncated automatically.
Dynamics Dynamics font styles 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Dynamics > Link. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT The selected dynamics are linked together. If you later change one of the linked dynamics, all linked dynamics are changed to match. This applies to all layouts in which the dynamics appear.
Dynamics Playback Options for dynamics NOTE Changes made to font styles apply to the entire project, including part layouts.
Dynamics Playback Options for dynamics RELATED LINKS Playback Options dialog on page 706 Changing dynamic levels on page 971 Playback techniques on page 799 Sustaining and non-sustaining instruments The volume settings for sustaining instruments and non-sustaining instruments vary in terms of their control of gradual dynamics. Sustaining instruments Sustaining instruments include string, wind, and brass instruments, because they can hold a note while being in control of its volume throughout.
Figured bass Figured bass is a shorthand that uses figures to specify the harmony above the notated bass notes. It is particularly common in Baroque and early Classical music and in the parts of accompanying instruments, such as harpsichords and viols. Figured bass informs performers about the intended harmony but allows room for interpretation, such as improvised arpeggiated phrases using notes from the chord.
Figured bass Project-wide engraving options for figured bass RELATED LINKS Inputting figured bass on page 392 Figured bass hold lines on page 999 Showing figured bass on rests on page 997 Showing single brackets on figured bass on page 998 Changing the staff-relative placement of figured bass on page 1002 Appearance of figured bass on page 1003 Project-wide engraving options for figured bass You can find options for the project-wide appearance and position of figured bass on the Figured Bass page in Engrav
Figured bass Hiding/Showing figured bass in layouts Hiding/Showing figured bass in layouts You can hide/show figured bass in each layout independently and only above the staves of specific players. For example, you can show figured bass in the full score and bass part layouts but hide figured bass in the other part layouts. Any player on whose staff you input figured bass is automatically set to show figured bass in the current layout. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Figured bass Showing figured bass on rests 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Hidden in the Figured Bass group. RESULT The selected figured bass figures are hidden when Hidden is activated, and shown when it is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Signposts are shown at the position of each hidden figure. However, signposts are not printed by default.
Figured bass Showing single brackets on figured bass RELATED LINKS Inputting figured bass on page 392 Showing single brackets on figured bass You can show only a single left or right bracket on individual bracketed figured bass figures. For example, if you want to indicate that all figures between two bracketed figures are optional. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● You have input figured bass figures with brackets.
Figured bass Changing the figured bass bracket style Changing the figured bass bracket style You can change whether all bracketed figures project-wide have round or square brackets. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Figured Bass. 3. In the Design section, choose one of the following options for Bracket style in the Brackets subsection: 4. ● Round brackets ● Square brackets Click Apply, then Close.
Figured bass Positions of figured bass Hiding/Showing figured bass suspension hold lines You can hide/show hold lines between the figures at the start and end of figured bass suspensions individually, independently of your project-wide settings. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Figured bass Positions of figured bass You can move individual figured bass figures to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are positioned by default according to your settings in Engraving Options. This includes Dorico Pro’s kerning, which applies across whole systems to ensure all figures and alterations are legible. You can move figures and hold lines graphically in Engrave mode, but this does not change the rhythmic positions to which they apply.
Figured bass Positions of figured bass RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing figured bass suspension hold lines on page 1000 Changing the staff-relative placement of figured bass You can change the default staff-relative placement of all figured bass figures in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the staff-relative placement of figured bass.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass Changing figured bass accidental collision avoidance You can change the default setting for how Dorico Pro resolves collisions between individual figures in multiple rows of figured bass project-wide. For example, in some published music, figured bass accidentals are offset horizontally to avoid increasing the vertical gap between rows. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Figured Bass. 3.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass Showing figured bass on rests on page 997 Showing single brackets on figured bass on page 998 Simplifying figured bass compound intervals on page 1006 Fixing the current appearance of figured bass on page 1006 Resetting figured bass on page 1007 Changing the font used for figured bass project-wide By default, figured bass is drawn in a bold, Arabic font that is similar in appearance to the numbers in time signatures.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass 2. 3. In the font styles list, select one of the following font styles: ● Figured Bass Font: Used for bold figured bass figures ● Figured Bass Text Font: Used for plain figured bass figures Activate the following options, individually or together, to change the corresponding aspect of the font: ● Font family ● Size ● Style ● Underlined NOTE You must choose a SMuFL-compliant font family for the Figured Bass Font font style. 4.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass Simplifying figured bass compound intervals You can simplify compound intervals in individual figured bass figures, that is, figures 9 and above. Some editions prefer to simplify compound intervals so figures reflect the first octave and appear out of order in the stack. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass RESULT The current appearance of the selected figures is fixed, meaning they are not affected by any future changes to figured bass engraving options. TIP You can assign a key command for Force Current Appearance on the Key Commands page in Preferences. Resetting figured bass You can reset individual figured bass figures, for example, if they were input with the figured bass input setting Follow input literally.
Fingering Fingerings use numbers and letters to recommend which fingers players should use for notes. This can be useful for music aimed at players learning the instrument and for difficult musical passages where certain fingering patterns make the notes much easier to play. Fingerings are often used in keyboard music, as players can use all ten fingers to play notes, and in guitar music, where fingerings are often used alongside fret positions.
Fingering Project-wide engraving options for fingerings bottom staff. However, in dense contrapuntal music for these instruments, fingerings can be placed between the staves to follow the direction of the voices to which they apply. Different conventions apply to fingerings for fretted instruments, as they require fingerings for both the right and left hands.
Fingering Changing fingerings to substitution fingerings PROCEDURE 1. Select the fingerings you want to change to substitution fingerings. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Substitution in the Fingering and Positions group. 3. Enter the fingering you want for the substitution into the value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The selected fingerings are now shown as substitution fingerings.
Fingering Changing existing fingerings NOTE You can only change the position of single substitution fingerings when dragging their handles with the mouse. However, you can change the positions of multiple substitution fingerings with Substitution offset in the Fingering and Positions group of the Properties panel. Deferred substitutions are always shown with horizontal lines, even if you have chosen to show immediate substitutions with slurs.
Fingering Changing the staff-relative placement of fingerings NOTE These steps only apply to non-fretted instruments. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the fingerings whose staff-relative placement you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Fingering Changing the staff-relative placement of fingerings PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● In Write mode, select the notes whose fingerings you want to show inside the staff. ● In Engrave mode, select the fingerings you want to show inside the staff.
Fingering Changing the size of fingerings 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Inside ● Outside RESULT The position of the selected fingerings relative to slurs, octave lines, and tuplet brackets is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. NOTE ● If fingerings also coincide with the first note or last note of slurs, fingerings are positioned outside all of these notations.
Fingering Showing enclosures/underlines on fingerings ● You can change the size of fingerings on grace notes in Engraving Options > Fingering > Design. RELATED LINKS Edit Font Styles dialog on page 710 Fingering font styles on page 1017 Showing enclosures/underlines on fingerings You can show individual fingerings belonging to non-fretted instruments with either a circle enclosure or an underline. NOTE These steps only apply to non-fretted instruments.
Fingering Hiding/Showing fingering RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Engrave toolbox on page 493 String indicators on page 1034 Hiding/Showing fingering You can hide/show fingering in each layout independently. For example, you can show fingering in part layouts but hide fingering in full score layouts as conductors rarely require fingering information. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Fingering Fingering font styles TIP You can assign a key command for Reset Fingering on the Key Commands page in Preferences. RELATED LINKS Large selections on page 424 Assigning key commands on page 61 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Fingering font styles There are different font styles for different types of fingerings. You can change different aspects of these fonts in the Edit Font Styles dialog, such as changing their font size to make fingerings appear larger.
Fingering Fingering font styles appearance of fingering numbers, parentheses, brackets, and open string indicators that appear as zero fingerings. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Fingering. 3. In the Design section, choose one of the following options for Fingering appearance: 4. ● Bold font ● Plain font Click Apply, then Close.
Fingering Cautionary fingerings Cautionary fingerings Cautionary fingerings remind players that fingerings specified at previous rhythmic positions continue to apply to notes that are still sounding. Dorico Pro automatically shows cautionary fingerings when you add other fingerings at rhythmic positions where notes with existing fingerings are still sounding. By default, cautionary fingerings are shown enclosed in parentheses.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments ● Default ● With parentheses ● Without parentheses ● Suppress RESULT The appearance of cautionary fingerings on the selected notes is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default appearance of all cautionary fingerings project-wide in the Alternative, Editorial and Cautionary section of the Fingering page in Engraving Options.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments NOTE In Dorico Pro, we use “pinky” to refer to the smallest finger, but it can also be called “little” or “fifth digit”. Left-hand fingering Left-hand fingerings tell the performer which finger to use to stop the string, which is usually the left hand. In Dorico Pro, left-hand fingerings are placed inside the staff and to the left of the notes to which they apply.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments PROCEDURE 1. Select all the notes for which you want to hide/show brackets for right-hand fingerings. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Vertical position in the Plucked Fingering group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● To hide brackets and show a separate fingering for each selected note, select Above staff or Below staff.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the left-hand fingerings whose position you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments erased backgrounds or not. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE These steps only apply to left-hand fingerings belonging to fretted instruments. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments Adding fingerings to arpeggio signs You can add fingerings to arpeggio signs to indicate which right-hand finger should be used to strum a chord. By default, fingerings are placed at the bottom of arpeggio signs. NOTE These steps only apply to arpeggio signs belonging to fretted instruments. PREREQUISITE ● You have input the arpeggio signs to which you want to add fingerings. ● The lower zone is shown.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments Allowing/Disallowing arpeggio sign fingerings in the staff By default, arpeggio sign fingerings are always shown outside the staff. You can choose to allow them to be shown in the staff when their arpeggio signs end inside the staff. NOTE These steps only apply to arpeggio signs belonging to fretted instruments. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Fingering. 3.
Fingering Fingering slides Fingering slides Fingering slides indicate that the performer should slide their finger up/down the neck of the instrument. They are notated as an angled line between fingerings. The note at the start of a fingering slide is known as a source note. The note at the end of a fingering slide is known as the destination note.
Fingering Fingering slides ● You cannot move fingering slides rhythmically. If you want to change the notes to which fingering slides apply, you must hide them between their original notes and show new fingering slides between the new notes. ● Fingering slides shown only before the destination note have a fixed length, and so do not have handles at the start/end. ● You cannot move whole fingering slides that join notes. You can only move their handles.
Fingering Fingering slides Changing the length of fingering slides You can change the length of individual fingering slides and show them either joining the source and destination fingerings or with a fixed length before the destination note, independently of your project-wide maximum distance threshold. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE These steps only apply to fingerings belonging to fretted instruments.
Fingering Fingerings for valved brass instruments Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Fingerings for valved brass instruments For instruments like trumpet and horn, fingering is used to show which valves must be depressed to produce a specific note. You can enter fingerings for valved brass instruments into the fingerings popover as numbers without any separation.
Fingering Hiding/Showing string fingering shift indicators ● F alto ● E flat alto ● Thumb trigger RESULT Branch indicators are added to the selected fingerings. TIP You can change the appearance of branch indicators in the Brass section of the Fingering page in Engraving Options. Changing the appearance of slide positions for brass instruments You can use Arabic or Roman numerals to indicate slide positions for slide brass instruments, such as trombones.
Fingering Hiding/Showing string fingering shift indicators PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes or fingerings on string instrument staves from which you want to indicate a fingering shift. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Fingering Fingerings imported from MusicXML files PROCEDURE 1. Select the shift indicators whose direction you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Shift direction in the Fingering and Positions group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Up ● Down RESULT The selected shift indicators are angled up/down. NOTE You can also affect the direction of string shift indicators by specifying the strings on which notes are played.
String indicators String indicators are commonly used in guitar music to tell performers the string on which they should play a note, particularly for pitches that are possible on multiple strings. String indicators show the string number inside a circle enclosure, optionally with a dashed line to indicate they apply to a range of notes. Open pitches commonly appear as a zero without an enclosure.
String indicators Project-wide engraving options for string indicators in the Edit Playing Techniques dialog also affects the appearance of string indicators inside the staff for stopped pitches. In Dorico Pro, string indicators inside the staff are considered properties of the corresponding notes. You can only select them independently of their corresponding notes in Engrave mode. NOTE You can only show string indicators inside the staff on notes belonging to fretted instruments.
String indicators Changing the appearance of open string indicators Changing the appearance of open string indicators You can change the appearance of all string indicators for open strings project-wide. By default, string indicators inside the staff for open strings appear as a bold number zero without a circle enclosure, similar to left-hand fingerings. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click String Indicators. 3.
String indicators Deleting string indicators Deleting string indicators You can remove string indicators inside the staff from notes after you have input them. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. However, because string indicators inside the staff are properties of notes rather than separate items, you cannot select and delete them as you would for other items. NOTE These steps only apply to string indicators inside the staff.
String indicators Positions of string indicators You can change the default positions of all string indicators project-wide on the String Indicators page in Engraving Options.
Front matter Front matter in Dorico Pro is a broad term that covers all information included before the first bar of music in scores. Front matter includes musical information often added on pages before the first pages of scores, such as a title page, instrumentation list, program note, and performance instructions. Front matter also includes information above the music on the first page of scores and parts, such as the dedication, title, subtitle, composer, and lyricist.
Front matter Adding player lists PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, open a layout in the music area that uses the page template set containing the page template to which you want to add a dedication. NOTE You can also select the page template set from the Current set menu in the Page Templates section of the Pages panel when any layout is open in the music area. However, this changes the page template set applied to the layout. 2.
Front matter Editing running headers in page templates ● If you want to add a player list into a new text frame, you have input the text frame where you want the player list to appear. PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the text frame to which you want to add a player list to open the text editor. TIP When Frames press Return . is selected in the Engrave toolbox, you can also select text frames and 2. Enter {@playerlist@}. 3. Press Esc or Ctrl/Cmd - Return to close the text editor.
Front matter Editing running headers in page templates NOTE You can also select the page template set from the Current set menu in the Page Templates section of the Pages panel when any layout is open in the music area. However, this changes the page template set applied to the layout. 2. In the Page Templates section of the Pages panel, double-click the page template whose running header text you want to change to open the page template editor. 3.
Grace notes Grace notes are notes without a fixed duration, which are intended to be played quickly. They are scaled-down versions of normal notes, and are commonly shown with a slash through their stem. Grace notes with slashed stems are known as “acciaccaturas” and are often played very fast. Grace notes without slashed stems are known as “appoggiaturas” and are often played slower than acciaccaturas.
Grace notes General placement conventions for grace notes General placement conventions for grace notes Grace notes function like normal notes in many ways, but there are some specific conventions about their stem direction, position relative to noteheads, and the placement of stem slashes. Grace notes are always positioned before a notehead, even if they are intended to be played on the beat rather than before the beat.
Grace notes Turning existing notes into grace notes TIP ● You can change the note spacing scale factor for grace notes in each layout independently on the Note Spacing page in Layout Options. ● You can change the default distance between grace notes and the noteheads to which they apply in Engraving Options > Notes > Grace Notes.
Grace notes Turning grace notes into normal notes Changing the type of grace notes on page 1047 Turning existing notes into tuplets on page 1508 Preferences dialog on page 56 Turning grace notes into normal notes You can turn any existing grace notes into normal notes starting from their original rhythmic position, for example, if you want to turn a run of grace notes at the start of a flow into standard notes in a pick-up bar. PROCEDURE 1.
Grace notes Grace note size 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Grace note before barline in the Grace Notes group. RESULT Grace notes at the selected rhythmic positions are positioned before barlines when the property is activated, and after barlines when the property is deactivated. NOTE This affects all grace notes at the selected rhythmic positions.
Grace notes Grace note slashes ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the grace notes whose type you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, choose one of the following options for Grace note type in the Grace Notes group: ● Slashed stem ● Unslashed stem RESULT The selected grace notes are shown with slashed/unslashed stems.
Grace notes Grace note slashes If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default position of all grace note slashes project-wide in the Grace Notes section of the Notes page in Engraving Options.
Grace notes Grace note stems TIP You can change the default appearance of all grace note slashes project-wide in the Grace Notes section of the Notes page in Engraving Options. Grace note stems Grace notes are scaled-down notes, so the length of grace note stems is determined by your project-wide settings for the stem length of all notes. You can change the default lengths of all stems project-wide in the Stems section of the Notes page in Engraving Options.
Grace notes Grace notes in playback Grace notes in playback Slashed and unslashed grace notes are handled differently in playback. Slashed grace notes of any note duration, and unslashed grace notes a 16th note or shorter, play back before the beat with a single default sounding duration. Unslashed grace notes an eighth note or longer play back on the beat. Their sounding duration is half the note duration of the note to which they are attached.
Holds and pauses Different notations are used to show where the established rhythmic flow of the music is interrupted, either with a moment of repose or a short silence, before continuing. The most subtle effect is produced by a tenuto mark, with more significant effects denoted with holds and pauses. The duration of the break in the music intended by the hold or pause does not need to be specified.
Holds and pauses Project-wide engraving options for holds and pauses Project-wide engraving options for holds and pauses You can find options for the project-wide positions of holds and pauses on the Holds and Pauses page in Engraving Options. The options on the Holds and Pauses page allow you to change the default positions and placement of holds and pauses, including the placement of fermatas in multiple-voice contexts.
Holds and pauses Types of breath marks Style Very short fermata Short fermata Fermata Long fermata Very long fermata Standard Henze N/A N/A RELATED LINKS Input methods for holds and pauses on page 335 Changing existing items on page 434 Changing the vertical position of breath marks on page 1058 Types of breath marks There are different types of breath marks available in Dorico Pro. Breath marks indicate a suitable place for a player to take a breath, or create a musical effect like a breath.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses You can move holds and pauses to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are positioned by default according to your settings in Engraving Options. You can move holds and pauses graphically in Engrave mode; however, this does not change the rhythmic positions to which they are attached.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses Multiple holds and pauses at the same rhythmic position Because fermatas apply to all staves, only one type of fermata can exist at the same rhythmic position. For example, you cannot have a short fermata on one staff and a long fermata at the same rhythmic position on another staff. A Britten curlew can be used at the same rhythmic position as another kind of fermata, but it cannot exist simultaneously with any breath mark.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses 2. In the Properties panel, activate Max. fermatas per staff in the Holds and Pauses group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● One per voice ● One per each side of staff ● One per staff RESULT The number of fermatas shown at the selected positions is changed. TIP You can change the maximum number of fermatas that can appear on a single staff project-wide on the Holds and Pauses page in Engraving Options.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses Changing the vertical position of breath marks You can change the default vertical position of all breath marks project-wide, for example, if you want to place all breath marks immediately above the staff. By default, breath marks are placed halfway between the noteheads on either side. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Holds and Pauses. 3.
Key signatures Key signatures are the markings that show the current key of music by indicating which notes in the scale for that key are sharpened or flattened. They are shown at the start of each system on every applicable staff. Traditionally, accidentals are organized following the pattern of the circle of fifths, which is different for sharp keys and flat keys.
Key signatures Project-wide engraving options for key signatures Transposing instruments on page 132 Concert vs. transposed pitch on page 168 MIDI Import Options dialog on page 85 Project-wide engraving options for key signatures You can find options for the project-wide appearance and spacing of key signatures in Engraving Options. The options on the Key Signatures page allow you to change the key signature cancellation style and the spacing gaps between accidentals in key signatures.
Key signatures Types of key signatures Clef Arrangement of sharps Arrangement of flats Alto Tenor NOTE For custom, non-standard key signatures, you can determine the order in which accidentals appear in the Edit Custom Key Signature dialog.
Key signatures Hiding/Showing key signatures at the start of systems In a C major or A minor key signature, accidentals are spelled based on the context of the major or minor tonality implied. For example, in C major, sharps in general are preferred, whether the music is going up or going down. Similarly, in A minor, G♯ in particular is preferred, whether the music is going up or going down, as G♯ is the leading note in A minor.
Key signatures Hiding/Showing cancellation naturals before key signature changes RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing systemic barlines on single-staff systems on page 835 Hiding/Showing clefs at the start of systems on page 936 Hiding/Showing cancellation naturals before key signature changes You can hide/show cancellation naturals before all key signature changes project-wide. When showing cancellation naturals, you can choose to show them before or after barlines. PROCEDURE 1.
Key signatures Positions of key signatures Examples of key signatures positioned after double barlines You can move key signatures to new rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are positioned according to your settings on the Key Signatures and Spacing Gaps pages in Engraving Options. If you find you need to move individual key signatures graphically, you can do this in Engrave mode, but this does not change their rhythmic positions.
Key signatures Cautionary key signatures ● To move it a moderate amount, press Shift plus the standard key command, for example, Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● To move it a small amount, press Ctrl/Cmd - Shift plus the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . NOTE You cannot move note spacing handles with the mouse, you can only move them using the keyboard. RESULT The key signature is moved graphically to the right/left.
Key signatures Enharmonic equivalent key signatures Enharmonic equivalent key signatures Enharmonic equivalent key signatures are keys with different names that include the same pitches, such as C♯ major and D♭ major. Dorico Pro follows the convention for transposing to keys with the same type of accidental as the previous key, except where the enharmonic equivalent key signature has fewer accidentals.
Key signatures Enharmonic equivalent key signatures Concert vs. transposed pitch on page 168 Transposing instruments on page 132 Allowing/Disallowing enharmonic equivalent key signatures By default, Dorico Pro selects enharmonic equivalent key signatures if they have fewer accidentals when transposing selections that include a key signature and in transposing layouts.
Tonality systems The term “tonality system” is used in Dorico Pro to encompass three crucial elements that together make up the concept of tonality. The three elements that make up tonality systems are: ● A number of equal divisions of the octave, or EDO. For example, standard Western scales with half-step (semitone) steps have 12-EDO. ● A set of accidentals. This allows you to notate how much a note is raised or lowered.
Tonality systems Changing the tonality system Although you can divide the octave into any number of divisions, to be able to show a standard Western key signature, the number of equal divisions in the octave must be divisible by 12. EDO also allows you to map non-conventional Western pitches on to the seven note names A-G, and create a coherent notation to express that, because there is no limit to how you can divide the octave.
Tonality systems Importing tonality systems Importing tonality systems You can import tonality systems into projects, for example, if you want to use a custom tonality system you created on a different computer. Tonality systems are saved as .doricolib files. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, click Panels , then Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals in the Notations toolbox to show the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel. 2.
Lyrics In Dorico Pro, the term “lyrics” is used for all text that is sung by singers. Lyrics for a soprano duet with basso continuo accompaniment Lyrics are organized into lyric lines to ensure consistent horizontal alignment and to make showing verse numbers simple and accurate. There are different types of lyric lines for lyrics with different purposes, and the appearance of lyrics changes depending on their line type.
Lyrics Types of lyrics There are musical examples for many options to demonstrate how they affect the appearance of your music. RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Types of lyrics Lyrics are divided into different lyric types in Dorico Pro. Lyric lines Lyric lines contain normal lyrics and can be shown with verse numbers. They can be both below and above the staff. Chorus lines Chorus lines contain lyrics in an italic font and are placed between lyric lines.
Lyrics Types of syllables in lyrics ● Is translation RESULT ● Activating Chorus changes the selected individual lyrics to chorus lyrics. ● Activating Is translation changes the selected lyrics to translation lyrics of the same lyric line number. For example, selecting lyrics in Line 2 and activating Is translation turns them into translation lyrics for Line 2. ● Activating both properties changes the selected lyrics to translation lyrics of the chorus.
Lyrics Copying and pasting lyrics RELATED LINKS Inputting lyrics on page 389 Lyric hyphens and lyric extender lines on page 1088 Changing the syllable type of existing lyrics You can change the syllable type of lyrics after they have been input. For example, if you advanced the lyrics popover to the next note by pressing Space but you later want it to be followed by a hyphen, you can change its syllable type.
Lyrics Copying and pasting lyrics clipboard to make sure it contains only single spaces and single hyphens for correct syllable input. NOTE You cannot currently copy and paste lyrics containing Chinese, Japanese, or Korean characters. This is planned for future versions. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lyrics/text you want to copy. You can do this within Dorico Pro or externally. NOTE ● If you are copying existing lyrics/text in Dorico Pro, you must be in Write mode.
Lyrics Filters for lyrics NOTE Words/syllables are removed from your clipboard as you paste them. If you want to paste the same lyrics/text into another lyric line or staff, you must copy the source again.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics Translations Selects all translation lyrics in the current selection. RELATED LINKS Filters on page 428 Changing filters to select/deselect on page 430 Large selections on page 424 Selecting lyrics using filters You can use lyric filters to select all lyrics of a specified type across your project or across a specific selection. PREREQUISITE You filter setting is set to Select Only. PROCEDURE 1. In the music area, make a selection that includes all the lyrics you want to select.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics Positions of syllables Lyrics typically coincide with notes. The number of notes sung on syllables or words determines the alignment of lyrics relative to notes: ● Single syllables, which are whole words or parts of longer words that are sung on only one note, are centered on their corresponding note. ● Melismata, which are syllables or words that are sung on more than one note, are leftaligned with the left side of the first note to which they apply.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics EXAMPLE You have three lines of lyrics, but one system does not have a second line of lyrics. On this system, the third line of lyrics is moved upwards, closer to the first line of lyrics. If a subsequent system does not have a first line, but does have the second and third lines, then the second and third lines of lyrics are moved upwards. The second line of lyrics takes the place of the first line.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics ● Right RESULT The alignment of the selected lyrics is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change whether Dorico Pro considers punctuation at the start/end of lyrics when calculating their alignment in Engraving Options > Lyrics > Spacing.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics Changing the staff-relative placement of individual lyrics You can show individual lyrics either above or below the staff, independently of the staff-relative placement of their lyric line. For example, to clarify the lyrics for each part when two voices on the same staff have different rhythms. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics ● Any lyric in each lyric line you want to move vertically. ● The handles on the bottom left of the first lyric on each lyric line you want to move vertically. NOTE When using the mouse, you must only select handles at the start of each lyric line. 2. Move the selected lyric lines upwards/downwards in any of the following ways: ● To move them a standard amount, press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow / Alt/Opt-Down Arrow . This moves lyric lines by 1/4 space per press.
Lyrics Lyrics paragraph styles RELATED LINKS Changing the line number of individual lyrics on page 1090 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the type of individual lyrics on page 1072 Removing lyric line vertical offsets You can remove changes you have made to the vertical offsets of individual lyric lines and reset them to their default positions. PREREQUISITE Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Lyrics Lyrics paragraph styles RELATED LINKS Paragraph Styles dialog on page 712 Types of lyrics on page 1072 Inputting lyrics on page 389 Showing lyrics in italics You can show individual lyrics in an italic font without changing their paragraph style, lyric type, or staff-relative placement. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Lyrics Lyric text editing ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lyrics whose paragraph style you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Paragraph in the Lyrics group. 3. Select a paragraph style from the menu.
Lyrics Lyric text editing 4. Optional: If you want to change other existing lyrics, advance the popover in one of the following ways: ● To advance the popover to the next note if you entered a complete word, or the final syllable in a multi-syllabic word, press Space . Existing lyrics are automatically selected in the popover when you press Space . ● To advance the popover to the next note if you entered one syllable of a multi-syllabic word, press - .
Lyrics Lyric text editing NOTE You cannot add, delete, or change the duration/rhythmic position of lyrics, such as the number of notes to which each lyric applies. 2 Zoom controls Allow you to increase/decrease the size of text in the dialog. 3 Current number of lyrics Displays the number of lyrics currently shown in the text editor and the target number of lyrics in the lyric line. The target number is the number of lyrics that already exists in the selected lyric line in the flow.
Lyrics Lyric hyphens and lyric extender lines Lyric hyphens and lyric extender lines Lyric hyphens indicate that individual lyrics are syllables within multi-syllabic words, for example, “Hal-le-lu-jah”. Lyric extender lines indicate that individual lyrics, either whole words or the last syllables in multi-syllabic words, extend across multiple notes.
Lyrics Lyric line numbers Lyric line numbers Lyric line numbers are used to organize lyrics when a single musical passage can have different lyrics sung to it, such as music that contains multiple verses. In Dorico Pro, you can specify the line number of lyrics as you input them and by changing the line number of existing lyrics.
Lyrics Lyric line numbers TIP You can also make a selection and use the lyric filters to select different lyric lines according to their line numbers. 2. Change the line number and/or type of the selected lyric line in one of the following ways: ● Choose Edit > Notations > Lyrics > Line > [Line number]. ● Choose Edit > Notations > Lyrics > Line > Chorus. ● Choose Edit > Notations > Lyrics > Translations > [Line number Translation].
Lyrics Verse numbers NOTE The position of the selected lyrics relative to other lyric lines might be changed. For example, if there were two lyric lines and you changed lyrics in Line 1 to Line 3, they now appear below Line 2. Verse numbers Verse numbers indicate the order in which lyrics are sung when multiple lines of lyrics share the same musical passage. They are commonly used in hymns and song sheets. Depending on the type of music you are writing, verse numbers might not be appropriate.
Lyrics East Asian elision slurs Changing the punctuation of verse numbers You can show all verse numbers project-wide with or without a period. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Lyrics. 3. In the Verse Numbers section, choose one of the following options for Punctuation for verse numbers: 4. ● Append period (full stop) ● Do not append period (full stop) Click Apply, then Close.
Lyrics East Asian elision slurs RESULT East Asian elision slurs are shown on the selected lyrics when the checkbox is activated, and hidden when the checkbox is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. When the property is deactivated, lyrics follow your project-wide setting. TIP You can choose to hide/show East Asian elision slurs on all applicable lyrics project-wide on the Lyrics page in Engraving Options.
Notes Notes are shapes that are positioned on staves to indicate musical pitches. Notes are most commonly shown with oval-shaped, round noteheads that are either filled or void depending on their duration, but there are many different designs of noteheads that you can use. Depending on their duration, notes can have stems that help indicate their duration.
Notes Notehead sets ● A wider white notehead for whole notes (semibreves) ● A wider white notehead with one or two vertical strokes on either side, or a square white notehead, for double whole notes (breves) Pitch-dependent notehead sets contain noteheads that vary according to the pitch of notes rather than their duration. ● In pitched notehead sets, there are different noteheads for different pitches.
Notes Notehead sets Notehead set design Notehead set name Default Noteheads Large Circled Noteheads Circled Noteheads Slashed Noteheads (Bottom Left to Top Right) Slashed Noteheads (Top Left to Bottom Right) Cross noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Circle X Noteheads Large X and Diamond Noteheads Ornate X Noteheads Plus Noteheads With X Noteheads 1096 Dorico Pro 4.1.
Notes Notehead sets Notehead set design Notehead set name X Noteheads X and Circle X Noteheads X and Diamond Noteheads Triangular noteheads Notehead set name Notehead set design Large Arrow Down Noteheads Large Arrow Up Noteheads Triangle Down Noteheads Triangle Left Noteheads Triangle Right Noteheads Triangle Up Noteheads 1097 Dorico Pro 4.1.
Notes Notehead sets Diamond noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Diamond Noteheads Old-Style Diamond Noteheads White Diamond Noteheads Wide Diamond Noteheads Slash noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Muted Slash Noteheads Oversized Slash Noteheads Slash Noteheads Small Slash Noteheads Round and square noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Moon Noteheads 1098 Dorico Pro 4.1.
Notes Notehead sets Notehead set design Notehead set name Rectangular Noteheads Round White with Dot Noteheads RELATED LINKS Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads on page 1100 Hiding stems on page 1125 Custom notehead sets on page 731 Creating custom notehead sets on page 737 Creating custom noteheads on page 738 Pitch-dependent notehead set designs Pitch-dependent notehead sets use different notehead designs or different notehead colors depending on the pitch of notes.
Notes Notehead sets Pitched noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Figurenotes© Noteheads Pitch Name Noteheads RELATED LINKS Notehead sets on page 1094 Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads on page 1100 Showing differently shaped noteheads for each scale degree project-wide on page 1102 Showing note names in noteheads project-wide on page 1102 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Custom notehead sets on page 731 Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads You can change
Notes Notehead sets RESULT The notehead design of the selected notes is changed. TIP ● You can also change the notehead design for all noteheads project-wide. ● You can assign a key command for each factory default notehead design and custom notehead designs that you have saved as default on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Notes Notehead sets Showing differently shaped noteheads for each scale degree project-wide You can show each degree of the scale with a different notehead design project-wide. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Notes. 3.
Notes Changing the width of ledger lines Staff size on page 639 Changing the default staff size on page 616 Changing the width of ledger lines You can change the width of ledger lines on individual notes, for example, to allow notes with short durations to be spaced more tightly and still be legible. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Notes Rhythm dot consolidation ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the noteheads whose ledger lines you want to hide/show. NOTE If you want to hide ledger lines, you must also select all other noteheads in the same voice and voice column index. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Hide ledger lines in the Notes and Rests group of the Properties panel.
Notes Rhythm dot consolidation Rhythm dot consolidation on unison notes One rhythm dot shown per notehead in unisons Rhythm dots shown for each notehead for unisons on lines, but only one shown per unison in spaces Only one rhythm dot shown per unison TIP You can also change how rhythm dots in multiple voices are consolidated individually.
Notes Assigning notes to strings RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Allowing/Disallowing noteheads in opposing voices to overlap on page 1540 Moving rhythm dots You can move rhythm dots horizontally. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Notes Hiding/Showing colors for notes out of range PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose assigned string you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE If selecting multiple notes at once, select notes only in staves of the same instrument type. For example, select multiple Cs in Violin 1 and Violin 2 staves. 2. In the Properties panel, activate String in the Notes and Rests group. 3. Select the string you want from the menu.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Notes that are considered challenging are shown in a darker red, while notes that are impossible or virtually impossible are shown in a bright red. NOTE Notes out of the fret range of the corresponding string on tablature are always shown as question marks, even if you do not show colors for notes out of range. EXAMPLE Colors for notes out of range shown. Three notes in the middle of the phrase are bright red, while the rest are the darker red.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Round notehead brackets Round notehead brackets have a similar appearance to slurs, but vertical. By default, round brackets on single noteheads use the font glyph on notation staves and the drawn curve on tablature. In Engrave mode, round notehead brackets that use the drawn curve have handles that allow you to change their shape. Round notehead brackets that use the font glyph do not have handles in Engrave mode.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Project-wide engraving options for bracketed noteheads You can find options for the project-wide appearance and position of notehead brackets on the Bracketed Noteheads page in Engraving Options. The options on the Bracketed Noteheads page allow you to change the default gaps between round and square notehead brackets and noteheads, the thickness and shape of notehead brackets, and the appearance of round brackets on both notation staves and tablature.
Notes Bracketed noteheads 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Round ● Square RESULT The corresponding type of notehead brackets is shown on the selected notes. If you only selected notes on tablature, brackets are not shown on the corresponding notes on the notation staff, and vice versa. In Write mode, only the first noteheads in tie chains are bracketed. In Engrave mode, only the selected noteheads are bracketed, including in tie chains.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Showing brackets around one/all noteheads in tie chains You can change whether brackets appear only on the first notehead in tie chains or span the entire duration of the tie chain, that is, with the left bracket on the first notehead and the right bracket on the last notehead in the tie chain. By default, brackets appear only on the first notehead in tie chains. PREREQUISITE ● You have shown brackets on the required notes. ● The lower zone is shown.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Brackets around only the first chord in a tie chain, with automatic brackets shown on the second chord on tablature Brackets around the start and end of the whole tie chain on tablature RELATED LINKS Ties on page 1459 Showing single brackets on figured bass on page 998 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Splitting brackets on chords You can split brackets on any notehead within a chord.
Notes Bracketed noteheads EXAMPLE Chord with single round bracket Chord with split round bracket RELATED LINKS Inputting chords on page 248 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Parenthesized chord symbols on page 911 Changing the appearance of round brackets on single noteheads You can change whether round brackets on single noteheads are drawn using the font glyph or drawn curve.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Notehead brackets in Engrave mode In Engrave mode, each round notehead bracket has multiple handles that you can move independently to adjust their graphical position, length, and shape. Round notehead brackets that use the drawn curve have three square handles that you can move independently. When you move either of the top/bottom handles, the middle handle also moves to retain its position relative to the start/end handles.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Changing the shape of round notehead brackets You can change the shape of individual round notehead brackets, for example, if you want some notehead brackets to appear wider or to change their curvature, so that their endpoints approach noteheads at a sharper angle. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Notes Bracketed noteheads TIP The following properties in the Bracketed Noteheads group of the Properties panel are activated automatically when you move the middle handle of notehead brackets. ● L round br. middle moves left notehead bracket middle handles. X moves them horizontally, changing the width of notehead brackets, and Y moves them vertically, changing the curvature of notehead brackets. ● R round br. middle moves right notehead bracket middle handles.
Stems Stems are vertical lines that extend from noteheads that are a half note or shorter in duration. In combination with notehead design, they allow the duration of each note to be clearly identified. For example, quarter notes (crotchets) and eighth notes (quavers) both have solid black noteheads and stems, but eighth notes also have flags on their stems. 16th notes have two flags, 32nd notes have three flags, and so on.
Stems Stem direction RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Project-wide engraving options for tremolos on page 1498 Stem direction In Dorico Pro, the stem direction of notes and chords follows rules that are based on the conventions of music engraving. Stem direction is determined automatically, but you can manually change the stem direction of individual notes, chords, or of an entire voice. The rules that are applied depend on the following: ● How many voices are active on the staff.
Stems Stem direction notes in down-stem voices have down stems. This applies even when the stems of notes would normally point in the other direction, based on their position on the staff. NOTE The order in which notes appear between different up-stem voices and different down-stem voices depends on their pitch and your settings on the Voices page in Notation Options. You can also change the voice column index of notes individually.
Stems Stem direction ● If the majority of notes in the beam group are above the middle line, stems in the beam group point downwards. ● If the majority of notes in the beam group are below the middle line, stems in the beam group point upwards. ● If the beam group contains an equal number of notes either side of the middle line of the staff, the stem direction is determined by the stem directions of any adjacent notes, beam groups, or chords.
Stems Stem direction Changing the stem direction of notes You can manually change the stem direction of any note. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose stem direction you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE 2.
Stems Stem direction Changing the staff-relative placement of items on page 436 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Changing the default stem direction of voices You can change the default stem direction of voices after they have been input, including slash voices. NOTE This changes the implicit stem direction of the voice, but may not change the stem direction of all notes in single-voice contexts.
Stems Stem length NOTE Alternatively, you can change the stem direction to the opposite direction. However, notes with forced stems do not change automatically if, for example, you later change their pitch. Stem length The length of stems is determined by default in Dorico Pro, according to accepted standards for the appearance of stems of notes at different positions on staves.
Stems Hiding stems You can also use this property to lengthen/shorten stems by changing the value in the value field. However, the Notes and Rests group is only available when the notehead is selected rather than the stem. Deactivating the property resets the selected stems to their default length. ● You can change the default length of all stems project-wide in the Stems section of the Notes page in Engraving Options. There are different options for stems in different contexts.
Stems Erasing the background of stems Erasing the background of stems You can erase the backgrounds of all stems project-wide, for example, to ensure hairpins remain legible when appearing close to the staff in tightly spaced scores. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Notes. 3. In the Stems section, activate/deactivate Erase background behind stems with erasure of width [n] spaces. 4. Optional: Change the value in the value field. 5.
Harmonics Harmonics are pitches produced by touching resonating strings at specific positions along their length, allowing the corresponding harmonic partial to sound. Harmonics often have a high pitch with a glassy, purer sound than stopped pitches. There are two different types of harmonics: natural and artificial. Harmonic partials are numbered according to their order in the harmonic series, which also correlates to the node on the string which produces them.
Harmonics Turning notes into harmonics Turning notes into harmonics You can turn existing notes into artificial and natural harmonics. Harmonics can represent the sounding, touched, or stopped pitch. PREREQUISITE ● You have input the notes you want to turn into harmonics. However, the pitch you should input depends on the style/appearance you want to use. ● For natural harmonics, we recommend that you input the desired sounding pitch.
Harmonics Changing the harmonic partial Artificial Artificial harmonic on harmonic on notation staff tablature (any instrument) Natural harmonic on non-fretted instrument staff Natural harmonic on fretted instrument notation staff Natural harmonic on tablature Natural harmonic on tablature that cannot be calculated AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the partial for harmonics. You can also change the appearance of natural harmonics and the type of artificial harmonics.
Harmonics Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing harmonic accidentals RESULT The partial of the selected harmonics is changed. For artificial harmonics using the Normal type, the pitch of the white diamond notehead/parenthesized fret number is updated automatically. The sounding pitch of artificial harmonics in playback is also changed accordingly.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics ● Square brackets RESULT Accidentals on the selected harmonics are hidden, shown, or shown in round or square brackets. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. NOTE ● Hiding accidentals does not affect the pitch of notes in playback. ● If you are hiding/showing many accidentals, we recommend that you consider changing the accidental duration rule.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics White diamond notehead Changes the notehead of notes to a diamond notehead that is always unfilled, regardless of the duration of notes. Usually indicates the touched pitch required. On tablature, the touched fret is always shown for natural harmonics, regardless of the selected appearance. If the touched fret cannot be calculated, a pink question mark is shown.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics Pinch harmonic on notation staff Pinch harmonic on tablature Single notehead (sounding) Shows a single notehead indicating the sounding pitch. On tablature, the stopped fret is shown on the left and the sounding pitch is shown on the right in parentheses. Single notehead (sounding) artificial harmonic on notation staff Single notehead (sounding) artificial harmonic on tablature Single notehead (stopped) Shows a single notehead indicating the stopped pitch.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the natural harmonics whose appearance you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Style in the Harmonics group. 3.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics PROCEDURE 1. Select the artificial harmonics whose style you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Style in the Harmonics group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Normal ● Pinch ● Single notehead (sounding) ● Single notehead (stopped) RESULT The style of the selected artificial harmonics is changed.
Ornaments Ornaments are markings that indicate multiple notes are played in addition to the notated pitch. They are used to decorate music, such as in Baroque music, which is highly decorated with trills and other ornaments. Over time, specific ways of notating how performers should play notes have developed and different ornament symbols indicate different patterns of decorative notes. Nonetheless, ornaments give some freedom to performers to embellish music in their own way.
Ornaments Changing ornament intervals Changing ornament intervals You can change the intervals of ornaments, both above and below the notated pitch, to indicate which pitches are played in the ornament. The intervals of ornaments are indicated by accidentals. For some ornaments, you can only change the interval in one direction. For example, you can only change the interval above short trills and below mordents. NOTE These steps do not apply to trills. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Ornaments Positions of ornaments RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 493 Trill intervals on page 1143 Changing vibrato bar dip intervals on page 1190 Positions of ornaments Ornaments, including trills, are placed above the notes to which they apply. They are only placed below the staff for down-stem voices in multiple-voice contexts. Ornaments and trills are positioned outside of slurs by default. Similarly, they are positioned further from noteheads than articulations.
Ornaments Positions of ornaments 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Inside ● Outside RESULT The selected ornaments are positioned either inside or outside of slurs. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Changing the start position of trills You can change whether the start position of individual trills is aligned with the notehead or with its accidental, independently of your project-wide setting.
Trills Trills are fast alternations between two notes, similar to a tremolo, that were a common decoration in Baroque, Classical, and Romantic music. Trill marks are usually added to a single note, to indicate the performed notes are the notated pitch and the note either a half-step or whole step above, and can have extension lines to show the duration of the trill.
Trills Changing the speed of trills ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose trill marks you want to hide/show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show trill mark in the Trills group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox.
Trills Hiding/Showing speed changes in trill extension lines If only Start speed is activated, the speed of the whole trill extension line is changed. If only End speed is activated, the speed of the end half of the trill extension line is changed. EXAMPLE A trill extension line starting slow and ending fast Trill with normal speed throughout AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can customize the playback speed of trills individually.
Trills Trill intervals PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose extension lines you want to hide/show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Has trill line in the Trills group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT Trill extension lines are shown when the checkbox is activated, and hidden when the checkbox is deactivated.
Trills Trill intervals Trills and accidentals If required, Dorico Pro shows accidentals to clarify trill intervals. Dorico Pro also automatically shows accidentals on other notes in the bar if they have different accidentals to any upper notes of trills. By default, trill marks themselves show intervals, unless the upper note is modified by an accidental in the key signature. If the upper note has been modified by an accidental earlier in the bar, trills always show the interval.
Trills Trill intervals NOTE For trills that span multiple notes and have multiple trill interval accidentals, you must select each accidental or signpost individually. If you select the whole trill, only the first trill interval accidental is changed. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Accidental in the Trills group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Hide ● Show RESULT Accidentals in the selected trill intervals are hidden when you choose Hide, and shown when you choose Show.
Trills Trill intervals NOTE For trills that span multiple notes and have multiple interval changes, you must select each trill interval you want to change individually. If you select the trill mark/extension line, only the first trill interval is changed. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Interval in the Trills group. 3. Change the interval degree, expressed as the number of staff position steps, by changing the value in the value field. 4.
Trills Trill intervals NOTE You can only change trill intervals at noteheads. 4. Open the ornaments popover in any of the following ways: ● Press Shift-O . ● In the Notations toolbox, click Popovers , then Ornaments . 5. Enter the trill interval you want into the popover. For example, enter m3 for a minor third. 6. Press Return to close the popover. 7. Optional: Repeat steps 3 to 6 to change the trill interval at other noteheads in the trill. 8.
Trills Trill intervals PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills, trill intervals, or trill interval signposts whose interval you want to reset. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode, but in Engrave mode, you must select the trill intervals/trill interval signposts. NOTE For trills that span multiple notes and have multiple interval changes, you must select each trill interval you want to reset individually. If you select the trill mark/extension line, only the first trill interval change is reset. 2.
Trills Trill intervals Auxiliary note Indicates the trill interval using a small, parenthesized, stemless notehead shown in the staff immediately to the right of the first note to which the trill applies, and at the correct staff position for the trilled-to pitch. Auxiliary notes are used for all trill intervals that are not a major or minor second, but are automatically hidden for unison trills if the notehead design of the auxiliary note has not been overridden.
Trills Trill intervals ● Auxiliary note RESULT The appearance of the selected trill intervals on notation staves is changed. This does not affect their appearance on tablature. TIP You can change the default appearance of all trills with a second interval project-wide in the Trill Intervals section of the Ornaments page in Engraving Options. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the notehead design of individual auxiliary notes, for example, to show that the trilled-to note is a harmonic.
Trills Trills in playback RESULT The position of interval indicators relative to the selected trill marks is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default position of interval indicators relative to all trill marks project-wide in the Trill Intervals section of the Ornaments page in Engraving Options.
Trills Trills in playback change the playback speed of individual trills. Additionally, you can hide trill speed changes in trill extension lines whilst retaining the speed changes in playback. In contemporary performance practice, trills are usually performed starting on the written note, while in the historical performance practice of the Baroque and Classical eras, trills are usually performed starting on the upper (trilled-to) note.
Trills Trills in playback 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Sampled trills are enabled when you choose Use samples if possible, and disabled when you choose Generated trills only.
Trills Trills in playback Changing the starting pitch of trills By default in Dorico Pro, trills start on the lower note, which is usually the written note. However, the accepted practice in Baroque and Classical music is to start trills on the upper note. You can change the starting pitch of trills individually. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggio signs are vertical lines that indicate chords are to be played arpeggiated, or “spread”, so that the notes in the chord are played very quickly one after another. Arpeggio signs are normally shown as vertical wavy lines. Arpeggiated chords can be played in two directions: ● Upwards, starting from the bottom note in the chord. ● Downwards, starting from the top note in the chord.
Arpeggio signs Types of arpeggio signs Types of arpeggio signs There are different types of arpeggio signs to convey the different arpeggiation directions and techniques. Up arpeggio A vertical wavy line that indicates chords are to be arpeggiated from the bottom note upwards. Down arpeggio A vertical wavy line that indicates chords are to be arpeggiated from the top note downwards.
Arpeggio signs Types of arpeggio signs Changing the type of arpeggio signs You can change the type of arpeggio signs after they have been input. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the arpeggio signs whose type you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Arpeggio signs Length of arpeggio signs ● Nothing ● Arrow ● Swash RESULT The appearance of the ends of the selected arpeggio signs is changed. TIP You can change the default appearance of the ends of all arpeggio signs project-wide on the Arpeggio Signs page in Engraving Options.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggios in playback Arpeggio signs should cover the whole vertical range of all notes in the chord to which they apply, and protrude slightly at each end. However, they do not need to cover the stems of notes. Dorico Pro automatically creates the lengths of arpeggio signs to cover the notes in chords, and adjusts their lengths if the notes in chords change or are deleted. If an arpeggiated chord spans two staves, such as in a piano part, its arpeggio sign can extend across both staves.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggios in playback You can set a default arpeggio length for wiggly arpeggio signs and curved arpeggio signs separately, expressed as a fraction of a quarter note (crotchet) at 120 bpm. It can be helpful to set arpeggio lengths using this measurement instead of defining arpeggios as a fraction of their notated rhythm, as otherwise arpeggios in very slow music would play back much slower than most people intend.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggios in playback EXAMPLE Arpeggio starting on the beat Arpeggio ending on the beat RELATED LINKS Playback Options dialog on page 706 Changing the playback duration of arpeggios You can change the duration of individual arpeggios in playback, independently of your projectwide settings. The duration of arpeggios is expressed as a fraction of the notated rhythm of chords.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggios in playback EXAMPLE Arpeggiated chord with a note offset value of 1/8 1162 Dorico Pro 4.1.
Glissando lines Glissando lines indicate a continuous transition between two notes, which can be smooth or in chromatic steps. They can have straight lines or wiggly lines, and can be shown with a text indication or as a line without text. Because glissando lines are positioned between noteheads, the steepness of their angle reflects the interval between the notes: the steeper the angle, the greater the interval. There are different conventions regarding the playing techniques for glissando and portamento.
Glissando lines Project-wide engraving options for glissando lines Project-wide engraving options for glissando lines You can find options for the project-wide appearance and position of glissando lines on the Glissando Lines page in Engraving Options. The options on the Glissando Lines page allow you to change the style, appearance, and thickness of glissando lines. You can also set precise positions for the endpoints of glissando lines relative to noteheads.
Glissando lines Changing glissando line text PROCEDURE 1. Select the glissando lines whose style you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Glissando style in the Glissando Lines group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Straight line ● Wiggly line RESULT The glissando line style is changed for the selected glissando lines. TIP ● Deactivating Glissando style returns the selected glissando lines to the default style.
Glissando lines Changing glissando line text ● No text RESULT The text shown on the selected glissando lines is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the text shown on all glissando lines project-wide on the Glissando Lines page in Engraving Options.
Glissando lines Glissando lines in Engrave mode When Always show is chosen, glissando line text is always shown, even if the glissando line is short. However, this can cause the glissando line text to collide with other items, such as noteheads and stems. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Glissando lines Glissando lines in playback Glissando lines in playback Glissando lines are reflected in playback using a sequence of notes, all a small interval apart, between the start and end notes for each glissando. Glissandos belonging to harps consider the current harp pedaling when determining the pitches to use in playback. Glissandos for all other instruments use the 12-EDO chromatic scale, regardless of the current tonality system.
Guitar bends The guitar bend is a technique commonly performed on electric guitars, where the performer pushes strings out of their normal alignment after notes start to sound. Bending strings tightens them, which produces the characteristic pitch fluctuation. Performing a guitar bend often also involves sustaining the bent pitch before allowing the string to return to its natural position and un-bent pitch. In Dorico Pro, these actions are called a “guitar bend hold” and “release” respectively.
Guitar bends Guitar bends on chord on notation staff Guitar bends on chord on tablature Sequences of consecutive guitar bends are notated as bend runs on tablature. In Engrave mode, guitar bend runs function as a group. Guitar bend runs on tablature Guitar bend holds Guitar bend holds indicate that the performer should maintain the pitch at the peak of a guitar bend. They are usually shown on tied notes. On tablature, guitar bend holds are notated using a horizontal line.
Guitar bends If you input releases on multiple notes in chords, they are notated with a single downwards-pointing curved line on tablature. If the bend intervals are the same for all notes, the end pitches are parenthesized together. Releases on chord on notation staff Releases on chord on tablature NOTE ● In addition to guitar bends, Dorico Pro supports guitar pre-bends/pre-dives, guitar postbends, vibrato bar dives and returns, and other guitar techniques.
Guitar bends Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives are techniques commonly performed on electric guitars, where the performer changes the initial sounding pitch of strings before playing notes, either by bending strings to tighten them or using the vibrato bar to loosen them.
Guitar bends Guitar post-bends Guitar pre-dive on notation staff Guitar pre-dive on tablature NOTE ● You can change the appearance of multiple consecutive guitar pre-bends/pre-dives on the Guitar Bends page in Engraving Options. Subsequent notes with guitar pre-bends/predives are known as “re-strikes”. ● By default, stems, stem flags, and beaming appear stem-up on tablature in single-voice contexts, which means they can collide with guitar bends, pre-bends/pre-dives, and dives and returns.
Guitar bends Vibrato bar dives and returns Microtonal post-bend on notation staff Microtonal post-bend on tablature If you input guitar post-bends on multiple notes in chords, their arrowheads are automatically aligned. On notation staves, the appropriate number of curved lines is shown according to the staff positions of notes in chords. Guitar post-bends on chord on notation staff Guitar post-bends on chord on tablature NOTE Guitar post-bends are not currently reflected in playback.
Guitar bends Bend intervals Vibrato bar dive and return on notation staff Vibrato bar dive and return on tablature Sequences of consecutive vibrato bar bends on notes with the same pitch direction, such as E-D-C, are notated on tablature with an additional line protrusion beyond the staff and bend interval for each vibrato bar bend.
Guitar bends Project-wide engraving options for guitar bends, pre-bends, post-bends, and vibrato bar dives and returns Bend intervals for guitar pre-dives and vibrato bar dives and returns always appear as numbers/ fractions, such as 1 for a whole step vibrato bar dive and return. Microtonal bend intervals appear as fractions according to the prevailing tonality system, such as 3/4. Bend intervals for microtonal post-bends appear as 1/4.
Guitar bends Hiding/Showing guitar bend hold lines RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Guitar techniques on page 1185 Hiding/Showing guitar bend hold lines Guitar bend hold lines indicate that the bend should be held for the duration of the note, which is usually a tied note. You can hide/show hold lines on guitar bends on tablature. NOTE These steps only apply to guitar bends. You cannot show hold lines on pre-bends or releases. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Guitar bends Hiding/Showing accidentals on guitar pre-bends/pre-dives pre-bends/pre-dives are positioned on the notehead-side of notes in single-voice contexts. In multiple-voice contexts, they are positioned on the stem-side of notes. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Guitar bends Deleting guitar pre-bends, pre-dives, and post-bends PROCEDURE 1. Select the guitar pre-bends/pre-dives whose accidentals you want to hide/show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Pre-bend accidental in the Guitar Pre-bends group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Hide ● Show RESULT Accidentals on the selected guitar pre-bends are hidden when you choose Hide, and shown when you choose Show.
Guitar bends Guitar bends in Engrave mode Guitar bend handles on notation staff in Engrave mode Guitar bends and holds On tablature, guitar bends and holds have the following handles: 1 Guitar bend start handle 2 Guitar bend middle handle 3 Guitar bend end handle 4 Bend interval handle 5 Hold start handle 6 Hold end handle Releases On tablature, releases have the following handles: 1 Release start handle 2 Release middle handle 3 Release end handle You can move these handles to change
Guitar bends Guitar bends in Engrave mode If guitar bends cross system and frame breaks, you can move the guitar bend segment on each side of the break independently. NOTE ● Adjoining guitar bends, such as guitar bend runs or a guitar bend that ends on the same note that a return starts on, function as a group. When using the mouse, moving any guitar bend in the group upwards/downwards moves all the others.
Guitar bends Guitar bends in Engrave mode On tablature, guitar pre-bends/pre-dives have the following handles: Guitar pre-bend handles Guitar pre-dive handles 1 Bend interval handle 2 Guitar pre-bend/pre-dive end handle 3 Guitar pre-bend/pre-dive start handle You can move these handles to change the shape of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives on notation staves, change the graphical length and angle of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives on tablature, and move bend intervals.
Guitar bends Guitar bends in Engrave mode 1 Guitar post-bend start handle 2 Guitar post-bend middle handle 3 Guitar post-bend end handle 4 Bend interval handle You can move these handles to change the shape of guitar post-bends and move bend intervals. When you move guitar post-bend end handles, the bend interval also moves to retain its position relative to the end handle.
Guitar bends Guitar bends in Engrave mode 1 Vibrato bar dive start handle 2 Vibrato bar dive end handle/Vibrato bar return start handle 3 Vibrato bar return end handle 4 Bend interval handle You can move these handles to change the shape or angle of vibrato bar dives and returns and move bend intervals. When you move the vibrato bar dive end handle/vibrato bar return start handle with the mouse, both handles move together.
Guitar techniques The term “guitar techniques” covers a range of techniques typically associated with guitar music, such as hammer-ons, pull-offs, and pitch alterations that use the vibrato bar on electric guitars.
Guitar techniques Tapping notation staves and tablature and are placed above the staff. You can change the staff-relative placement of individual vibrato bar dips. Vibrato bar indications/lines Vibrato bar indications are text instructions that indicate that the performer should use the vibrato bar. When they apply to a range of notes, they typically show dashed lines. In Dorico Pro, vibrato bar indications/lines are considered playing techniques. They show lines when they have duration.
Guitar techniques Tapping A phrase containing right-hand and left-hand tapping By default, tapping indications only appear on notation staves and are placed above the staff. You can change the staff-relative placement of individual tapping indications. You can also hide/ show guitar techniques, including tapping indications, on notation staves only, tablature only, or both. In Dorico Pro, tapping indications are considered properties of notes.
Guitar techniques Hammer-ons and pull-offs Moving items graphically on page 584 Fingerings for fretted instruments on page 1020 Hammer-ons and pull-offs Hammer-ons and pull-offs involve performers tapping or plucking the strings of fretted instruments with their left hand strongly enough that the corresponding pitch sounds without additional striking, producing a legato effect. Ligados are a combination of at least one hammeron and one pull-off in a single phrase.
Guitar techniques Project-wide engraving options for guitar techniques Pull-off on notation staff Pull-off on tablature Ligados Ligados specify that the performer should both hammer on and pull off notes within a single phrase. Ligados require at least three notes on the same string with alternating pitch directions, such as C-D-C. In Dorico Pro, ligados comprise at least one hammer-on and pull-off.
Guitar techniques Showing notes as dead notes Showing notes as dead notes You can show individual notes belonging to fretted instruments as dead notes. Dead notes are notated with cross noteheads on notation staves and with an X on tablature. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Guitar techniques Hiding/Showing guitar techniques on notation staves and tablature ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the vibrato bar dips whose interval you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, change the value for Interval above in the Ornaments group. For example, enter 1 for a half step interval, 2 for a whole step interval, or 3 for a minor third interval.
Guitar techniques Changing the staff-relative placement of guitar techniques 5. 6. ● Notation and tablature ● Tablature only Choose one of the following options for Show vibrato bar dips: ● Notation only ● Notation and tablature ● Tablature only Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The corresponding guitar techniques are hidden/shown on all corresponding staves projectwide.
Guitar techniques Deleting guitar techniques TIP ● You can change the staff-relative placement of vibrato bar dips and indications/lines, and the direction of guitar bends on notation staves, by selecting them and pressing F . ● You can change the default placement of hammer-on and pull-off indications on notation staves and tablature independently on the Guitar Techniques page in Engraving Options.
Jazz articulations Jazz articulations in Dorico Pro cover a range of note ornamentations that are idiomatic to jazz music, and brass instruments in particular. Although they are often known as jazz “articulations”, these techniques function more like ornaments than articulations because they change the pitch rather than the duration or attack of notes. For this reason, they are considered ornaments in Dorico Pro. They are found in the Ornaments panel, and you can also input them using the ornaments popover.
Jazz articulations Jazz ornaments Fall (bend) Fall (smooth) Additionally, there are other jazz ornaments commonly used by brass instruments that you can add to notes in the same ways as inputting jazz articulations. If your sound library includes samples for jazz articulations, Dorico Pro loads the required samples using playback techniques.
Jazz articulations Project-wide engraving options for jazz articulations Project-wide engraving options for jazz articulations You can find options for the project-wide appearance and position of ornaments on the Jazz Articulations page in Engraving Options. The options on the Jazz Articulations page allow you to change the default length of bends and the default line style, design, and angle of smooth jazz articulations.
Jazz articulations Changing the type/length of existing jazz articulations ● Out far offset moves the end handle of jazz articulations shown after notes, that is, the handle further from the note. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically.
Jazz articulations Deleting jazz articulations NOTE You must select notes with smooth jazz articulations on the same side, for example, only select notes with smooth jazz articulations before them. 2.
Page numbers Page numbers are used to give each page a unique number, and indicate its position relative to other pages. Just as in newspapers and books, musical scores and parts use page numbers to make sure the music stays in the correct order. Because you can have multiple flows in a single project in Dorico Pro, you do not need to change page numbers manually in most cases.
Page numbers Page number paragraph styles Page number paragraph styles The paragraph style for page numbers controls all aspects of their appearance, including their font, size, and horizontal alignment. You can edit the existing page number paragraph style, and create additional page number paragraph styles, in the Paragraph Styles dialog. ● You can open the Paragraph Styles dialog by choosing Library > Paragraph Styles.
Page numbers Hiding/Showing page numbers PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, open the layout whose page number numeral style you want to change. 2. In the Pages section of the Pages panel, select a page. 3. Open the Page Number Change dialog in any of the following ways: ● Right-click in the Pages section and choose Insert Page Number Change from the context menu. ● Click Insert Page Number Change . 4.
Page numbers Hiding/Showing page numbers 5. ● Always hidden ● Not on first page Click Apply, then Close. RESULT ● If you select Always shown, page numbers are shown on all pages that have a text frame containing the page number token in the selected layouts. ● If you select Always hidden, page numbers are hidden on all pages in the selected layouts, including on pages that have a text frame containing the page number token.
Page numbers Hiding/Showing page numbers 4. In the From page field, enter the number of the page from which you want to hide/show page numbers. 5. Optional: Change the value for First page number. First page number is 1 by default. If you do not want to change the page number together with changing the visibility of page numbers, enter the existing page number in this field. 6. 7.
Harp pedaling Harp pedaling is a broad term that covers the specific requirements for notating music for harps. This primarily involves harp pedal diagrams, which are often necessary due to the way in which modern concert harps change their tuning.
Harp pedaling Project-wide engraving options for harp pedaling Note Names Indicates the required accidentals for the seven diatonic pitches, arranged in two lines. Right-foot pedals are shown on top and left-foot pedals are shown below. Any pitches that you input that do not fit with the current harp pedal diagram are considered out of range, and appear red when colors are shown for notes that are out of range.
Harp pedaling Changing the appearance of harp pedal diagrams Changing the appearance of harp pedal diagrams Harp pedaling can be shown as a diagram or using note names. You can change the appearance of harp pedal diagrams individually, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Harp pedaling is shown in the current layout. ● The lower zone is shown.
Harp pedaling Hiding/Showing harp pedaling in layouts Hiding/Showing harp pedaling in layouts You can input and calculate harp pedaling in any layout, but by default harp pedaling is not shown in full score layouts, as they are usually only useful for the performer. You can hide/show harp pedaling in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show harp pedaling.
Harp pedaling Hiding/Showing borders on harp pedal diagrams RESULT The selected harp pedal diagrams are hidden when Hide is activated, and shown when it is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Signposts are shown at the position of each hidden harp pedal diagram. However, signposts are not printed by default.
Harp pedaling Hiding/Showing borders on harp pedal diagrams EXAMPLE Note name harp pedal diagram with border hidden Note name harp pedal diagram with border shown Changing the thickness of harp pedal diagram borders You can change the thickness of borders on individual note name harp pedal diagrams, independently of your project-wide setting. NOTE These steps only apply to harp pedal diagrams using note names. PREREQUISITE ● Harp pedaling is shown in the current layout. ● The lower zone is shown.
Harp pedaling Positions of harp pedal diagrams and borders. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● Harp pedaling is shown in the current layout. ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Harp pedaling Partial harp pedaling RELATED LINKS Project-wide engraving options for harp pedaling on page 1205 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 459 Moving items graphically on page 584 Partial harp pedaling Partial harp pedal diagrams only show the notes whose pedal setting must change at that position, rather than showing the required settings for all pedals. This can make those changes immediately clear to the performer, as they have fewer pedals to read.
Harp pedaling Partial harp pedaling ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the note name harp pedal diagrams for which you want to allow/disallow partial harp pedaling. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Partial pedaling in the Harp Pedals group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox.
Pedal lines Pedal lines indicate to performers which piano pedals to use, and can also give performance instructions, such as how far down to depress the pedals and when to lift the pedal to clear the resonance. Most pianos have either two or three pedals. These pedals are: Sustain pedal The sustain pedal controls the dampers on the piano strings, which is why it is also known as the “damper pedal”. It is also the most commonly used pedal.
Pedal lines Project-wide engraving options for pedal lines Dorico Pro offers comprehensive notational and playback support for piano pedal lines. You can create pedaling for the sustain, sostenuto, and una corda pedals, with support for modern sustain pedaling techniques, including changing the pedal level over the course of a single pedal instruction. You can change the appearance of pedal lines, including changing their start sign and continuation type.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes EXAMPLE Example pedal line with retake and level changes 1 Ped.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes Start of sustain pedal lines There are two handles at the start of pedal lines. ● The left handle moves the start point of the pedal line. You can move this handle to the right/left. ● The right handle changes the start pedal level of the pedal line. You can move this handle upwards/downwards. This changes the angle of the pedal continuation line in relation to the next retake or pedal level change, or the end of the pedal line.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes ● Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the retake or pedal level change whose type you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Retake type in the Pedal Line Retakes group. 3. Choose the type you want from the following options: ● Retake ● Change Level RESULT The type of pedal line retake is changed.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes EXAMPLE Pedal line with default fully depressed pedal level Pedal line with half depressed pedal level RELATED LINKS Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines on page 1223 Changing the start sign appearance of pedal lines on page 1223 Changing pedal line levels You can change the level at the start and end of individual sustain pedal lines, and at each retake or pedal level change.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes ● Click and drag the handles upwards/downwards to the level you want. RESULT The pedal levels at the selected positions on the corresponding pedal lines are changed.
Pedal lines Positions of pedal lines Adding retakes and pedal level changes with the panel on page 376 Positions of pedal lines The default placement of pedal lines is below the bottom staff, even if there are only notes in the upper staff for the right hand. They are placed outside all other notations, including octave lines, slurs, and articulations. If one pedal is used, it is placed as close to the bottom of the staff as possible, while remaining outside of all other notations.
Pedal lines Splitting pedal lines PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the pedal lines whose position relative to grace notes you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate any of the following properties in the Pedal Lines group: 3.
Pedal lines Splitting pedal lines PROCEDURE 1. Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to split the sustain pedal line. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE You can only split one pedal line at a time. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Pedal Lines > Split Pedal Line. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT The pedal line on the selected staff is split at the selected rhythmic position.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines EXAMPLE Two separate pedal lines Two pedal lines merged into one AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can input retakes and pedal level changes, for example, if you want to show a retake at the position where previously one of the pedal lines started. Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines Pedal lines normally comprise a start sign, a continuation line, and an end hook.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the pedal lines whose start sign appearance you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE The pedal lines you select must be the same type, for example, only sustain pedal lines. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Sign appearance in the Pedal Lines group. 3. Select one of the options from the menu.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines 3. ● Line start hook ● Line end hook Select one of the following options from each menu: ● No Hook ● Vertical Hook ● Slant Hook ● Inverse Hook RESULT The hook type at the start/end of the selected pedal lines is changed. TIP You can change the default appearance of all pedal lines project-wide on the Pedal Lines page in Engraving Options.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes on page 1214 Changing pedal line levels on page 1218 Inputting pedal lines with the popover on page 373 Lengthening/Shortening gaps and dashes in pedal continuation lines You can change the length of dashes and the gaps between dashes in individual dashed pedal continuation lines, independently of your project-wide set
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines Changing the line width of pedal lines You can change the thickness of continuation lines individually, independently of your projectwide settings. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar.
Pedal lines Text pedal line signs 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT Continuation signs are shown with parentheses when the checkbox is activated, and without parentheses when the checkbox is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. When the property is deactivated, pedal lines follow your project-wide setting.
Pedal lines Text pedal line signs Editing pedal line start text You can change the text shown at the start of individual pedal lines that use text as their start sign. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the pedal lines whose start text you want to edit. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Pedal lines Pedal lines in playback 4. Press Return . RESULT The continuation text shown at the start of subsequent systems for the selected pedal lines is changed. Deactivating Continuation text restores the default continuation text for the selected pedal lines. NOTE Deactivating properties permanently deletes any custom text entered. Editing una corda pedal line restorative text The equivalent to the final pedal lift for una corda pedal lines is the indication to return to tre corde.
Pedal lines Pedal lines imported from MusicXML files ● Una corda pedal lines send MIDI controller 67 (Soft Pedal). Some piano VST instruments, such as Pianoteq and Garritan CFX Concert Grand, support partial depression of the sustain pedal. Consult the manufacturer’s documentation for more information. Playback Options You can find options for how Dorico Pro plays back pedaling on the Pedal Lines page in Playback Options.
Playing techniques The term “playing techniques” covers a wide range of instructions intended to tell performers to modify the sound of the notes they are playing, for example, by changing their embouchure or changing the position of their bow, or by modifying their instrument, such as adding a mute or depressing a pedal. In Dorico Pro, there are the following types of playing techniques: Glyph playing techniques Playing techniques that display symbols, such as up bow or down bow markings.
Playing techniques Project-wide engraving options for playing techniques ● You can change different aspects of the Playing Technique Font font style in the Edit Font Styles dialog. Pedal lines use a separate font style to other playing techniques.
Playing techniques Erasing the background of text playing techniques PROCEDURE 1. Select the playing techniques to which you want to add text. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Suffix in the Playing Techniques group. 3. Enter the text you want into the value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The text you entered is added to the selected playing techniques and appears after them.
Playing techniques Erasing the background of text playing techniques RESULT The backgrounds of the selected playing techniques are erased. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Deactivating Erase background returns the selected playing techniques to the default nonerased background.
Playing techniques Hiding/Showing playing techniques TIP You can change the default erasure padding of all playing techniques project-wide in the Design section of the Playing Techniques page in Engraving Options. However, this does not allow you to change the padding of each edge independently.
Playing techniques Positions of playing techniques Positions of playing techniques Playing techniques, both as text and symbols, are placed above the staff by default. On vocal staves, they are placed above the staff and below dynamics. In multiple-voice contexts, playing techniques for the up-stem voices are placed above the staff and playing techniques for the down-stem voices are automatically placed below the staff. Glyph playing techniques are center-aligned on noteheads.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines Changing the vertical order of playing techniques You can change the vertical order of playing techniques when multiple playing techniques exist at the same rhythmic position. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines Playing techniques show duration lines when the following conditions are met: ● The playing technique has duration. ● The continuation type for the playing technique is set to show lines. ● The playing technique is ungrouped or is the final playing technique in a group. Transition line Indicates that the playing technique at the start must gradually turn into the playing technique at the end over the duration specified by the line.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines ● Group playing techniques together ● Input playing techniques with an open end during note input and extend them ● Add playing techniques to a range of notes ● Lengthen playing techniques String indicator (selected) with no duration String indicator (selected) with duration and duration line RELATED LINKS Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 366 Lengthening/Shortening items on
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines Symbol shown at the end of segments of playing technique continuation lines that continue across multiple systems. 5 Playing technique continuation sign Parenthesized reminder of the current playing technique shown at the start of subsequent segments of playing technique continuation lines that continue across multiple systems. You cannot hide playing technique continuation signs independently of the playing technique.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines RESULT Duration lines are hidden after the selected playing techniques when you select None. When you select sim., duration lines are hidden and sim. is shown once after each selected playing technique. Duration lines are shown after the selected playing techniques when you select Line. For glyph playing techniques, the playing technique is repeated for each note within the duration automatically when you select Repeat the signs.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines 3. Select the style you want from the menu. RESULT The corresponding style of the selected playing technique continuation lines is changed. TIP You can change the default duration line and transition line types for each playing technique in the Edit Playing Techniques dialog. However, this only changes the whole line style. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the caps of individual playing technique continuation lines.
Playing techniques Groups of playing techniques TIP You can change the default caps for the duration and transition lines for each playing technique in the Edit Playing Techniques dialog. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the style of individual playing technique continuation lines. RELATED LINKS Changing the caps of lines on page 1259 Groups of playing techniques Groups of playing techniques are automatically aligned in a row and can be moved and edited as a group.
Playing techniques Groups of playing techniques NOTE ● You cannot group a playing technique group to another playing technique group, you can only group single playing techniques together or single playing techniques to an existing group. ● Groups of playing techniques apply project-wide, meaning you cannot have playing techniques grouped one way in some layouts but differently in other layouts.
Playing techniques Groups of playing techniques Ungrouping playing techniques and removing playing techniques from groups You can ungroup playing techniques so that all playing techniques in the group become ungrouped. You can also remove only selected playing techniques from groups while leaving other playing techniques in the group. This applies to all layouts in which the playing techniques appear. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the playing techniques you want to ungroup or remove from groups. 2.
Lines Lines can convey a variety of meanings in music, such as indicating which hand to use in piano music or a gradual change in bow pressure. In Dorico Pro, lines can be vertical, horizontal, or angled between notes and have different styles and appearances.
Lines or horizontal, as their end positions and resulting angles are determined by the interval between the start and end notes. A phrase containing two notehead-attached lines, showing where the melody moves between piano staves ● Barline-attached Attached to a rhythmic position and aligned with barlines, if their rhythmic positions coincide with barline positions. Barline-attached lines are always horizontal.
Lines Line components RELATED LINKS Input methods for lines on page 381 Lines panel on page 382 Custom lines on page 747 Adding text to lines on page 1260 Changing the placement of horizontal lines on page 1253 Arpeggio signs on page 1155 Glissando lines on page 1163 Octave lines on page 939 Trills on page 1140 Playing technique continuation lines on page 1238 Pedal lines on page 1213 Repeat endings on page 1284 Guitar bends on page 1169 Tuplet brackets on page 1511 Line components In Dorico Pro, lines con
Lines Project-wide engraving options for lines 6 End cap Symbol shown at the end of lines. Caps can be arrowheads, hooks, terminal lines, music symbols, or text.
Lines Positions of lines Vertical lines Vertical lines are positioned to the left of the notes to which they apply, including any applicable accidentals, but are positioned between grace notes and normal notes. If multiple vertical lines exist at the same rhythmic position, the most recent line is positioned furthest to the right, that is, directly to the left of notes or chords.
Lines Positions of lines EXAMPLE Vertical line on the left of notes Vertical line on the right of notes AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the order of vertical lines when multiple vertical lines exist at the same rhythmic position and on the same side of notes. Changing the horizontal order of vertical lines You can change the horizontal order of vertical lines when multiple vertical lines exist at the same rhythmic position and on the same side of notes.
Lines Positions of lines PROCEDURE 1. Select the vertical lines you want to show before grace notes. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Line before grace notes in the Vertical Lines group. RESULT The selected vertical lines are positioned before grace notes. Deactivating Line before grace notes shows the selected vertical lines after grace notes again.
Lines Positions of lines RESULT The placement of the selected horizontal lines is changed. Horizontal lines inside the staff are centered on the middle staff line by default. TIP You can also cycle through the different placement options for selected horizontal lines by pressing F . AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can change the staff position of lines shown inside the staff. ● You can erase the background of text on lines shown inside the staff.
Lines Length of lines EXAMPLE Horizontal lines inside the staff with different staff positions at their start/end Length of lines Dorico Pro automatically calculates the appropriate length for both horizontal and vertical lines. ● The length of horizontal lines is determined by the rhythmic duration of the line. Horizontal lines with different attachment types are positioned differently, which can affect their graphical length.
Lines Length of lines ● To shorten them by the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Shift-Alt/OptLeft Arrow . ● To snap the end of a single line to the next notehead, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Alt/OptRight Arrow . ● To snap the end of a single line to the previous notehead, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Alt/ Opt-Left Arrow . NOTE ● ● When multiple lines are selected, you can only lengthen/shorten them according to the current rhythmic grid resolution.
Lines Length of lines ● 3. Bottom position Change the values in the value fields. RESULT The vertical length of the selected lines is changed. Increasing the values moves the corresponding end up by staff positions, decreasing the values moves the corresponding end down by staff positions. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can move lines graphically in Engrave mode, including changing their graphical length.
Lines Changing the body style of lines ● End on center of final note ● End immediately before following note RESULT The start and/or end position of the selected rhythmic position-attached horizontal lines is changed.
Lines Changing the caps of lines ● You can also create custom lines with the line bodies, caps, and annotations you want by default. RELATED LINKS Line components on page 1249 Custom lines on page 747 Lines panel on page 382 Input methods for lines on page 381 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the caps of lines You can change the caps of individual lines without changing their body style. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Lines Changing the direction of lines Changing the direction of lines You can change the direction of both horizontal and vertical lines, for example, to make a horizontal line with an arrow end cap point to the left, or to make a vertical line with text appear upside-down with its text reading downwards. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Lines Adding text to lines PROCEDURE 1. Select the lines to which you want to add text. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE You must select either only horizontal lines or only vertical lines. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Text in either the Horizontal Lines or Vertical Lines group. 3. Enter the text you want into the value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The text you entered into the value field is shown centered in the middle of the selected lines.
Lines Adding text to lines Line text font styles There are different font styles for line text according to the line type. You can change different aspects of these fonts in the Edit Font Styles dialog, such as changing the font size to make line text appear larger. The following font styles are used for line text: ● Horizontal Line Font: Used for text on horizontal lines. ● Vertical Line Font: Used for text on vertical lines.
Lines Adding text to lines EXAMPLE Text Above Text Centered Text Below RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the placement of text relative to lines on page 1264 Creating custom playing techniques on page 745 Edit Lines dialog on page 751 Changing the position of text relative to vertical lines You can change the position of text relative to vertical lines individually, for example, to show text on the left of vertical lines. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Lines Adding text to lines EXAMPLE Text Left Text Centered Text Right Changing the placement of text relative to lines You can change the placement of text relative to lines individually, for example, to show text at the start of horizontal lines or the top of vertical lines. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Lines Adding text to lines TIP You can change the default placement of text relative to lines in the Edit Lines dialog, including showing text repeated or hyphenated across the duration of lines. RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the direction of lines on page 1260 Custom lines on page 747 Edit Lines dialog on page 751 Forcing line text to be horizontal You can force the text of individual lines always to appear horizontal, for example, to make text on vertical lines easier to read.
Lines Adding text to lines PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the lines whose text you want to add borders to. NOTE You must select either only horizontal lines or only vertical lines. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Border thickness in either the Horizontal Lines or Vertical Lines group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT Borders with the corresponding thickness are added to text on the selected lines.
Lines Adding text to lines RESULT The backgrounds of text on the selected lines are erased. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Deactivating Erase background returns text on the selected lines to the default non-erased background.
Lines Lines in Engrave mode RESULT Increasing the values increases the padding, decreasing the values decreases the padding. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Rehearsal marks Rehearsal marks are ordered sequences of letters or numbers that provide useful reference points, such as indicating significant changes in the music. They allow performers to co-ordinate easily in rehearsals and make the chronological sequence of the music clear. In Dorico Pro, rehearsal marks follow an automatic sequence where each rehearsal mark has a unique index, ensuring there are never duplicate rehearsal marks.
Rehearsal marks Changing the rehearsal mark enclosure type RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Changing the rehearsal mark enclosure type Rehearsal marks are usually shown in an enclosure, which can be a rectangle, rounded rectangle or a circle. You can change the enclosure type of all rehearsal marks project-wide. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Rehearsal Marks. 3.
Rehearsal marks Changing the index of rehearsal marks When rehearsal marks coincide with tempo changes, Dorico Pro automatically positions tempo marks to the right of rehearsal marks. Dorico Pro automatically adjusts staff spacing to ensure rehearsal marks are correctly positioned. You can move rehearsal marks to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are positioned by default according to your settings in Engraving Options.
Rehearsal marks Changing the rehearsal mark sequence type NOTE These steps do not apply to rehearsal marks using the bar number sequence type. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the rehearsal mark whose index position you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Rehearsal marks Adding prefixes/suffixes to rehearsal marks ● Bar numbers RESULT The selected rehearsal mark now displays a letter, a number, or the current bar number. If it is the first rehearsal mark in either the letters sequence or the numbers sequence in the flow, it shows either A or 1. If there are already rehearsal marks in either the letters sequence or the numbers sequence in the flow, it shows the next letter or number according to the index.
Rehearsal marks Editing the rehearsal mark font style TIP You can add a custom prefix/suffix to all rehearsal marks project-wide on the Rehearsal Marks page in Engraving Options. Editing the rehearsal mark font style You can edit the formatting of the font style used for all rehearsal marks project-wide. PROCEDURE 1. Choose Library > Font Styles to open the Edit Font Styles dialog. 2. In the font styles list, select Rehearsal Mark Font. 3.
Markers Markers are labels locked to a particular position in time, most commonly in relation to a video. They typically indicate an important moment that requires musical prominence, and composers often use them to help shape the writing process. Markers on a timecode staff showing custom text and timecodes By default, markers in Dorico Pro show the default text “Marker” and also include the timecode of their fixed position in time. In Dorico Pro, you can use markers in any project.
Markers Hiding/Showing markers Hiding/Showing markers By default, markers are shown in full score layouts and hidden in part layouts. You can hide and show markers in each layout independently, for example, if markers are helpful for the conductor to see but not for the players. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show markers.
Markers Editing marker text 6. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The vertical position of markers is changed in the selected layouts. NOTE ● If you show markers on a timecode staff, timecodes are also shown on the staff by default. If you only want to show markers on a separate staff and exclude timecodes, you must then change Timecode frequency on timecode staff to Never.
Markers Editing the marker/timecode font styles TIP You can also enter custom text for markers when inputting them using the Add Marker dialog, and change marker text in the Markers section of the Video panel in Write mode. RELATED LINKS Add Marker dialog on page 399 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Editing the marker/timecode font styles You can edit the formatting of the font styles used for all markers and timecodes project-wide, for example, if you want markers to appear bold and italic.
Markers Defining markers as important PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, click Video in the Notations toolbox to show the Video panel. 2. In the Markers section, double-click the timecode you want to change. 3. Enter the new timecode you want into the value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The timecode of the marker is changed. The marker automatically moves relative to the music to reflect its new time position.
Timecodes Timecodes indicate an exact position in time, usually in the context of a video. They allow precise synchronization between multiple elements, such as music and moving images, and can be used as a reference tool. Timecodes are displayed in the format hh:mm:ss:ff, which is two-digit hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
Timecodes Changing the initial timecode value RELATED LINKS Inputting markers/timecodes on page 399 Frame rates on page 189 Video Properties dialog on page 185 Editing the marker/timecode font styles on page 1278 Changing the timecode frequency on page 1283 Markers on page 1275 Hiding/Showing markers on page 1276 Changing the vertical position of markers on page 1276 Changing the vertical position of timecodes on page 1281 Hiding/Showing timecodes in markers on page 1282 Changing the initial timecode value
Timecodes Hiding/Showing timecodes in markers By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Markers and Timecode. 4. In the Timecode subsection, choose one of the following options for Show timecode: 5.
Timecodes Changing the timecode frequency 5. Click Apply, then Close. RELATED LINKS Markers on page 1275 Changing the vertical position of timecodes on page 1281 Changing the vertical position of markers on page 1276 Inputting markers/timecodes on page 399 Changing the timecode frequency You can show timecodes at different intervals in layouts in which timecodes are shown on a separate staff.
Repeat endings For music with repeated passages, repeat endings show which bars are played at the end of each repetition, with different endings each time if required. They are also known as “volta lines”, or as “first and second endings”, but in this documentation, we refer to them as “repeat endings”. Repeat endings comprise two or more segments, where each segment contains a different possible ending.
Repeat endings Changing the total number of playthroughs in repeat endings Changing the total number of playthroughs in repeat endings By default, each segment in repeat endings is played once, so each segment shows a single digit that indicates the playthrough for which it is used. You can increase the total number of playthroughs for repeat endings individually so that segments are played more than once. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Repeat endings Lengthening/Shortening segments in repeat endings 3. Enter the number of each playthrough that you want to include in the selected segment. For example, for a repeat ending with six playthroughs, enter 4,5,6 to include the 4th, 5th, and 6th playthroughs in the second segment. RESULT The playthroughs included in the selected segment are changed.
Repeat endings Positions of repeat endings ● To lengthen the final segment, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow . ● To shorten the final segment, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . RELATED LINKS Input methods for bars, beats, and barlines on page 301 Deleting notes/items on page 454 Moving items graphically on page 584 Positions of repeat endings Repeat endings are placed above the staff at the same positions as other system objects, and their hooks align with barlines.
Repeat endings Changing the appearance of individual final repeat ending segments PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the repeat ending segments whose text you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Custom text in the Repeat Endings group. 3. Enter the text you want into the value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The text shown in the selected segments is changed. Deactivating Custom text restores the default text for the selected repeat ending segments.
Repeat endings Lengthening/Shortening repeat ending hooks Lengthening/Shortening repeat ending hooks You can lengthen/shorten the hooks in repeat endings individually, independently of your project-wide settings. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE You cannot change the hook length of an individual segment in a repeat ending. Changing the hook length affects the whole repeat ending. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Repeat markers Repeat markers show that musical material is to be repeated, but unlike repeat endings, repeat markers often involve jumping to different positions and sections in the music instead of moving through the music consecutively. A mid-system coda section In Dorico Pro, repeat markers are divided into the following types: Repeat jumps Specify the position from which players or playback must jump, such as D.C. al Coda or D.S. al Fine.
Repeat markers Project-wide engraving options for repeat markers Showing repeat markers on one/two lines on page 1294 Hiding/Showing repeat markers on page 1296 Paragraph Styles dialog on page 712 Repeat counts on page 1298 Changing the gap before codas on page 1298 Types of barlines on page 830 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Project-wide engraving options for repeat markers You can find options for the project-wide design, position, and appearance of repeat markers on the Repeat Markers page in Engr
Repeat markers Changing the size of coda/segno symbols NOTE The Repeat Marker Jumps paragraph style inherits settings from the Repeat Marker Sections style. If you change the Repeat Marker Sections paragraph style, this also affects any corresponding options for the Repeat Marker Jumps paragraph style that have not been overridden.
Repeat markers Changing the index for repeat markers RESULT Coda/Segno symbols are hidden/shown in the corresponding repeat markers project-wide. Depending on your choices, other aspects of the corresponding markers’ appearance might also be changed, such as the order or alignment of text and symbol.
Repeat markers Editing repeat marker text EXAMPLE If you have two codas in a flow with two different D.S. al Coda markers, you might set Marker index to 1 for the first coda and 2 for the second, then set ‘Jump to’ index to 1 for the first D.S. al Coda marker and 2 for the second. D.S. al Coda marker with default indexes D.S.
Repeat markers Editing repeat marker text beyond the page margins in one part layout. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE You can only change the word wrapping of repeat jumps, such as D.C. al Fine and D.S. al Coda, that do not have custom text. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar.
Repeat markers Hiding/Showing repeat markers Hiding/Showing repeat markers You can hide/show repeat markers individually, for example, if you want a separated coda section without showing the coda symbol and text. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the repeat markers you want to hide, or the signposts of repeat markers you want to show.
Repeat markers Positions of repeat markers RESULT The barline shown automatically before codas immediately preceded by a repeat jump is changed project-wide. Positions of repeat markers Repeat markers are placed above the staff by default, and at the same positions as other system objects. Coda sections are separated from the preceding music by a gap in the system. You can move repeat markers to different rhythmic positions in Write mode.
Repeat markers Repeat counts and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. In the category list, click Staves and Systems. 4. In the Repeat Markers section, choose one of the following options for Default placement for repeat jumps and ‘Fine’: 5. ● Above staff ● Below staff ● Above and below bottom staff Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The staff-relative placement of all repeat markers is changed in the selected layouts.
Repeat markers Repeat counts Repeat count at the end of a section, indicating it should be played four times By default, repeat counts are right-aligned with their end repeat barline. You can change the location of repeat counts, for example, to show them at both the start and end of repeated sections. Repeat counts shown at the start of repeated sections are left-aligned with start repeat barlines.
Repeat markers Repeat counts ● Start ● End ● Neither ● Both RESULT The location of the selected repeat counts is changed. Repeat counts shown at the start of repeated sections are left-aligned with the start repeat barlines that correspond to the selected end repeat barlines. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Bar repeats Bar repeats indicate that the musical material in preceding bars must be repeated exactly, but without notating that material again. Bar repeats can comprise groups of one, two, or four bars. For example, a one-bar repeat indicates that the material in one bar is repeated, meaning every bar in the region repeats the same material. A four-bar repeat indicates that the material in the previous four bars is repeated.
Bar repeats Project-wide engraving options for bar repeats RELATED LINKS Inputting bar repeats on page 415 Repeats popover on page 403 Bar repeat counts on page 1303 Bar repeat grouping on page 1307 Numbered bar regions on page 1309 Slash regions on page 1315 Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 459 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 431 Hiding/Showing multi-bar rests on page 1337 Types of barlines on page 830 Annotations on page 610 Project-wide engraving options for bar repeats You can find options
Bar repeats Hiding/Showing region highlights ● One bar ● Two bars ● Four bars RESULT The number of bars that make up the repeated phrase in the selected bar repeat regions is changed. This is also reflected in playback. TIP ● Any dynamics you add within bar repeat regions affect the playback of the repeated music. ● You can also change the length of the repeated phrase by opening the repeats popover and changing the entry.
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts Bar repeat region with counts shown every four bars In Dorico Pro, you can change the start count of each bar repeat region, how frequently counts are shown, and whether counts are shown with parentheses, without parentheses, or hidden. You can also customize the count font style. NOTE Bar repeat, slash, and numbered bar region counts use the same font style.
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts 2, with counts shown every four bars, causes the count to appear on the second bar in the region instead of the third.
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts Engrave toolbox on page 493 Hiding/Showing bar number ranges on multi-bar rests on page 846 Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing bar repeat counts You can hide counts or show counts with or without parentheses for individual bar repeat regions, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE Bar repeat counts are only shown on one-bar repeat regions.
Bar repeats Bar repeat grouping 2. In the font styles list, select Bar Repeat Count. 3. Activate the following options, individually or together, to change the corresponding aspect of the font: 4. ● Font family ● Size ● Style ● Underlined Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The formatting of the font style used for counts on bar repeats and slash regions is changed project-wide.
Bar repeats Bar repeat grouping ● You can also choose to show a three-bar repeat to complete a four-bar phrase on the Bar Repeats page in Engraving Options; however, this is less commonly used than a combination of one-bar and two-bar repeats.
Numbered bar regions Numbered bar regions allow you to show bar counts in a region without additional notations. This can help performers keep track of how many bars have passed when playing repetitive music. Numbered bar region spanning six bars By default, numbered bar regions are hidden in full score/custom score layouts and shown in part layouts. You can hide/show numbered bar regions in each layout independently.
Numbered bar regions Project-wide engraving options for numbered bar regions Project-wide engraving options for numbered bar regions You can find options for the project-wide design and appearance of numbered bar regions in the Numbered Bar Regions section of the Bar Repeats page in Engraving Options.
Numbered bar regions Numbered bar region counts Numbered bar region with counts shown every three bars, count and range shown at the start, and parenthesized count shown at the end of the system In Dorico Pro, you can change the start count of each numbered bar region, how frequently counts are shown, their staff-relative placement, and whether counts and ranges are shown with parentheses, without parentheses, or hidden. You can also customize the count font style.
Numbered bar regions Numbered bar region counts ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the numbered bar regions whose count frequency you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Count frequency in the Bar Repeat Regions group. 3. Change the value in the value field.
Numbered bar regions Numbered bar region counts 5. 6. Activate the following properties, individually or together, to change the appearance of the corresponding count: ● Show in first bar ● Show in final bar ● Show at ends of systems Select one of the following options from each menu: ● With parentheses ● Without parentheses ● Do not show RESULT The corresponding counts and ranges in the selected numbered bar regions are shown with parentheses, without parentheses, or hidden.
Numbered bar regions Numbered bar region counts PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the numbered bar regions whose count staff-relative placement you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Rhythm slashes Rhythm slashes are diagonal lines positioned on staves that are used to indicate that performers should play something, but without specifying the exact rhythms and pitches. They are often accompanied by chord symbols to indicate the set of notes the performer should use. There are two different types of rhythm slashes: Slashes with stems Slashes with stems usually indicate the rhythm to be played, but not the pitches. Also known as “rhythmic notation”.
Rhythm slashes Slash regions By default, slash regions are highlighted with a colored background. As you zoom out, the highlights become more opaque, which is especially useful when viewing full score layouts in galley view. These highlights are considered annotations, are not printed by default, and you can hide/show them. When two different slash regions are adjacent, they alternate highlight colors to ensure the separate regions are always identifiable.
Rhythm slashes Project-wide engraving options for rhythm slashes Project-wide engraving options for rhythm slashes You can find options for the project-wide design and appearance of rhythm slashes in the Rhythmic Slashes section of the Notes page in Engraving Options. These options affect both slash voices and slash regions.
Rhythm slashes Slashes in multiple-voice contexts PROCEDURE 1. Select any part of each slash region whose voice direction you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Voice direction in the Slash Regions group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Up ● Down RESULT The voice direction, and therefore stem direction, of the selected slash regions is changed.
Rhythm slashes Slashes in multiple-voice contexts RESULT The staff position of the selected rhythm slashes is changed. For example, changing the Slash pos. value to 4 positions rhythm slashes on the top line of a five-line staff, while -4 positions them on the bottom line. If any of the rhythm slashes have stems, their stem direction is adjusted automatically.
Rhythm slashes Splitting slash regions PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select any part of each slash region whose padding rests you want to hide/show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2.
Rhythm slashes Hiding/Showing stems in slash regions Hiding/Showing stems in slash regions You can hide/show stems and beams, where applicable, on slashes in individual slash regions. By default, slashes in slash regions are shown without stems. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts Changing the start count of slash regions You can change the number from which individual slash region counts start, for example, if you want to input more precise notation between two slash regions but want the count to appear to continue across the regions. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts RESULT The count frequency is changed for the selected slash regions. TIP You can also change the default count frequency for all slash regions project-wide in Engraving Options > Notes > Rhythmic Slashes.
Rhythm slashes Slash voices Changing the staff-relative placement of slash region counts You can show the counts in individual slash regions either above or below the staff, independently of your project-wide setting. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE Changing the staff-relative placement of counts affects all counts in the region. You cannot change the placement of a single count independently of other counts in the region.
Rhythm slashes Slash voices NOTE ● Because you can change notes in slash voices to normal voices and vice versa, the pitches you input are retained. ● By default, notes in slash voices are not played back. You can have multiple slash voices active at the same time. To accommodate all slash voices in multiple-voice contexts, Dorico Pro changes their staff position automatically. However, you can also change the staff position of rhythm slashes manually.
Rhythm slashes Slash voices If you change normal notes to a slash voice, they are all automatically positioned on a single staff line. By default in single-voice contexts, this is the middle line of the staff. If you change rhythm slashes to normal notes, their original pitches are restored, meaning their staff positions reflect their pitches.
Rhythm slashes Slash voices Including/Excluding slash voices in playback By default, notes in slash voices are not played back. You can include/exclude all notes in slash voices project-wide in playback. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-P to open Playback Options. 2. In the category list, click Repeats. 3. In the Rhythm Slashes section, activate/deactivate Play slash voices. 4. Click Apply, then Close.
Rests Rests are markings with a rhythmic value that indicate no note is played for that duration. Each note duration has an equivalent rest, for example, a quarter note rest is different to a sixteenth note rest. All notes and rests within a bar must add up to the duration of the bar, according to the prevailing time signature. Dorico Pro automatically fills the gaps between notes with implicit rests of the appropriate duration. Therefore, it is usually not necessary to input rests in Dorico Pro.
Rests Implicit vs. explicit rests Rests stay within the staff wherever possible. They do not move above or below the staff when the notes around them are very high or very low. However, on staves with multiple voices, rests are placed higher on the staff, or above the staff, for up-stem voices and lower on the staff, or below the staff, for down-stem voices. Example rest positions in a multiple-voice context Rests in multiple voices must not overlap.
Rests Implicit vs. explicit rests RELATED LINKS Inputting rests on page 243 Inputting notes on page 215 Deleting rests on page 1334 Forcing the duration of notes/rests on page 225 Turning explicit rests into implicit rests on page 1331 Hiding/Showing rest colors on page 1332 Implicit rests in multiple-voice contexts In Dorico Pro, implicit rests are shown automatically to fill in rhythmic positions around notes, including when there are multiple voices on the staff.
Rests Per-flow notation options for rests A phrase with multiple voices showing implicit rests. The same phrase without implicit rests. RELATED LINKS Notation Options dialog on page 701 Per-flow notation options for rests on page 1331 Moving rests vertically on page 1333 Deleting rests on page 1334 Slash voices on page 1324 Turning explicit rests into implicit rests Implicit rests and explicit rests behave differently.
Rests Project-wide engraving options for rests RELATED LINKS Notation Options dialog on page 701 Voices on page 1538 Per-flow notation options for voices on page 1539 Stem direction on page 1119 Project-wide engraving options for rests You can find options for the project-wide appearance of rests on the Rests page in Engraving Options. The options on the Rests page allow you to change the style, appearance, width, and precise position of rests.
Rests Moving rests vertically Moving rests vertically You can change the vertical position of rests individually, for example, if you want to change the staff line from which a whole bar rest hangs, or you want to show rests for all voices at a particular rhythmic position. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. Moving rests vertically shows multiple rests at that rhythmic position if more than one voice on the staff has a rest of the same duration.
Rests Deleting rests Deleting rests You can delete both implicit rests and explicit rests, for example, if you want to hide rests before/ after notes in another voice used to show passing notes. TIP ● If you want to delete rests because you do not want to show bar rests in empty bars, you can instead hide bar rests.
Rests Hiding/Showing bar rests in empty bars RELATED LINKS Notation Options dialog on page 701 Implicit vs. explicit rests on page 1329 Large selections on page 424 Changing the width of empty bars on page 827 Note spacing on page 574 Rests in cues on page 958 Hiding/Showing bar rests in empty bars You can hide/show bar rests in empty bars in each layout independently. For example, you can hide bar rests in full score layouts but show bar rests in part layouts.
Rests Multi-bar rests 2. In the Flows list, select the flows in which you want to hide/show bar rests in additional voices. By default, only the current flow is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other flows by clicking Select All in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple flows, Shift -clicking adjacent flows, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual flows. 3. In the category list, click Rests. 4.
Rests Multi-bar rests You can hide/show multi-bar rests in each layout independently in Dorico Pro, and you can hide/ show bar number ranges below them. By default, the multi-bar rest bar counts only appear once between the staves of grand staff instruments. You can find options for the project-wide appearance, design, width, and content of multi-bar rests on the Rests page in Engraving Options.
Rests Multi-bar rests RELATED LINKS Bar repeats on page 1301 Hiding/Showing bar number ranges on multi-bar rests on page 846 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Hiding/Showing tacet al fine on multi-bar rests at the end of flows You can change the appearance of multi-bar rests that extend to the end of flows in all layouts project-wide. By default, multi-bar rests that extend to the end of flows show “tacet al fine” above the staff instead of the total bar count. PROCEDURE 1.
Rests Multi-bar rests Changing the width of multi-bar rest H-bars You can change the width of individual multi-bar rest H-bars, independently of your project-wide settings. This allows you to control the exact positions of multi-bar rests, for example, when there are clef changes at the end of multi-bar rests. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Rests Multi-bar rests RESULT The selected H-bars are moved horizontally. Increasing the value moves H-bars to the right, decreasing the value moves H-bars to the left. TIP You can change the default width and position of all H-bars project-wide, including changing whether items at the start/end of multi-bar rests affect their horizontal position, in Engraving Options > Rests > Multi-bar Rests.
Rests Multi-bar rests TIP You can edit different aspects of the font styles used for multi-bar rest bar counts in the Edit Font Styles dialog, for example, if you want to make the font italic or change the font size. ● Music font bar counts use Multi-bar Rest Bar Count Font, which must be SMuFL-compliant. ● Plain font bar counts use Multi-bar Rest Bar Count Plain Font.
Slurs Slurs are tapered, curved lines that join notes to indicate legato articulation and phrasing. Depending on the context and the instrument to which they apply, slurs can have additional meanings to simply marking phrases. For example, for wind players, a slur indicates that all the notes in the phrase are played in the same breath and without re-tonguing or re-articulating any notes. For string players, a slur indicates that all the notes in the phrase are played legato and under one bow.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs There are musical examples for many options to demonstrate how they affect the appearance of your music. RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 General placement conventions for slurs There are different conventions for the placement, endpoint position, shape, and curvature direction of slurs in various contexts.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs 2. 3. In the Properties panel, activate the following properties, individually or together, in the Slurs group: ● Start pos. in tie chain ● End pos. in tie chain Choose one of the following options for each property: ● First note ● Last note RESULT The position of the selected slurs relative to tie chains is changed. TIP You can change the default position of all slurs relative to tie chains project-wide on the Slurs page in Engraving Options.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs You can change the automatic placement of grace note slurs by changing the stem direction of a grace note, changing the direction of a slur, and using the slur handles in Engrave mode to adjust the position of a slur in finer detail.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs You can change the vertical and horizontal offsets for the endpoints of all slurs project-wide in the Endpoint Positioning section of the Slurs page in Engraving Options. However, you might also need to reduce the value for Minimum gap inside slur curvature to avoid collisions in the Avoiding Collisions section, as endpoints cannot be closer to noteheads than this value.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Nested slurs on page 1357 Stem direction on page 1119 Articulations on page 816 Changing the placement of articulations relative to slurs on page 821 Slurs over system and frame breaks Slurs automatically cross system breaks and frame breaks, appearing in two parts on either side of the break.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Collision avoidance for cross-staff slurs You can activate/deactivate collision avoidance for cross-staff slurs in Engraving Options > Slurs > Avoiding Collisions. When cross-staff slur collision avoidance is activated, you can allow/ disallow Dorico Pro to use the point at which notes cross to the other staff to determine the curvature of cross-staff slurs, which produces better shapes in most cases.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs When the property is deactivated, slurs follow your project-wide setting for slur collision avoidance. TIP You can enable/disable slur collision avoidance for all cross-staff slurs project-wide in Engraving Options > Slurs > Avoiding Collisions. You can also customize the default settings for the shape and endpoint positions of slurs that are avoiding collisions in this section.
Slurs Slur styles ● Project-wide, by increasing the value for Offset shoulders by fraction of half length of short slur in Engraving Options > Slurs > Design > Advanced Options. ● Individually, by activating Start handle offset and End handle offset in the Properties panel in Engrave mode, and changing their X values. ● Individually, by moving the handles of slurs in Engrave mode.
Slurs Slur styles TIP You can set the precise parameters of each of these options project-wide on the Slurs page in Engraving Options. For example, you can change the length and width of the stroke in Editorial slurs, the diameter of dots and length of dashes, and the sizes of the gaps between dots and dashes. Changing the style of slurs You can change the style of individual slurs after they have been input. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Slurs Slur styles NOTE These steps only apply to dashed/dotted slurs. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the dashed/dotted slurs whose dash length/dot size you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate one of the following properties in the Slurs group: 3.
Slurs Slur styles ● 3. For dotted slurs, activate Dot gap length. Change the values in the value fields. RESULT Increasing the values makes the gaps between dashes/dots larger. Decreasing the values makes the gaps between dashes/dots smaller. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Slurs Slur curvature direction TIP You can change the curvature style of all slurs project-wide in the Design section of the Slurs page in Engraving Options.
Slurs Slur curvature direction Forces slurs to comprise two segments: the first curves downwards, the second curves upwards to create an S-shape. It is typically used when phrases start in the upper staff and end in the lower staff, for example, in piano parts. TIP ● You can set your preference for whether slurs follow the stem direction, or always appear above notes, on the Slurs page in Engraving Options.
Slurs Cross-staff and cross-voice slurs ● You can change the default curvature direction behavior of all slurs project-wide on the Slurs page in Engraving Options.
Slurs Nested slurs Nested slurs Nested slurs are two or more slurs used simultaneously, where the overarching slur shows the structure of the phrase and the inner slurs show the articulation within the phrase. They are also known as “slurs within slurs”. Depending on the stem directions within the overarching outer slur and your settings on the Slurs page in Engraving Options, inner slurs may appear on the opposite side of the staff to the outer slur.
Slurs Nested slurs ● You can select notes on multiple staves to input slurs on those staves simultaneously. 2. Optional: If you want to input slurs onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Input or start the outer slur in any of the following ways: 4. ● Press S . ● In the Notes panel, click Slur ● In the Keyboard panel toolbar, click Slur . .
Slurs Linked slurs TIP You can input the outer slur and inner slurs in any order as Dorico Pro automatically adjusts slurs so that shorter slurs are positioned within longer slurs, and ensures they do not collide. RELATED LINKS Inputting slurs on page 273 Changing the curvature direction of slurs on page 1355 Linked slurs Slurs of the same duration at the same rhythmic position on multiple staves can be linked together.
Slurs Slur segments NOTE Only slurs that have the same duration and start at the same position can be linked together. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Slurs > Link. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT The selected slurs are linked together. Unlinking slurs You can unlink slurs, including slurs that were linked automatically. For example, if you want to lengthen/shorten slurs independently of each other. PROCEDURE 1.
Slurs Slur segments An unusual slur shape created using five segments. The same slur, showing the positions of the handles of all five segments. Changing the number of segments in individual slurs You can change the number of segments in individual slurs, for example, to allow you to create slurs with unusual shapes. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode Slurs in Engrave mode In Engrave mode, each slur has five square handles that you can move independently. Some handles are connected to others, meaning moving one can affect the position of neighboring handles. Slurs have the following handles in Engrave mode: 1 Left endpoint 2 Left control point 3 Slur height 4 Right control point 5 Right endpoint For example, moving the left endpoint moves both the start of a slur and the other handles apart from the right endpoint.
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode if they were separate slurs, but in order to maintain a consistent shape, moving certain handles causes other handles to move simultaneously.
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode EXAMPLE The left control point is selected. Moving the selected left control point upwards and to the left causes the right control point on the adjacent segment to move downwards and to the right. Changing the shape/angle of slurs You can move slurs and slur handles graphically, allowing you to change the shape and/or angle of individual slurs, for example, to adjust an endpoint relative to an individual notehead.
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode ● To move them a large amount, press Ctrl/Cmd plus the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . This moves slurs/handles by 1 space per press. ● To move them a moderate amount, press Shift plus the standard key command, for example, Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . This moves slurs/handles by 1/2 space per press. ● To move them a small amount, press Ctrl/Cmd - Shift plus the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow .
Slurs Slurs in Engrave mode Slurs over system and frame breaks on page 1347 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 431 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Changing the thickness of slurs You can change the thickness of individual slurs, including changing the thickness of the middle of slurs independently of the ends of slurs, independently of your project-wide settings.
Slurs Slur height Slur height The height of slurs determines how far above/below notes slurs extend vertically. Increasing the height of slurs makes them extend further from the staff. This gives them a rounder shape, which takes up more vertical space. Where vertical space is limited, there should be a balance between how curved slurs are, which can help readability for players, and ensuring staves do not overlap.
Slurs Slur shoulder offset ● To move them upwards/downwards a standard amount, press Alt/Opt plus the corresponding arrow key. For example, press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to move handles upwards. This moves handles by 1/8 space per press. ● To move them upwards/downwards a large amount, press Ctrl/Cmd plus the standard key command, for example, Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . This moves handles by 1 space per press.
Slurs Slur shoulder offset You can adjust the shoulders of individual slurs in Engrave mode. Changing the shoulder offset of slurs You can adjust the shoulders of individual slurs, independently of your project-wide settings, by moving their control point handles. You can move each control point independently. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE is selected in the Engrave toolbox.
Slurs Slurs in playback ● End handle offset moves the right control points of slurs. X moves them horizontally, Y moves them vertically. You can also use these properties to change the shoulder offset of individual slurs by changing the values in the value fields. Deactivating the properties resets the corresponding handles on the selected slurs to their default positions. ● You can change the default shoulder offset of all slurs project-wide in Engraving Options > Slurs > Design > Advanced Options.
Staff labels Staff labels are used to identify the instruments playing the music on the corresponding staves, and are positioned to the left of systems, before the initial barline of each system. Staff labels are typically used in music containing multiple players. It is usual to show instrument names in full in the staff labels for the first systems in each flow, and abbreviated instrument names in the staff labels of subsequent systems.
Staff labels Project-wide engraving options for staff labels ● Staff labels do not show all instruments held by players, for example, in the staff label for the first system. You should include a comprehensive instrumentation list that shows any doubling at the front of your score.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing staff labels PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show staff labels. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing staff labels at system/frame breaks Changing the minimum indent for systems with staff labels You can change the minimum indent for all systems that show staff labels to optimize horizontal space in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts whose minimum indent for systems with staff labels you want to change.
Staff labels Staff label contents ● None RESULT Staff labels are hidden/shown on the corresponding systems to the selected system/frame breaks. Horizontal spacing is automatically adjusted so the system fills the width of the music frame. ● None hides staff labels. ● Full and Abbreviated show staff labels using the corresponding instrument name length. Deactivating the property returns any selected system break signposts to your per-layout settings.
Staff labels Instrument transpositions in staff labels RELATED LINKS Player, layout, and instrument names on page 175 Instrument numbering on page 127 Changing instrument names on page 178 Renaming players on page 177 Renaming layouts on page 178 Instrument changes on page 129 Layout Options dialog on page 698 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Showing instrument/player names in staff labels You can change whether staff labels show instrument or player names for each player in each layout independently.
Staff labels Instrument transpositions in staff labels commonly shown with their transposition, also known as their “instrument pitch”, as part of their instrument name or layout name. Depending on the options set for Show transposition in the Edit Instrument Names dialog for each transposing instrument, they might show transpositions in staff labels even if you have hidden transpositions in staff labels in their layout.
Staff labels Instrument transpositions in staff labels Changing the appearance/position of instrument transpositions in staff labels You can change the appearance and position of instrument transpositions in staff labels in each layout independently, for example, if you want to show instrument transpositions on a separate line in part layouts but on the same line and parenthesized in full score layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing instrument change labels at the start of flows RELATED LINKS Changing the language for instrument names on page 55 Instrument numbering on page 127 Numbering instruments with different transpositions separately/ together You can change whether instruments are numbered separately or together in all staff labels project-wide when you have multiple instruments of the same type but with different transpositions, such as two Horns in F and two Horns in D.
Staff labels Grouping the staff labels of adjacent identical instruments Grouping the staff labels of adjacent identical instruments When multiple adjacent players hold the same instrument, you can group them so that there is only one instrument name for all staves with the instrument number shown beside each individual staff. You can group the instrument names of single players independently of section players.
Staff labels Showing vocal staff labels in uppercase/title case 2. In the category list, click Staff Labels. 3. In the Numbering section, choose one of the following options for Numbering style for single players: 4. 5. ● Arabic numerals ● Roman numerals Choose one of the following options for Numbering style for section players: ● Arabic numerals ● Roman numerals Click Apply, then Close.
Staff labels Player group labels Player group labels Player group labels show the names of player groups as vertical text on vertical brackets to the left of staff labels. They allow you to identify groups of staves and are typically used in large-scale works, such as for orchestra and double choir. Player group labels to the left of staff labels, showing sections in an orchestra Player group labels show full player group names by default.
Staff labels Player group labels Hiding/Showing player group labels You can hide/show player group labels in each layout independently. For example, if you want to show player group labels for choirs in the full score layout but hide them in the vocal score layout. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show player group labels.
Staff labels Staff label paragraph styles ● 4. Inside bracket Click Apply, then Close. RELATED LINKS Lines on page 1247 Changing the placement of text relative to lines on page 1264 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Staff label paragraph styles Staff labels use paragraph styles to format their fonts, including their size, spacing, alignment, and other formatting options.
Staff labels Staff labels for percussion kits RELATED LINKS Paragraph Styles dialog on page 712 Staff labels on condensed staves on page 1386 Divisi staff labels on page 1414 Divisi change labels on page 1417 Player labels on page 683 Player group labels on page 1382 Staff labels for percussion kits The staff labels shown for percussion kit staves depend on how kits are presented in your project. Kits can be presented as five-line staves, grids, and as single-line instruments.
Staff labels Staff labels on condensed staves You can change the player names, layout names, and instrument names of percussion kits in the same ways as for other players and instruments.
Staff labels Staff labels on condensed staves Because condensing can change frequently, staff labels on condensed staves can vary from one system to another. The staff labels for condensed divisi staves reflect the divisions at the start of the system and show instrument names. You can choose to show divisi group names instead of instrument names and change how player numbers are stacked in staff labels on all condensed staves project-wide.
Staff labels Staff labels on condensed staves RESULT The stacking of player numbers in all staff labels on condensed staves is changed project-wide. Showing divisi group/instrument names in condensed staff labels By default, staff labels for condensed divisi staves show instrument names. You can show divisi group names in all condensed staff labels project-wide where divisi groups exist instead, for example, if your divisi group names describe the players included in the condensed staff better.
Staves A staff is a line or group of lines on which musical notes are notated to indicate the pitch and rhythm of music. Pitched instruments use the traditional five-line staff and unpitched instruments often use a single-line staff. Notes are positioned on the lines and in the spaces on five-line staves, and can also use ledger lines above/below the staff to represent pitches that cannot fit on the staff.
Staves Per-layout options for staves Per-layout options for staves You can change settings that affect the staves in each layout independently. You can change the size of staves in each layout in the Space Size section of the Page Setup page in Layout Options. You can change other aspects of staves on the Staves and Systems page in Layout Options. For example, you can change which staff labels are shown on systems, indent the first system of each flow, and fix the number of bars included in each system.
Staves Deleting staves Deleting staves You can delete staves from any rhythmic position so they are no longer shown in any layout, for example, to end a passage with an extra staff and return to the standard number of staves. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item on the staff you want to delete, at the rhythmic position from which you want to delete it. NOTE You can only delete one staff at a time. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Staff > Remove Staff.
Staves Deleting extra/ossia staves Deleting extra/ossia staves You can delete extra and ossia staves so they are no longer shown in any layout, but without automatically deleting the music on them. For example, if you had previously added extra staves for a passage but no longer want them. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the signposts at the start/end of the extra/ossia staves you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete .
Staves Extra staves Signposts are automatically added when you add or remove extra staves, indicating the number of staves added or removed at that position. If multiple staff changes happen at the same rhythmic position, they are all shown in the same signpost.
Staves Extra staves ● You can only add extra staves to instruments held by single players. You cannot add extra staves to instruments that belong to section players or percussion kits. ● Extra staves prevent instruments from condensing in the systems where extra staves exist. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item on one of the instrument’s original staves and at the rhythmic position where you want to add an extra staff. 2.
Staves Extra staves Showing extra staves across whole systems By default, extra staves are only shown from where they begin and until where they end. You can change this setting so that extra staves fill the full width of any system on which they appear instead, in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to show extra staves across the full width of systems.
Staves Ossia staves Ossia staves Ossia staves are smaller staves shown above/below the main staff of an instrument. They are used to show alternative phrases that can be played instead of the original phrase, such as suggestions for ornaments, alternative notations from other sources, or an easier version.
Staves Ossia staves Hiding/Showing ossia staves in the preamble on page 1398 Hiding/Showing ossia staves on page 1399 Changing the placement of system objects relative to ossia staves on page 1405 Condensing on page 666 Adding ossia staves You can add ossia staves for single and section players, both above and below existing staves. For grand staff instruments, you can add ossias with up to two staves. NOTE ● You cannot add ossia staves to percussion kit instruments.
Staves Ossia staves 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The scale factor of ossia staves relative to the prevailing staff size is changed in all layouts project-wide. RELATED LINKS Staff size on page 639 Changing the padding on ossias that start/end mid-bar You can change how far staff lines extend beyond the left/right of ossia staves that begin/end in the middle of bars. Padding such ossia staves ensures that notes, accidentals, rhythm dots, and other items are always shown on staff lines. PROCEDURE 1.
Staves Ossia staves PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show ossia staves in the preamble. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, clicking and dragging across multiple layouts, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3.
Staves Ossia staves 4. In the Ossias and Extra Staves section, activate/deactivate Show ossias. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Ossias are shown in the selected layouts when Show ossias is activated, and hidden when it is deactivated. Barlines on ossia staves There are different conventions for whether ossias are connected to their corresponding staves with barlines, and if so, which type of barline should be used.
Staves Ossia staves An ossia staff with the default staff label Ossia staff labels are positioned according to the distances set in the Ossias section of the Staves page in Engraving Options. There are separate options for labels before single ossias and braced two-staff ossias.
Staves System dividers RELATED LINKS Ossia staff labels on page 1400 System dividers System dividers are used to clarify the separation of different systems when they appear on the same page. They are usually shown as two thick, parallel angled lines positioned to the left of initial barlines. In Dorico Pro, the outer edges of system dividers are aligned with the corresponding edges of music frames.
Staves System objects 6. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT System dividers are hidden or shown in the selected layouts. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing empty staves on page 619 Changing the length of system dividers You can change the length of system dividers in each layout independently, for example, if you want to show longer system dividers in layouts that show full staff labels. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Staves System objects meaning no staff is very far from these important markings. You can also show rehearsal marks and repeat endings additionally below the bottom staff. NOTE ● System objects are only shown above instrument families that are bracketed or braced together. You can change bracket grouping in each layout independently. You can also bracket or brace specific staves together using custom bracket/brace grouping.
Staves System indents NOTE System objects are only shown above instrument families that are bracketed or braced together. You can change bracket grouping in each layout independently. You can also bracket or brace specific staves together using custom bracket/brace grouping.
Staves System indents In Dorico Pro, system indents automatically adjust to accommodate staff labels. For example, if a system contains a staff label that is significantly longer than the minimum system indent, Dorico Pro increases the indent on that system to ensure the staff label remains legible and is not cut off on the left edge or collides with the music. You can change both the minimum indent on systems with staff labels and the first system indent in each layout independently.
Divisi Divisi is when players split, or “divide”, in order to play multiple lines of music, commonly for a limited passage, before returning to play together, or “tutti”. Divisi passages can be notated with all lines on a single staff or across multiple staves. Divisi is a technique most commonly used in orchestral string writing, as the string section typically contains a large number of players compared to the number of staves.
Divisi Change Divisi dialog TIP If you want to show the parts for multiple single players on the same staff, you can use condensing.
Divisi Change Divisi dialog 1 Divisions section Shows the current divisions and groups for the selected section player at the selected rhythmic position. 2 Groups Shows any groups of divisions you have created. Grouping sections together gives you more flexibility in how the staves are labelled. 3 Divisions Shows each current individual division. Each division corresponds to a separate staff. 4 Action bar Contains options that allow you to change the number and arrangement of divisions.
Divisi Inputting divisi changes ● Hide: The corresponding part of divisi staff labels is always hidden, regardless of your per-layout settings. RELATED LINKS Staff label paragraph styles on page 1384 Divisi staff labels on page 1414 Hiding/Showing staff labels on page 1372 Hiding/Showing divisi section numbers in staff labels on page 1416 Text editor options in Write mode on page 386 Inputting divisi changes You can input divisi changes on any section player staff.
Divisi Editing existing divisi changes through a system with an existing divisi change active at its start, the number of staves is not changed to reflect the new divisi change until the next system. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can input further divisi changes at any position or end the divisi passage. ● You can enable condensing for selected layouts, including condensing divisi staves.
Divisi Ending divisi passages Ending divisi passages You can end divisi passages and return to a unison section on a single staff at any position, including partway through systems. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item on a divisi staff at the rhythmic position where you want the divisi passage to end. 2. Choose Edit > Notations > Staff > Restore Unison. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Divisi Unison ranges NOTE Replicating music from the source staff to other staves in the section is complex, and there are limitations to what Dorico Pro can calculate, particularly notations that start before divisi changes or end after divisi changes. For example, slurs that start before a divisi change and continue into the divisi change are not replicated in unison ranges. In such cases, we recommend that you move the divisi change to before/after the slur and manually copy unison material if required.
Divisi Divisi on vocal staves Divisi on vocal staves When vocal staves divide to show different lines on separate staves, it is common to show arrows at the end of the system to emphasize the change, and again at the end of the division to show the staves are rejoining.
Divisi Divisi staff labels NOTE ● Editing individual divisi staff labels overrides your paragraph style settings. If you later change the staff label paragraph styles, the edited divisi staff label is not updated. ● You can also show divisi change labels above divisi staves in each layout independently.
Divisi Divisi staff labels RESULT The appearance, length, and behavior of the staff labels in the divisi change are changed in all applicable layouts.
Divisi Divisi change labels EXAMPLE Divisi section numbers and staff labels both shown Divisi section numbers hidden but staff labels shown RELATED LINKS Divisi staff labels on page 1414 Change Divisi dialog on page 1408 Hiding/Showing staff labels on page 1372 Divisi change labels Divisi change labels identify the divisions on each divisi staff. They are particularly useful when divisi changes occur partway through systems and the precise division of the section would otherwise be ambiguous.
Divisi Divisi change labels TIP Divisi change labels use the Player Labels paragraph style, which you can edit in the Paragraph Styles dialog. RELATED LINKS Paragraph Styles dialog on page 712 Divisi staff labels on page 1414 Player labels on page 683 Staff labels on condensed staves on page 1386 Changing the default to/unison indications on page 685 Editing divisi change labels You can show custom text in individual divisi change labels shown above staves.
Divisi Divisi in playback Hiding/Showing divisi change labels above staves You can hide/show section numbers above staves in divisi sections in each layout independently, for example, to clarify which staves correspond to sections in the divisi when divisi changes occur partway through systems, or to show a change in weighting between staves. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2.
Tablature Tablature is an alternative notation to the five-line staff, and is used for fretted instruments. On tablature, pitches are indicated by fret numbers positioned on lines, each of which represents a string on the instrument. As tablature is commonly used for guitars, it usually shows six lines.
Tablature Project-wide engraving options for tablature Trills on page 1140 Project-wide engraving options for tablature You can find options for the project-wide design of tablature notation on the Tablature and Staves pages in Engraving Options. The options on the Tablature page allow you to change the default direction, position, and alignment of stems, the position of rhythm dots, and the enclosures for chords on tablature.
Tablature Hiding/Showing notation staves and tablature Hiding/Showing notation staves and tablature You can show notation staves only, tablature only, or both in each layout independently and for each player holding at least one fretted instrument independently. For example, you can show only notation staves in the full score layout but the notation staff and tablature in a guitar part layout. When tablature is shown, it can appear with or without rhythms. PROCEDURE 1.
Tablature Changing the allocated string for notes on tablature Fretted instrument tuning on page 137 Inputting notes on tablature on page 239 Guitar bends on page 1169 Guitar techniques on page 1185 Hiding/Showing guitar techniques on notation staves and tablature on page 1191 Hiding/Showing empty staves on page 619 Changing the allocated string for notes on tablature You can change the string to which individual notes are allocated on tablature manually, for example, if you input the notes on the notation
Tablature Hiding/Showing enclosures around notes on tablature EXAMPLE Notes allocated to the same string After changing the strings for some notes to reduce the distance between frets RELATED LINKS Inputting notes on tablature on page 239 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Hiding/Showing enclosures around notes on tablature You can hide/show enclosures around all chords on tablature that are a half note or longer, that is, durations shown with hollow noteheads on notation staves. PROCEDURE 1.
Tablature Hiding/Showing enclosures around notes on tablature EXAMPLE None Ellipse Rounded rectangle RELATED LINKS Showing notes as dead notes on page 1190 Hiding/Showing guitar techniques on notation staves and tablature on page 1191 Changing the shape of enclosures on single notes on tablature Single notes on tablature require different enclosure shapes to chords as their overall dimensions can be very different, such as double-digit fret numbers often being wider than their height.
Tablature Changing the placement of rhythm dots on tablature Changing the placement of rhythm dots on tablature By default, rhythm dots shown on tablature appear once per chord and are placed above the top string line. You can change their placement and show multiple rhythm dots next to notes. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Tablature. 3. In the Rhythm Dots section, choose one of the following options for Position of rhythm dots: 4.
Tempo marks Tempo marks indicate how fast music is played, often with a combination of text instructions and metronome marks. They are also known as “tempo changes”, “tempo indications”, and “tempo markings”. A tempo mark can show text instructions, a metronome mark, or a combination of the two.
Tempo marks Project-wide engraving options for tempo marks Positions of tempo marks on page 1431 System objects on page 1403 Changing the positions of system objects on page 1404 Layout Options dialog on page 698 Project-wide engraving options for tempo marks You can find options for the project-wide appearance of tempo marks on the Tempo page in Engraving Options.
Tempo marks Tempo mark components RELATED LINKS Metronome marks on page 1436 Gradual tempo changes on page 1440 Tempo equations on page 1444 Input methods for tempo marks on page 294 Tempo panel on page 297 Tempo popover on page 294 Tempo mark font styles on page 1434 Changing the relative tempo mark value on page 1438 Tempo mark components Tempo mark components include text, metronome marks, parentheses, and approximate indications.
Tempo marks Tempo mark components Poco a poco Poco a poco text is shown immediately after gradual tempo change text when the checkbox beside the property is activated. RELATED LINKS Changing the order of metronome marks on page 1439 Changing tempo text on page 1433 Hiding/Showing tempo marks on page 1435 Tempo mark font styles on page 1434 Changing the type and appearance of absolute tempo changes You can change which components are included in individual absolute tempo changes, and how they appear.
Tempo marks Positions of tempo marks Adding poco a poco text to gradual tempo changes You can add poco a poco text immediately after individual gradual tempo changes. NOTE You can also enter poco a poco directly into the tempo popover. However, this means the entry is treated as a tempo mark rather than a gradual tempo change, which changes the properties you can use on it. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Tempo marks Positions of tempo marks You can move tempo marks graphically in Engrave mode, but this does not change the rhythmic positions to which they are attached. In Engrave mode, each gradual tempo change has two square handles, one at the start and one at the end. You can move these handles to adjust the graphical position and length of gradual tempo changes. You cannot change the angle of gradual tempo changes.
Tempo marks Changing tempo text ● Continue RESULT The end position of the selected gradual tempo changes is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default position of all gradual tempo change ends project-wide in the Horizontal Position section of the Tempo page in Engraving Options.
Tempo marks Tempo mark font styles Changing the order of metronome marks on page 1439 Showing abbreviated tempo text You can show individual tempo marks with custom abbreviated text in some layouts, for example, if a long tempo mark extends beyond the page boundary in some part layouts but the abbreviated version fits within the boundary. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Tempo marks Hiding/Showing tempo marks 1 Gradual Tempo Text Font: Used for gradual tempo changes, such as "rallentando". 2 Immediate Tempo Text Font: Used for absolute tempo changes, such as “Adagio”. 3 Metronome Music Text Font: Used for note value glyphs in metronome marks, such as "". Must be SMuFL-compliant. 4 Metronome Text Font: Used for equal signs and numbers in metronome marks, such as “=76”. NOTE Changes made to font styles apply to the entire project, including part layouts.
Tempo marks Metronome marks Metronome marks Tempo marks often include a metronome mark value. Metronome marks show the speed of the music, indicated in beats per minute, or “bpm”. For example, a bpm of 60 means one beat per second. The more beats per minute, the faster the music. A metronome mark shown as a range Metronome marks can be precise, such as = 176, or can indicate an acceptable range, such as = 152-176.
Tempo marks Metronome marks 4. Choose the appropriate note duration and rhythm dot, if applicable, for Beat unit. RESULT The metronome mark value and beat unit is changed for the selected absolute tempo marks. This affects the tempo of playback, even if no metronome mark component is shown for those tempo marks. NOTE ● By default, any decimals you enter are hidden and the displayed metronome mark value appears as the nearest integer. However, metronome marks always reflect their exact values in playback.
Tempo marks Metronome marks metronome mark ranges with the lower value first. However, the metronome mark used for playback is always Tempo (bpm), regardless of whether that is the higher/lower value in the range. ● You can change the default separator used for metronome mark ranges in the Absolute Changes section of the Tempo page in Engraving Options. Changing the relative tempo mark value You can change the tempo of individual relative tempo marks, expressed as a percentage of the previous tempo mark.
Tempo marks Metronome marks RESULT The final tempo at the end of the selected gradual tempo changes is changed. For example, if you change the value to 20 on a gradual tempo change that started at 100 bpm, the final tempo is 20% of 100 bpm, which is 20 bpm. If you change the value to 120 on a gradual tempo change that started at 100 bpm, the final tempo is 120% of 100 bpm, which is 120 bpm.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes TIP You can change the default order of metronome marks relative to tempo text in all tempo marks project-wide on the Tempo page in Engraving Options.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes Project-wide engraving options for tempo marks on page 1428 Lengthening/Shortening items on page 431 Changing the line style of gradual tempo changes on page 1442 Changing the final tempo at the end of gradual tempo changes on page 1438 Tempo mark font styles on page 1434 Changing the style of gradual tempo changes You can change the style of individual gradual tempo changes, independently of your projectwide setting.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Changing tempo text on page 1433 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the line style of gradual tempo changes You can change the line style of individual gradual tempo changes whose style includes a continuation line, independently of your project-wide settings. NOTE This does not affect the appearance of gradual tempo changes with the text-only style. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the gradual tempo changes with dashed lines whose dash length you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate the following properties, individually or together, in the Tempo group: 3. ● Line dash length ● Line dash gap Change the values in the value fields.
Tempo marks Tempo equations PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the gradual tempo changes whose thickness you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Line thickness in the Tempo group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT Increasing the value makes dashed and solid lines thicker, decreasing the value makes dashed and solid lines thinner. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Tempo marks Tempo equations Hiding/Showing arrows on tempo equations You can hide/show arrows either side of all tempo equations project-wide, for example, to make tempo equations appear more visually different than metronome marks. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2. In the category list, click Tempo. 3. In the Absolute Changes section, choose one of the following options for Tempo equations: 4. ● Show arrows ● Omit arrows Click Apply, then Close.
Text items Text items exist at rhythmic positions within flows and allow you to display generic text in the music. You can customize the formatting of text in text items using the available text editor options, such as by applying different paragraph styles to each line of text and different character styles to each character.
Text items Types of text Types of text Generic text in Dorico Pro can exist as text items, either staff-attached or system-attached, or in text frames, which are fixed to the page rather than the music. There are dedicated features for other types of text that often appear in musical scores, such as tempo marks and dynamics. In Dorico Pro, there are the following types of text: Text items Text items exist at rhythmic positions within flows. They can display any text you enter, apart from tokens.
Text items Types of text Tempo mark containing text instruction in French and metronome mark Rehearsal marks Rehearsal marks are ordered sequences of letters or numbers that provide useful reference points. They are often shown in a rectangular enclosure.
Text items Types of text different purposes. For example, lyrics in a chorus line are shown in an italic font by default. Lyrics for a soprano duet with basso continuo accompaniment Fingering Fingerings use numbers and letters to recommend which fingers players should use for notes. Piano music containing multiple fingerings, including a substitution fingering and alternative fingerings Figured bass Figured bass is a shorthand that uses figures to specify the harmony above the notated bass notes.
Text items Types of text Chord symbols shown above slashes on the Clarinet and Piano staves to help the players improvise around the notated Cornet melody. Repeat markers Repeat markers show that musical material is to be repeated. They often involve jumping to different positions and sections in the music instead of moving through the music consecutively. For example, D.C. al Coda, D.S., and Fine are all repeat markers.
Text items Changing the paragraph style of text Hiding/Showing text items on page 1457 Changing the default font family on page 717 Text items on page 1446 Text frames on page 550 Flow headings on page 530 Page numbers on page 1199 Tacets on page 662 Tempo marks on page 1427 Rehearsal marks on page 1269 Playing techniques on page 1232 Dynamics on page 963 Lyrics on page 1071 Fingering on page 1008 Figured bass on page 994 Chord symbols on page 897 Repeat markers on page 1290 Comments on page 485 Changing t
Text items Aligning text items with the start of systems NOTE If you override the paragraph style of text in an individual text item or text frame, such as by making text bold, any changes you later make to corresponding parameters of the paragraph style are not applied to the overridden text. However, font size overrides are combined with the font size in the paragraph style.
Text items Enabling/Disabling text collision avoidance EXAMPLE Text aligned with the first note in the system Text aligned with the start of the system RELATED LINKS Inputting text items on page 385 Paragraph Styles dialog on page 712 Moving items graphically on page 584 Erasing the background of text items on page 1456 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Enabling/Disabling text collision avoidance You c
Text items Adding borders to text items When the property is deactivated, text items follow your project-wide setting for text collision avoidance. TIP You can enable/disable text collision avoidance for all text items project-wide on the Text page in Engraving Options. RELATED LINKS Changing the property scope on page 694 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Adding borders to text items You can add borders to individual text items, for example, if you want to make the boundaries of text items clear.
Text items Adding borders to text items Erasing the background of text items on page 1456 Adding borders to text frames on page 560 Changing the thickness of text item borders You can change the thickness of borders around individual text items, independently of your project-wide setting. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Text items Erasing the background of text items 3. ● T changes the padding between text items and their top edge. ● B changes the padding between text items and their bottom edge. Change the values in the value fields for the edges whose padding you want to change. RESULT The padding around the selected text items is changed. Increasing the values increases the padding, decreasing the values decreases the padding.
Text items Hiding/Showing text items EXAMPLE Text with non-erased background Text with erased background AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the padding between text items and each edge of their erased areas. RELATED LINKS Adding borders to text items on page 1454 Erasing the background of stems on page 1126 Hiding/Showing text items You can hide/show individual text items. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Text items Hiding/Showing text items RELATED LINKS Signposts on page 448 Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the property scope on page 694 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 691 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 58 Annotations on page 610 1458 Dorico Pro 4.1.
Ties A tie is a curved line that joins two notes of the same pitch. When notes are longer than the maximum duration of a bar in the prevailing time signature, they automatically appear in Dorico Pro as tie chains, that is, a sequence of adjacent notes joined with ties. Each sequence of ties, whether they join two notes or ten notes together, represents a single note with the duration of all the tied notes combined.
Ties Project-wide engraving options for ties middle of tie chains by activating the caret and moving it to the required rhythmic position within the tie chain. In Engrave mode, you can select individual notes and ties within tie chains and edit them independently. ● When you tie existing notes together, they might be consolidated into fewer or more notes within a tie chain, depending on the musical context, the time signature, and the position of the start of the note in the bar.
Ties Ties vs. slurs Ties vs. slurs Ties and slurs look superficially similar but differ in meaning. Ties indicate that a note should not be re-struck. They are used to join notes of the same pitch together. For example, ties can be used to extend notes across multiple bars. Although multiple notes can be included in a single tie chain, each tie in the chain only joins one notehead to the next notehead on the staff.
Ties Tie styles Half-dashed start The first halves of ties appear as dashed lines, the second halves as solid lines. Used to denote that a tie was written incompletely in the source in critical editions. Half-dashed end The first halves of ties appear as solid lines, the second halves as dashed lines. Used to denote that a tie was written incompletely in the source in critical editions.
Ties Tie styles ● Half-dashed end ● Editorial RESULT The style of the selected ties is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can set the precise parameters of each of these options project-wide on the Ties page in Engraving Options. For example, you can change the length and width of the stroke in Editorial ties, the diameter of dots and length of dashes, and the sizes of the gaps between dots and dashes.
Ties Tie styles RESULT Increasing the value makes dashes/dots bigger, decreasing the value makes dashes/dots smaller. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default size of dashes/dots in all dashed/dotted ties project-wide Engraving Options > Ties > Design > Advanced Options. You can also change the thickness of all tie styles on this page. However, you cannot change the thickness of ties individually.
Ties Tie curvature direction Erasing the background of time signatures on page 1496 Tie curvature direction The direction of tie curvatures is determined by the stem direction of the notes/chords at each end of the tie, the number of notes in chords at each end, and the number of voices on the staff. Tied single notes in single-voice contexts If a single voice is active and a tie joins two single notes, tie curvature direction is determined by the stem directions of the notes at either end of the tie.
Ties Non-standard ties ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the ties whose curvature direction you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. NOTE ● In Write mode, you can only select whole tie chains. In Engrave mode, you can select individual ties within tie chains.
Ties Non-standard ties The horizontal space for the parts of ties shown to the left of notes at the start of new systems/ frames may not be sufficient to show an ideal tie curve. In such cases, you can use Note Spacing in Engrave mode to adjust the spacing of individual notes at the start of systems/frames to give ties more space.
Ties Hiding/Showing laissez vibrer ties Tied notes building up a chord Notes tied to the following chord Multiple grace notes tied to the following chord Ties between different voices You can input ties between notes of the same pitch in different voices belonging to the same instrument. Ties between notes on different staves You can input ties between notes of the same pitch in different staves belonging to the same instrument, such as the two staves of a piano.
Ties Deleting ties RESULT Laissez vibrer ties are added to the selected notes when the property is activated, and are removed when the property is deactivated. Laissez vibrer ties are positioned automatically. TIP ● You can edit the length and shape of laissez vibrer ties individually like any other tie in Engrave mode. You can also change the default minimum length of all laissez vibrer ties project-wide in the Length section of the Ties page in Engraving Options.
Ties Splitting tie chains Changing the duration of notes on page 224 Splitting tie chains You can split tie chains at specified positions, for example, if you want to change the pitch halfway through a tie chain or delete individual ties within tie chains. This does not remove any other ties in the tie chain. NOTE If you want to split ties because Dorico Pro notated notes differently than you expected, you can change the default note and rest grouping settings according to different meters.
Ties Ties in Engrave mode Ties in Engrave mode In Engrave mode, each tie has five square handles that you can move independently. Some handles are connected to others, meaning moving one can affect the position of neighboring handles. Ties have the following handles in Engrave mode: 1 Left endpoint 2 Left control point 3 Tie height 4 Right control point 5 Right endpoint For example, moving the left endpoint moves both the start of a tie and the other handles apart from the right endpoint.
Ties Ties in Engrave mode 2. ● You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. ● You cannot move whole ties to the right/left, you can only move them upwards/ downwards. Move the ties or handles in any of the following ways: ● To move them a standard amount to the right, left, up, or down, press Alt/Opt plus the corresponding arrow key.
Ties Ties in Engrave mode Moving the left control point causes the tie height handle to move but does not affect the position of the left and right endpoints or right control point. This gives you fine control over the shape of ties while ensuring that the end result remains curved and smooth.
Ties Tie height Tie height The height of ties determines how far above/below their endpoints ties extend vertically. To avoid the end points or curve apexes of ties starting or ending on staff lines, Dorico Pro automatically makes small changes to the curvature shape, height, and vertical position of ties. These changes are small, but the placement of ties is subtly different depending on the position of notes relative to staff lines.
Ties Tie shoulder offset PROCEDURE 1. In Engrave mode, select the tie height (middle) handle of the ties whose height you want to change. TIP You can show handles on all items, not just selected items, by choosing Engrave > Show Handles > Always. This can make it easier to select individual handles on multiple items. 2. Move the handles in any of the following ways: ● To move them upwards/downwards a standard amount, press Alt/Opt plus the corresponding arrow key.
Ties Tie shoulder offset You can change the default shoulder offset of all ties project-wide in Engraving Options > Ties > Design > Advanced Options. There are separate settings for short ties and long ties. A long tie with default shoulder offset A long tie with increased shoulder offset You can also change the shoulder offset of ties individually by moving their control point handles in Engrave mode.
Ties Tie shoulder offset 3. Optional: Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other control point handle on the ties whose shoulders you want to adjust. RESULT Moving tie offset handles further apart reduces the shoulder offset, while moving them closer together increases the shoulder offset. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Time signatures Time signatures indicate the meter of music, and apply to all bars from where they first appear until a subsequent change of time signature. Meter describes the rhythmic pulse of music, and its division into beats and bars. A time signature is made up of two parts: numerator on top, and denominator underneath. These are the same mathematical terms as are used for fractions due to their similar arrangement.
Time signatures Project-wide engraving options for time signatures staff, then one quarter note in the 2/4 time signature equals one quarter note in the 6/8 time signature, meaning their barlines do not match. ● Dorico Pro does not automatically add beats to fill bars when you input time signatures unless Insert mode is activated. A 5/8 time signature input before an existing 4/4 time signature without Insert mode activated, leaving only three eighth note beats in the second 5/8 bar.
Time signatures Project-wide spacing gaps for time signatures Project-wide spacing gaps for time signatures You can change the minimum gaps between objects, including time signatures, on the Spacing Gaps page in Engraving Options.
Time signatures Types of time signatures Alternating An alternating time signature indicates a regular pattern that switches every bar between two or more time signatures, in the indicated order. For example, for a phrase with twelve eighth notes that needs to be emphasized 3+3+2+2+2, an alternating time signature of 6/8+3/4 might allow the two meters to be read more clearly.
Time signatures Cautionary time signatures NOTE Some composers, such as Boulez, have written fractional time signatures. Dorico Pro does not currently support fractional time signatures.
Time signatures Pick-up bars Pick-up bars Pick-up bars allow you to include music before the first full bar. They are also known as “upbeats” or an “anacrusis”. Often, pick-up bars only comprise a few beats whose main purpose is to lead in to the start of the piece. Pick-up bar of four eighth notes at the start of a piece in 9/8 Pieces that start with a pick-up bar have time signatures that are positioned at the start of the system as normal.
Time signatures Large time signatures PROCEDURE 1. Select the time signatures or the signposts of time signatures starting with an explicit irregular bar whose pick-up definition you want to change. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Group first bar as pick-up in the Time Signatures group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox.
Time signatures Large time signatures Narrow, serif time signatures shown once per bracketed group You can change the size of time signatures on different sizes of bracketed groups on the Time Signatures page in Engraving Options. You can also change whether all the staves between the brass and string brackets, which often include percussion, harp, and piano, are treated as a single bracket or separately for the purposes of showing large time signatures.
Time signatures Large time signatures Changing the positions of system objects on page 1404 Hiding bar numbers at time signatures shown at system object positions on page 852 Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Changing the size and position of time signatures You can change the size of time signatures in each layout independently, including changing their vertical position.
Time signatures Time signature styles Time signature styles Dorico Pro allows you to show time signatures in a variety of styles. For example, you can show denominators as a number or as a note value. Numerator styles The numerator is always one or more numbers, and can either show the total number of beats in the bar as a single number, or show how the total duration of the bar is subdivided into beat groups.
Time signatures Time signature styles Slash separator Space separator Hyphen separator You can change the style of all time signatures project-wide according to their type on the Time Signatures page in Engraving Options, and you can change the style of individual time signatures independently of your project-wide settings.
Time signatures Time signature styles Engrave toolbox on page 493 Changing the denominator style of time signatures You can change the denominator style of individual time signatures independently of your project-wide settings, for example, if you want to show the denominator as a note instead of a number. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Time signatures Time signature styles ● Penderecki’s symbol RESULT The open meter style of the selected time signatures is changed. No symbol open time signatures are indicated by signposts. TIP You can change the style of all open meter time signatures project-wide on the Time Signatures page in Engraving Options.
Time signatures Positions of time signatures TIP ● You can specify the separator style when inputting interchangeable time signatures using the popover. ● You can change the default separator of all interchangeable time signatures project-wide on the Time Signatures page in Engraving Options. ● Although they might look similar to interchangeable time signatures, aggregate time signatures behave differently.
Time signatures Positions of time signatures Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Input methods for time signatures and pick-up bars on page 284 Moving time signatures graphically You can move individual time signatures to new graphical positions without affecting the positions of any other items. NOTE ● These steps do not apply to time signatures shown at system object positions, which you can is selected in the Notes toolbox.
Time signatures Hiding/Showing time signatures TIP You can also change the value for Spacing offset in the Time Signatures group of the Properties panel to move time signatures horizontally. However, this also affects global note spacing around the rhythmic position of the time signature. The Spacing offset value is independent of note spacing changes.
Time signatures Ending interchangeable time signatures PROCEDURE 1. Select the time signatures you want to hide, or the signposts of time signatures you want to show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Hide time signature in the Time Signatures group. RESULT The selected time signatures are hidden in all layouts when Hide time signature is activated, and shown when it is deactivated.
Time signatures Changing the design of time signatures signature are shown until the next existing interchangeable time signature or the end of the flow, whichever comes first. Changing the design of time signatures You can change the design of time signatures in each layout independently, including changing the font style used for them, for example, if you want to use a plain font for time signatures in full score layouts but the standard time signature font in part layouts. PROCEDURE 1.
Time signatures Erasing the background of time signatures RELATED LINKS Edit Font Styles dialog on page 710 Large time signatures on page 1484 Changing the default font family on page 717 Erasing the background of time signatures You can erase the background of all time signatures on single staves project-wide that are spanned by ties. This can improve the readability of time signatures in such circumstances. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-E to open Engraving Options. 2.
Tremolos Tremolos are thick, slanted lines that cross individual stems or are positioned between multiple stems. They are used to indicate that notes are repeated, either individually or in sequences of multiple notes. Using tremolo strokes instead of notating each notehead can save horizontal space and make fast passages easier to read. The number of tremolo strokes indicates both how many times notes are repeated and how fast they are.
Tremolos Project-wide engraving options for tremolos Four quarter notes without tremolos Multi-note tremolos input between those quarter notes, in two pairs Tuplet tremolos Multiple notes in tuplets are repeated in the notated sequence. Tuplet tremolos are positioned between all the notes in the tuplet. Quarter notes in two different tuplets without tremolos Multi-note tuplet tremolos input across those tuplets Depending on the musical context, tremolos can be either measured or unmeasured.
Tremolos General placement conventions for tremolos RELATED LINKS Engraving Options dialog on page 704 Project-wide engraving options for stems on page 1118 General placement conventions for tremolos Single-note tremolos are positioned on note stems, whereas multi-note tremolos are positioned between the stems of two or more notes. When multi-note tremolos cross three or more notes, the tremolo strokes are positioned between all the notes.
Tremolos Tremolos in tie chains You can change the number of tremolo strokes shown on individual notes independently in Engrave mode. RELATED LINKS Ties on page 1459 Changing the number of tremolo strokes on individual notes in tie chains Dorico Pro automatically changes the number of tremolo strokes on subsequent notes in tie chains according to their duration. You can manually change the number of single-note tremolo strokes shown on each note in tie chains to represent your intended rhythm.
Tremolos Changing the speed of tremolos Changing the speed of tremolos You can change the speed of tremolos after they have been input by changing the number of strokes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes with tremolos whose speed you want to change. The buttons with the number of tremolo strokes corresponding to your selection are highlighted in the Tremolos section of the Repeat Structures panel. NOTE Select single-note tremolos and multi-note tremolos separately. 2.
Tremolos Deleting tremolos EXAMPLE All lines join stems Outermost line joins stems No lines join stems Deleting tremolos You can remove single-note tremolos and multi-note tremolos from notes separately without affecting the notes to which they applied. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes whose tremolo strokes you want to delete. 2.
Tremolos Moving tremolo strokes RELATED LINKS Moving notes/items rhythmically on page 459 Moving tremolo strokes You can move tremolo strokes upwards/downwards graphically. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE ● You cannot move tremolo strokes to the right/left. ● You cannot move tremolo strokes rhythmically, as they apply to specific notes, but you can move notes with tremolos to different rhythmic positions.
Tremolos Tremolos in playback ● When you first move tremolo strokes graphically, they may appear to move in the wrong direction or by a larger increment than you expected. This is because their positions are reset when you override those positions by moving them.
Tremolos Tremolos in playback TIP You can enable independent voice playback for individual instruments, for example, if you have tremolos in one voice and slurs in another voice. RELATED LINKS Playback techniques on page 799 Playback Options dialog on page 706 Changing the duration of tremolos in playback You can change both the default length of each note in unmeasured tremolos in playback, and the minimum number of tremolo strokes required to indicate tremolos should be unmeasured in playback.
Tuplets Tuplets indicate where a beat is divided into a different number of subdivisions than is usually expected according to the current meter. They can be used to fit more notes or fewer notes in a beat than usually exist in a beat, according to the usual pattern of subdivision. Because these subdivisions are not standard but tuplet notes use the same rhythmic notation as normal notes, tuplets must be clearly marked to show that their rhythmic duration is different.
Tuplets Nested tuplets Nested tuplets Nested tuplets are tuplets within larger tuplets that are often used to create complex rhythms. In Dorico Pro, there is no limit to the number of levels you can have in nested tuplets. EXAMPLE Nested tuplets Inputting nested tuplets You can input nested tuplets on empty staves and select existing tuplets and input nested tuplets within them. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, start note input. 2. Open the tuplets popover in any of the following ways: ● Press ; .
Tuplets Turning existing notes into tuplets RESULT Notes are input as nested tuplets, starting from the caret position. If multiples of the inner tuplet fit exactly inside the outer tuplet, you can continue inputting notes as the specified nested tuplet until you stop the tuplets manually. If multiples of the inner tuplet do not fit exactly inside the outer tuplet, the inner tuplet stops automatically at the end of the last tuplet that fits in the outer tuplet.
Tuplets Turning tuplets into normal notes Inputting tuplets on page 251 Notes toolbox on page 191 Turning existing notes into grace notes on page 1045 Turning tuplets into normal notes You can turn any existing tuplet notes into normal notes, for example, if you want to turn tuplet eighth notes into standard eighth notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select just the brackets, numbers/ratios, or signposts of the tuplets you want to turn into normal notes.
Tuplets Tuplet beams PROCEDURE 1. Select the tuplet brackets or tuplet numbers/ratios of the tuplets you want to allow/disallow to span barlines. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Spans barline in the Tuplets group. RESULT The selected tuplets span barlines when Spans barline is activated, and are automatically split at barlines when it is deactivated.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets Changing the direction of partial beams on page 875 Changing beam slants on page 867 Tuplet brackets Tuplet brackets show the duration of tuplets that are not joined by beams, such as triplet quarter notes, by showing the notes within the tuplet under a bracket.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets ● Properties is selected in the lower zone toolbar. ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing ● You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tuplet brackets you want to hide, or the signposts of tuplets whose brackets you want to show. You can do this in Write mode and Engrave mode. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Bracket in the Tuplets group. 3.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets ● Cross-staff above ● Cross-staff below RESULT The placement of the selected tuplet brackets is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP ● Deactivating Placement returns the selected tuplets to their default placement. ● You can also switch selected tuplets between being above/below the staff or cross-staff above/cross-staff below by pressing F .
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios TIP ● Deactivating the property returns the selected tuplets to your default settings. ● You can change the horizontal position of tuplet numbers/ratios on all tuplets project-wide in the Horizontal Position section of the Tuplets page in Engraving Options.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios A triplet with a ratio and note value indication Tuplet numbers/ratios help performers quickly identify the type of tuplet and how they must fit the number of notes indicated into the prevailing tempo and meter. In Dorico Pro, you can change the appearance of all tuplet numbers/ratios project-wide on the Tuplets page in Engraving Options, such as changing the font used for them, and for individual tuplets independently of this setting.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios TIP ● Deactivating Number returns the selected tuplets to the default setting. ● You can change which tuplet number/ratio appears on all tuplets project-wide in the Number and Ratio section of the Tuplets page in Engraving Options. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you want to hide indications of tuplets entirely, you might also need to hide the tuplet brackets.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios EXAMPLE Visual center Rhythmic center RELATED LINKS Tuplet brackets on page 1511 Moving items graphically on page 584 Signposts on page 448 Changing the font used for tuplet numbers/ratios By default, tuplet numbers/ratios are drawn in a bold, italic, Arabic font that is similar in appearance to fingerings. You can change the font used for all tuplet numbers/ratios projectwide. This also affects the appearance of note value indications. PROCEDURE 1.
Unpitched percussion The term “unpitched percussion” covers all percussion instruments that are not tuned to specific pitches. This includes instruments such as bass drum, guiro, maracas, cymbals, and shakers. Dorico Pro provides comprehensive support for unpitched percussion notation, with flexible options for combining music for multiple instruments into percussion kits that can then be displayed differently in different layouts.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kits and drum sets Percussion kits and drum sets A percussion kit is a collection of unpitched percussion instruments that are played by a single player. Drum sets are a particular type of percussion kit that are often used in pop and rock music. NOTE In this documentation, we use “percussion kit” to refer to both percussion kits and drum sets. In Dorico Pro, you can present percussion kits in different ways, including as a five-line staff and as a grid.
Unpitched percussion Per-flow notation options for unpitched percussion 2. In the kit instrument label, click the instrument menu open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. and choose Edit Percussion Kit to 3. Click Export Kit at the bottom of the dialog to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 4. In the File Explorer/macOS Finder, specify a name and location for the library file. 5. Click Save. RESULT The kit is exported and saved as a .doricolib file. TIP You can later import the .
Unpitched percussion Moving notes to different instruments in percussion kits RELATED LINKS Notation Options dialog on page 701 Moving notes to different instruments in percussion kits You can move notes to different instruments in the same percussion kit after they have been input. NOTE These steps do not apply in layouts using the single-line instruments kit presentation type. In such layouts, you can cross or move notes to other staves. PROCEDURE 1.
Unpitched percussion Notations on notes in percussion kits You can see the accent applied to each note if you switch to the single-line instruments presentation type. Tuplets When working in the grid and five-line staff kit presentation types, tuplets are added to all instruments in the same voice. You can switch to the single-line instruments presentation type to input cross-rhythms on each instrument separately.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kit presentation types single-line instruments presentation type do not appear when you switch to grid/five-line presentations. This is due to the complexity of combining a large number of different dynamics at the same rhythmic position, as allowed in the single-line instruments presentation, into the single position required for both the grid and five-line staff presentations.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kit presentation types Single-line instruments Kit instruments are shown as individual instruments with their own lines. Normal-sized staff labels are shown for each instrument. The editing area in the Edit Percussion Kit dialog lists all of the instruments in the order in which they appear in the score.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments, both as individual instruments and within percussion kits, can be notated in different ways, including using different notehead designs and positions.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments Percussion Instrument Playing Techniques dialog The Percussion Instrument Playing Techniques dialog allows you to edit the set of playing technique-specific noteheads defined for each unpitched percussion instrument.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments EXAMPLE Three different snare drum playing technique-specific noteheads followed by two clash cymbal playing technique-specific noteheads All of these settings are saved in the percussion instrument within your project, and you can export them from one project and import them into others. NOTE Overrides for articulations and tremolos are not currently reflected in playback, but this is planned for future versions.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments The Override Percussion Noteheads dialog comprises the following: 1 Instrument name Displays the name of the percussion instrument whose noteheads are listed in the dialog. 2 Playing techniques table Contains the noteheads for the selected percussion instrument, arranged into the following columns: ● Playing Technique: Displays the playing technique associated with the notehead in the corresponding row of the table.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments TIP If you select a single note in percussion kits using five-line staff or gird presentations, the current playing technique is shown above the rhythmic grid. 2. Cycle through the available playing techniques for the selected unpitched percussion instruments in any of the following ways: ● To cycle upwards, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Up Arrow . ● To cycle downwards, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Down Arrow .
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments 4. Click OK to add the selected playback technique as a new playing technique-specific notehead. 5. From the Notehead set menu, select the notehead you want for the playing techniquespecific notehead. NOTE To use the default notehead set as defined on the Notes page in Engraving Options, leave Notehead set as (Unset). 6.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends NOTE This does not affect the appearance of playing technique-specific noteheads in grid and singleline instrument kit presentation types. RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 106 Override Percussion Noteheads dialog on page 1527 Percussion legends Percussion legends list the percussion instruments in use when using the five-line presentation type.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends Adding percussion legends to five-line staff kit presentations You can add percussion legends at specific rhythmic positions to indicate the instruments in the kit. Percussion legends can show all instruments in the kit or only instruments sounding within the specified range. NOTE Percussion legends only appear when kits use the five-line staff percussion kit presentation type and in the layout in which they were added.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends 2. In the Properties panel, activate Legend type in the Percussion Legends group. NOTE The property is already activated for sounding instrument percussion legends. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Legend ● Sounding instruments RESULT The legend type of the selected legends is changed.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends Showing short instrument names in percussion legends Percussion legends use full instrument names by default, but you can choose to use short names to save space. PREREQUISITE ● The lower zone is shown. ● Properties ● If you are in Engrave mode, Graphic Editing is selected in the lower zone toolbar. is selected in the Engrave toolbox. PROCEDURE 1. Select the percussion legends whose instrument name lengths you want to change.
Unpitched percussion Voices in percussion kits RELATED LINKS Engrave toolbox on page 493 Voices in percussion kits Dorico Pro automatically combines music into a smaller number of voices when multiple percussion instruments are presented in a five-line staff or as a grid, even if they contain different rhythms. By default, music is combined into one up-stem voice and one down-stem voice.
Unpitched percussion Unpitched percussion in Play mode NOTE You do not have to change the voice number if you are switching between up- and downstem voices as the number corresponds to the voice number for each stem direction. 6. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The default stem direction and voice of the selected instrument is changed.
Unpitched percussion Universal Indian Drum Notation You can move notes belonging to unpitched percussion instruments rhythmically in Play mode. However, like other instruments, you cannot move notes between percussion instruments, even if they are in the same percussion kit. NOTE ● Endpoints must have an appropriate percussion map assigned to them. ● You cannot change the duration of unpitched percussion notes within Play mode. This is planned for future versions.
Voices For many instruments, such as flute or trombone, each staff usually contains a single musical line in a single voice that is read from left to right along the staff. When multiple, independent lines must be shown in a single staff, each line can be a separate voice.
Voices Per-flow notation options for voices Per-flow notation options for voices You can find options controlling how notes in multiple voices are positioned in each flow independently on the Voices page in Notation Options. The options on this page allow you to change the position and order of notes in multiple-voice contexts, and choose when noteheads in different voices can overlap. Musical examples demonstrate how each option affects the appearance of your music.
Voices Allowing/Disallowing noteheads in opposing voices to overlap Changing music area colors on page 53 Changing the voice of existing notes on page 465 Stem direction on page 1119 Annotations on page 610 Status bar on page 38 Allowing/Disallowing noteheads in opposing voices to overlap You can allow/disallow the noteheads of unison notes in opposing voices to overlap in different contexts in each flow independently.
Voices Note positions in multiple-voice contexts A phrase with multiple voice columns for some beats on the top staff Interlocking notes in different voices can be positioned in two ways: 1. Notehead to notehead, which allows noteheads to overlap partially. This voice order often takes up less horizontal space than positioning notes stem to stem, as notes can overlap. 2. Stem to stem, which does not allow noteheads to overlap. This voice order keeps notes in different voices separate.
Voices Note positions in multiple-voice contexts Voice column index The voice column index is used to determine the positions of notes when multiple columns are needed, for example, when notes in two voices are a second interval apart and therefore cannot be placed directly above each other vertically, instead they must partially overlap. Dorico Pro automatically changes the voice column of voices according to the number of active voices and the pitch of notes.
Voices Note positions in multiple-voice contexts EXAMPLE Interlocking notes in opposing voices positioned notehead to notehead. Interlocking notes in opposing voices positioned stem to stem.
Voices Unused voices Unused voices An unused voice is one that contains no notes anywhere in the project. Any unused voices are automatically deleted when you close a project, but you cannot manually delete voices once they have been created. You can create as many voices as you want in each staff. NOTE Deleting all notes in a voice does not delete the voice immediately.
Glossary A action (expression maps) A control in expression maps that determines how individual switches are controlled in order to trigger the required playback technique or combination of playback techniques. action (harps) The mechanism that raises or lowers the pitch of harp strings, as controlled by the position of each pedal.
Glossary caret Shown during note input, the caret is the vertical line that extends above and below the staff and indicates the rhythmic position at which items are input. Also known as an “insertion point”. In Dorico Pro, the caret, cursor, and mouse pointer are related but serve different purposes. See also rhythmic grid, note input, cursor, mouse pointer. casting off The act of fixing the layout of pages of music, such as defining a set number of systems per page or the number of bars per system.
Glossary constant point A change in value in a track or lane in Play mode that sets a fixed value until the next point in the track or lane. See also linear point, value line. context menu A menu that you can access by right-clicking on a mouse or double-tapping on a touchpad. Its options vary by the location of the mouse pointer and what is selected when you access it, but it most commonly contains options also found on the Edit menu.
Glossary enharmonic equivalent An alternative spelling of a note that uses a different scale degree and accidental but produces the same sounding pitch, such as G♯ and A♭. ensemble A predefined collection of players, each holding instruments that are often used together, such as string quartet, wind quintet, brass quintet, string ensemble, and double woodwinds. envelope A change in sound over time that comprises multiple stages, such as attack, sustain, and decay.
Glossary full score A score comprising all of the music for all of the players and their instruments, typically laid out in a specific order. The order used varies according to the ensemble for which the music is written. In full scores for orchestra, the players are typically ordered from the highest wind instrument at the top of the page, for example, piccolo, to the lowest string instrument at the bottom of the page, for example, contrabass, with brass, keyboards, voices, and percussion in between.
Glossary hook A short line that extends from other lines, most commonly at a right angle, that helps to clarify the end position of lines. In Dorico Pro, hooks can be used at the end of pedal lines, octave lines, repeat endings, and tuplet brackets. horizontal justification The alignment of musical content to the left and right edges of the frame.
Glossary L layout A page-based presentation of the music for one or more players in one or more flows, for example, a full score that contains all players or an instrumental part that contains only a single player. See also flow, player. layout options Options that affect the setup of an individual layout, such as page and staff size. These options can be set in each layout independently in the Layout Options dialog. See also layout.
Glossary multi-bar rest A consolidation of multiple adjacent empty bars into a smaller unit, typically shown as a single bar with the total number of bars' rest written above the staff. A multi-bar rest normally shows an H-bar symbol, which is a thick horizontal line with vertical lines at each end. In some older published scores, a multi-bar rest of up to nine bars in length is shown using a combination of double whole and whole rests. Also known as a “multirest”.
Glossary page view A viewing option that shows music laid out on a page with a fixed width and height, as it appears when printed. See also galley view. panel Wide palettes of tools on the left, right, and bottom edges of the program window that are available in all modes, but their content varies in each mode. part The music belonging to the instruments played by one or more players, shown on its own rather than in a full score.
Glossary player A musician who plays one or more instruments. Players are defined as either single players or section players and are assigned to flows and layouts. See also single player, section player, flow, layout. player group A collection of players that comprises either a subset of the main ensemble, such as a choir within an orchestra, or a separate group, such as an off-stage brass group or second orchestra.
Glossary Q quantization In music, the act of adjusting the positions and durations of notes so they align with the nearest defined beat. This process eliminates small variations in rhythm and duration produced naturally by live performers, and can be useful when importing/exporting MIDI data as quantized music produces neater notation. R rastral size The size of a full five-line staff, measured from the bottom line to the top line.
Glossary compliant fonts for certain areas of the program, such as clefs and dynamic glyphs, to ensure it can locate the correct symbol. SMuFL-compliant fonts include Bravura, Petaluma, and November 2.0. space A unit of measurement in music engraving based on the distance between the center of two adjacent staff lines. Practically all notation items are scaled in proportion to the size of a space, for example, a notehead is normally one space tall.
Glossary system fullness indicator The highlighted region in the right page margin that is shown when Note Spacing is activated in Engrave mode. It combines a color (green, purple, or red) and a percentage to indicate how full the system is. system object An item that applies to all staves in the system, but is not necessary to show on every staff, such as tempo marks and rehearsal marks.
Glossary V value line A visual representation of value over time in tracks or lanes in Play mode. Fully horizontal value lines indicate a constant value, while angled value lines indicate a smooth change in value within a given duration, usually between two points. See also constant point, linear point. vertical justification The spreading out of staves and systems across the full height of frames with as even a distribution of space as possible.
Index A a2. See player labels abbreviated dates 555 dynamics 963, 976 instrument names 175, 178, 179, 683, 1375 player labels 683 repeat markers 1291 staff labels 149, 1372, 1374, 1375, 1408 tempo text 1434 absolute channel change actions 788 absolute font size 710, 712 absolute tempo changes 1428 components 1429 Academico font 708 accelerando. See gradual tempo changes. See also tempo marks accents. See articulations acciaccaturas.
Index activating (continued) mouse input 191, 222 note input 213, 215, 218 note spacing 493, 579 pitch before duration 191 playback 30 player sorting 122 rest input 191 scissors 191 staff spacing 493, 646 system track 426 tuplet input 191 adagio. See tempo marks add intervals popover. See note tools popover Add Marker dialog 399 add-on switches 779, 787 added notes chord symbols 320 adding. See inputting additional endings 407, 409, 1285 voices 228, 1335, 1538 additive time signatures.
Index aperture hairpins 979 appearance default settings 698, 701, 704 items 692 resetting 437 appending flows 77 player numbers 684 subito 976 verse numbers 1092 applying. See assigning. See also activating appoggiaturas. See grace notes Arabic numerals chord diagrams 918 fingerings 1031 fret numbers 918 page numbers 523, 1200 staff labels 1380 archaic accidental cancellation 815 arco.
Index articulations (continued) placement 818, 820–822 playback 706, 776, 798–800, 823 playing technique-specific noteheads 798 position 584, 817–820, 822 showing 955 slurs 818, 821, 1346 spacing 584 split stems 817 staves 822 stems 818 symbols 728 ties 819, 823, 1459 tremolos 798 tuplets 271 types 816 vertical position 822 artificial harmonics 1127 accidentals 1130 changing 1134 hiding 1128 partials 1129 pitch 1129 playback 1127–1129 showing 1128 styles 1131, 1134 assigning 61 flows to frame chains 548 fl
Index bands 75 adding 69, 110 player order 106, 122 staff grouping 887 templates 69, 75 banjo.
Index barlines (continued) default settings 829, 830 deleting 454 double 830, 832, 834, 1296 dynamics 966–969 end barlines 833, 834 engraving options 829 fermatas 1057 final. See final barlines formatting 496, 728 frame breaks 655 gaps 910, 969, 1060, 1234, 1266, 1456 grace notes 1046 gradual tempo changes 1432 grand staff instruments 838 hiding 285, 833, 834, 910, 969, 1234, 1266, 1456, 1480 hymnal-style 829 initial. See systemic barlines inputting 301, 304, 307, 309, 828 joins.
Index beam groups (continued) defining 860, 882 half-bar 860 notation options 860 pick-up bars 1483 resetting 864 selecting 422 stem directions 1120 time signatures 861 beam lines direction 875 gaps 876 number 875 thickness 864 beam slants 866 changing 867 grace notes 1050 beaming 860, 862, 880 accidentals 813 angles 866, 867, 880, 881 centered beams 868, 869 corners 874 cross-staff.
Index bomb dive. See dives bongos. See unpitched percussion booklets 604 duplex printing 605 printing 603, 604 borders 610, 1454 chord symbols 911 exporting 598 harp pedaling 1208, 1209 instrument change labels 712 line annotations 756 lines 1265 padding 712, 911, 1209, 1455 printing 594 tacets 662, 712 text 560, 712, 756, 1265, 1454 thickness 561, 1209, 1265, 1455 Boston chord symbols 899 bottom zone. See lower zone bowing. See playing techniques. See also slurs boxes. See borders.
Index brass instruments (continued) horn branch indicators 1017, 1030 parts 171 player order 106, 122 playing techniques 369 project templates 75 slide positions 1031 transposition 108, 132, 171 Bravura music font 708 breaking multi-bar rests 1336, 1341 tie chains 1470 breaks frame 659 page 659 system 656 breath marks 1052, 1054 appearance 434 condensing 670 deleting 454 inputting 336–338 moving 459, 463, 584, 1058 multiple at same position 1056 placement 1055 position 1055 types 434, 1054 vertical positio
Index categories ensembles 110, 113, 125 lines 382, 747–751, 754, 756, 761, 1247 noteheads 732, 737, 1095, 1099 playing techniques 740, 745 templates 69, 75, 887 cautionary accidentals 813, 814 figured bass 1005 hiding 805, 814, 1063, 1130 parentheses 813, 814 showing 805, 814, 1063, 1130 tie chains 805, 1130, 1467 trills 1144 cautionary clefs 931 cautionary fingering 1019 appearance 1009 hiding 1019 parentheses 1009, 1019 showing 1019 cautionary key signatures 1065 cautionary time signatures 1482 CC64 ped
Index chord symbol regions (continued) popover 322 showing 901, 902 chord symbols 248, 897 accidentals 141, 146, 148, 318, 898–900, 906 added notes 320 alignment 898–900, 903 alterations 898, 899 altered bass notes 316, 900 appearance 720, 721, 723, 724, 898, 899 backgrounds 910 barlines 903, 910 brackets. See parenthesized chord symbols capos 141, 146, 147, 149, 899 changing 434, 898, 899 components.
Index circle (continued) pitches 471, 481 playing techniques 739 rehearsal mark enclosures 1270 rhythms 471, 481 string indicators 1034, 1036 symbols 739, 756, 761 tapping 1186, 1189 clarinet. See instruments clash cymbals. See unpitched percussion Classical ornaments 344 trills 1151, 1154 classical guitar.
Index colors (continued) pages 51, 53, 519 playhead 53 playing techniques 742 resetting 51–53 rests 1332 rhythmic grid 53 slash regions 1316 tablature 53, 1107, 1420, 1423 text 386, 558, 712, 715 unison ranges 1413 voices 53, 1538, 1539 windows 51 columns accidentals 807, 809 clefs 172 figured bass 994 lines 1252 markers 400 missing fonts 71 transposition 172 videos 400 voices 1540, 1542 combinations playback techniques 786, 790, 798 tremolos 798 combined dynamics. See dynamics combining.
Index condensing (continued) rests 667, 670, 677 results 672, 676 selecting signposts 428 signposts 448 staff labels 667, 677, 1380, 1384, 1386–1388 to indications 685 unisons 672, 683, 685 voices 670, 672 Condensing Change dialog 677 condensing groups 674 calculations 670 changing settings 676, 677, 680 creating 674 default settings 667 excluding 675 including 675 manual condensing 680 conditions expression maps 782, 790 conductor score. See condensing.
Index copying (continued) chord diagram shapes 924 Chord mode 250 divisi 1412 dynamics 459 exploding 465 flows 77, 162 frames 504, 507, 509, 514, 518, 525, 541 Insert mode 449 instruments 121 layouts 169 lyrics 1074 notes 456–458, 817, 874 notes into voices 457 page formatting 518, 689 page templates 504, 507, 509, 514, 518, 525 part formatting 688 pitches 472, 481 players 121 playing techniques 1241 properties 691 reducing 464 slurs 459, 817 staff spacing 650 staves 1412 tremolos 874 copyright 73 adding 7
Index cues (continued) engraving options 946 fermatas 955 filter 428 galley view 949 hiding 949, 950 highlights 961, 962 inputting 417, 419, 420 instrument names 953 instrument transpositions 953 instruments 418 labels.
Index custom playing techniques (continued) importing 696, 746 inputting 370, 372 percussion 1525–1529 playback 799 saving as default 746 custom score layouts.
Index default settings (continued) dialogs 27 dynamics 459 exporting 76, 696, 698 figured bass 397, 995 file names 600 flow headings 530 flows 701 font styles 717 hand tool 39 importing 696 instrument names 55, 178, 179, 182 jazz articulations 1196 key commands 18, 58, 61 layouts 171, 655, 698 library 696 lines 751 marquee tool 39 mouse input 207 note grouping 701 note input options 222, 703 note spacing 574, 575 noteheads 1101 overlapping notes 701 playback 706 player labels 684 playing techniques 1238 pr
Index deleting (continued) tremolos 1502 trill intervals 1147 tuplets 1509 unison notes 464 videos 188 voices 1544 demo projects 67 denominators styles 1487, 1489 time signatures 1478, 1479 dense chords accidental stacking 808 depressed keys 201 depth nested tuplets 1507 deselecting.
Index distance (continued) cues 947 fermatas 1055 guitar techniques 1189 noteheads 872 rehearsal mark enclosures 1270 staff labels 1372, 1374 staves. See staff spacing stems 872 system indents 1374, 1406 text borders 561, 712, 1455 distribution bars per system 652 beats in bars 882 divisions per octave 770 staves per frame 618 systems per frame 653 dives 1169, 1174, 1185 handles 1181, 1183 inputting 354, 355, 357, 358 moving 584 popover 342 pre-dives. See guitar pre-bends vibrato bar. See vibrato bar.
Index down-stem voices. See voices downloads 67 dpi 608 draft staves. See sketch staves dragging 39, 442. See also drawing drags. See grace notes drawing crosshairs 587 drop frame timecodes 1280 drops. See jazz articulations drum editor 1536 drum kits. See percussion kits. See also drum sets Drum Pads panel 204 drum rolls.
Index dynamics (continued) expression maps 783 expressive text. See dynamic modifiers filters 428 flared hairpins 982, 983 font styles 991 force 963 formatting 728 gradual. See gradual dynamics grand staff instruments 313, 315, 974 grouping 988, 989 hairpins. See hairpins handles 431, 979 hiding 955, 972–974, 976 humanize 992 hyphens 310, 973, 980 immediate 963 inputting 310, 312, 313, 315 intensity 434, 971 length 431, 584, 979 levels. See dynamic levels linking 459, 989–991 lyrics 964 modifiers.
Index eighth notes (continued) swing playback 296 tempo equations 1444 tuplets 254 elbowed beams. See centered beams electric guitar. See fretted instruments ellipse chord enclosures 1424 note enclosures 1424, 1425 empty bars cues 958 deleting 826 inputting 305, 306 multi-bar rests 1336, 1337 rests.
Index engraving options (continued) glissando lines 1164 guitar bends 1176 holds 1053 jazz articulations 1196 key signatures 1060 ledger lines 1094 lines 1250 lyrics 1071 markers 1275, 1282 music fonts 708 notes 1094, 1118 numbered bar regions 1310 octave lines 940 ornaments 1136 ossia staves 1400 pauses 1053 pedal lines 1214 percussion 1531 playing techniques 1233 project templates 75, 76 rehearsal marks 1269 repeat endings 1284 repeat markers 1291 rests 1332 rhythm slashes 1317 saving as default 704 sear
Index exploding 213, 232, 465 Insert mode 250, 449 MIDI import 88 note input 213, 232 exponential hairpins.
Index fermatas 1052, 1053 appearance 434 barlines 1057 changing 1056 crosshairs 587 cues 955 deleting 454 duration 434 hiding 955 inputting 335–338 moving 459, 584 multiple at same position 1056 number per staff 1056 placement 1055 position 1055 showing 955 single staves 1056 staff-relative placement 436 types 434, 1053, 1056 voices 1056 fifth chord diagrams 703 figured bass 994, 999, 1000 accidentals 396, 995 alignment 995 appearance 995, 1003, 1004, 1006, 1007 brackets 394, 995, 998, 999 cautionary accid
Index filters (continued) tempo marks 428 voices 428 final barlines 304, 830, 832, 833 end of systems 834 inputting 307, 309 repeat barlines 834 final tempo 1438 Find Tempo dialog 401 important markers 1279 finding. See searching fine barlines 834 d.c. al 1290 font 1291 hiding 1296 inputting 410, 411 sections 1290 showing 1296 size 1291 tacet al 1338 finger tapping.
Index flags (continued) stems 1118 symbols 728 flams. See grace notes. See also playing techniquespecific noteheads flared hairpins 982 size 983 flat braces 885 flat slurs 1353 flats. See accidentals flipping 436, 1355 flips. See jazz ornaments floor tom.
Index font styles (continued) condensing 683, 712, 1384, 1386 dedications 1039 default 717 dialog 710 divisi 1384, 1417 divisi staff labels 1415 dynamics 991 exporting 696, 710 family 717 figured bass 1003, 1004 fingerings 928, 1017, 1018 glyphs 708, 991 importing 696, 710 line text 1262 lyrics 1072, 1083, 1084, 1087 markers 1278 missing fonts 71 multi-bar rests 1340 music 708 notations 708 notes 708 numbered bar regions 1306, 1310 ossia staff labels 1400 page numbers 1200 paragraph styles.
Index fps 189 fractions arpeggio signs 1159, 1161 chord symbols 898, 899 figured bass 394 fingerings 1010 glissando lines 1168 guitar bends 1175 lines 754 tempo marks 299, 300, 401, 1436, 1439 time signatures 285, 1478, 1480 tremolos 1504, 1505 frame breaks 495, 612, 659 bar repeats 660 barlines 655 clefs 931 condensing 670 copying to other layouts 688, 689 deleting 655, 662 divisi 1407 filter 428 first page on the left 628 glissando lines 1167 hiding staves 620 inserting 653, 654, 660 key signatures 1065
Index frets (continued) spacing 137 starting number 717, 918, 926, 928 string number 1106 fretted instruments 137 adding 108, 133 arpeggio fingering 1025, 1026 capos. See capos changing tuning 108, 135, 137, 139 chord diagrams 717, 917, 919 chord symbols 141, 144, 906 exporting tunings 140 fingerings 274, 1009, 1020 frets 137 guitar bends 1169 guitar techniques.
Index gaps (continued) tablature 1421 tacets 665 tempo marks 1442 text 712, 714, 715, 1264, 1455 text collision avoidance 1453 ties 1464, 1496 time signatures 1479, 1480, 1496 General MIDI 85, 91, 775, 788 Generate Chord Symbols From Selection dialog 325 generated trills 1151, 1152 playback 1152 generating chord symbols 325 harp pedaling 378 German staff labels 55 ghost notes 1108, 1110 guitar. See dead notes. See also bracketed noteheads gli altri.
Index grace notes (continued) speed 1051 stems 1044, 1047, 1050 string indicators 1036 ties 245, 1467 transformations 467, 1045, 1046 transposing 257 trills 1151 types 1047 unscaling 1046 voices 1044 gradient background 52 gradual dynamics 963, 979 alignment 967 angles 584, 979 aperture 979 appearance 980 backgrounds 1126 barlines 967, 968 centered text 977 continuation lines 980 continuous hairpins 981 dashed 980 dotted 980 end position 967, 985 flared hairpins 982, 983 font styles 991 handles 431, 979 hy
Index grids (continued) groups 154 Hub 67 percussion kits 153, 154, 156, 1385, 1523, 1524 rhythmic 208 staff labels 1372, 1376 staves 1385, 1523 groups bar repeats 1302, 1307, 1308 beams. See beam groups braces 884, 891 brackets 884, 891 condensing 670, 674 divisi 1388, 1410, 1411, 1415 dynamics 988, 989 guitar bends 1169, 1179 instruments. See instrument groups notes. See note grouping percussion kits 149, 153–155, 1385 players. See player groups playing techniques 1238, 1239, 1244, 1245 rests.
Index guitar techniques (continued) staff-relative placement 1192 tablature 1191 H H-bars. See multi-bar rests hairpins. See gradual dynamics half depressed pedal lines 1214, 1215, 1217, 1218 half diminished scales 321, 475, 482 half notes 15, 195, 215, 223, 224 beats 303 metronome marks 296 tempo equations 1444 tuplets 254 half step trills inputting 345 half-bar beam grouping 860, 882 half-diminished. See scales.
Index harp pedaling (continued) inputting 369, 377, 378 moving 459, 463, 584 note names 1205, 1206 notes out of range 1107 padding 1209 partial 1211 playback 1204 popover 369 showing 1207 signposts 448, 1204, 1207 headers flows 530 frame constraints 564 running headers 1041 height braces 885 brackets 885–887, 891, 893, 894, 914 breath marks 1058 chord diagrams 929 chord symbols 914 drum pads 204 enclosures 844, 1270 flared hairpins 983 frames 539, 564 graphic slices 568 guitar bends 1176 hairpins 979, 983
Index hiding (continued) lines 431, 439, 1000, 1241, 1242, 1383, 1441 lyrics 955 margins 439 markers 1276 metronome marks 1439 multi-bar rests 1337 note colors 439, 610, 1107 notes 737, 1319 numbered bar regions 1310, 1312 octave transpositions in cue labels 951 ornaments 955 ossia staves 1398, 1399 padding rests 958, 1319 page numbers 523, 631, 1201, 1202 panels 31, 38, 41, 43, 106, 113 parentheses 805, 814, 912, 969, 1110 partial harp pedaling 1211 pedal lines 1223–1225 percussion legend signposts 1531 p
Index horizontal position (continued) chord diagrams 929 chord symbols 900, 903 clefs 932 dynamics 964, 965, 977 figured bass 995, 1003 frames 538 fret numbers 929 H-bars 1339 instrument names 179 lines 459, 463, 1251, 1252, 1257, 1268 lyrics 1077, 1079 modifiers 977 multi-bar rests 1339 notes 574, 581, 1540, 1542, 1543 ornaments 1138 player group labels 1383 playing techniques 1233 poco a poco 977 rehearsal marks 1270 rests 1328, 1334, 1339 rhythm dots 1106 staccato 820 staff labels 179 staves 632, 1395 s
Index index rehearsal marks 1271 tokens 551 vertical stacking 943, 1238 voice columns. See voice column index Indian drum notation 931, 1537 Indiana chord symbols 899 indicators audio engine 38 caret 974 clefs 937, 938 condensing 683 divisi 1417 fingerings 276, 1030 frame fullness 648 horn branches 1030 MIDI input 38 octaves 937, 938 players 683 string fingerings 1031, 1032, 1106 system fullness 581 tempo. See tempo marks thumbs 276 trill intervals 1143, 1150 unisons 685 voices 974 information.
Index inputting (continued) key commands 61 key signatures 278, 280, 281, 283, 804 layouts 165 left-hand fingerings 278 level changes 373, 374, 376 line text 1260 lines 366, 370, 372, 381, 382, 384 lyrics 389, 391 markers 399, 400 metronome marks 294, 299, 300 microtonal accidentals 812 MIDI 264, 271 mouse input 207, 222 music symbols 745, 749, 750 mutual exclusion groups 791 nested slurs 1357 nested tuplets 1507 notehead brackets 1110 noteheads 737, 738, 1528, 1529 notes 214, 215, 218, 222, 225, 232, 233,
Index instrument change labels 126, 129 borders 129, 712 editing 130, 131 font style 129, 712 hiding 1379 prefixes 130 showing 1379 suffixes 130 instrument changes 129 allowing 129 disallowing 129 inputting 133, 215, 218 labels.
Index instruments (continued) staff grouping 887 staff labels 179, 1372, 1375, 1376, 1378, 1380 staff size 640 staves 49, 620, 621, 974, 1391–1393, 1395, 1523 strings 137 sustaining 993 tablature 1420, 1422 templates 69, 110, 113 transposing 132, 167.
Index jazz ornaments 1194, 1195 inputting 341, 345, 346 popover 341 types 341 Jazz Standards chord symbols 899 job types 591, 603 page ranges 596, 597 printing 603 selecting 603 joins barlines 829, 838, 840, 841, 887, 895, 1400 beams 862, 863, 870, 874 ossia staves 1400 pedal lines 1222 staves with barlines 839 stems 870, 874 JPEG files graphics frames 563 jump bar 63 aliases 65, 66 Commands 63, 65 entries 63 Go To 64, 65 showing 65 jumps hiding 1296 inputting 410, 411 rehearsal marks 442, 1271 repeat 1290
Index keys major 1061 minor 1061 signatures. See key signatures transposing 257, 258 kick drum. See unpitched percussion kits. See percussion kits kneed beams. See centered beams L l.v. ties. See laissez vibrer ties labels condensing. See player labels cues. See cue labels divisi 1414, 1417–1419 instrument changes 129–131 instruments 179, 1371 markers 1275 ossia staves 1400 percussion kits 1385, 1523 player groups 1382, 1383 staves.
Index layouts (continued) frame order 548 frames 541, 543 front matter 1039 full scores 164 graphics files 598, 608 harp pedaling 1207 headers 1041 hiding ossia staves 1399 hiding staves 619–621 image resolution 599 indents 1405, 1406 instrument change labels 1379 instrument filters.
Index left-hand fingering (continued) popover 278 position 1022 pull-offs. See hammer-ons size 1020 slides 1027, 1028 string indicators 1036 tapping. See tapping left-hand guitar tapping. See tapping legato note durations 224 playback 1370 playing technique. See playing techniques. See also playback techniques slurs 1342, 1370 legends percussion. See percussion legends leggiero.
Index lines (continued) duration 1255, 1256 enclosures 844, 1270 end position 1257 ends 756, 759, 1249 engraving options 1250 erased backgrounds 1266, 1267 figured bass. See figured bass fingerings 1031 fonts 1262 frame breaks 1268 gaps 751, 754, 756, 1250 glissando. See glissando lines grace notes 1047, 1252 gradual tempo changes 1443 groups 1382 guitar bends. See guitar bends. See also vibrato bar handles 1268 harp pedaling 1204, 1211 hiding 431, 955, 1000, 1241 holds.
Index lower zone 30, 36, 200 hiding 38 showing 38 lute. See fretted instruments lv ties.
Index markers (continued) default settings 1275 deleting 400, 454 dialog 399 engraving options 1275 exporting 94, 99 filter 428 font style 1278 hiding 1276, 1296 important 401, 1279 importing 96 inputting 399 moving 459, 1278 panel 400 position 1275 repeats 403, 404, 1290 showing 1276, 1296 staff 1276 staff spacing 617, 643 text 96, 399, 400, 1277 timecodes 399, 1278, 1282 vertical position 617, 643, 1275, 1276 marks rehearsal. See rehearsal marks tempo.
Index MIDI (continued) note range 126 opening 70 order 781 overlapping notes 224 percussion maps 793, 796 playback 793 quantization 92 range 126 recording.
Index molto (continued) font style 991 marcato. See articulations tempo marks 294, 297 monochrome graphics 609 monophony. See polyphony moon noteheads 1098, 1100 mordents. See ornaments morendo. See gradual tempo changes. See also tempo marks mosso. See tempo marks motors. See playing techniques mouse input 206 activating 191, 222 deactivating 191, 222 settings 207 movements 22, 161 adding 161 exporting 79, 80 flow headings 530 importing 77, 78 multiple on pages 628 splitting 485 tacets 662 movies.
Index multi-bar rests (continued) key signatures 1339 moving 1339 numbers 728 placement 1340 showing 1337 signposts 448, 1341 single bars 1337, 1338 splitting 1341 staves 1340 symbols 728 tacet al fine 1338 tacets 662, 664 time signatures 1339 width 1339 multi-note tremolos. See tremolos multi-pasting 457, 458 multi-rests.
Index MusicXML (continued) resetting beaming 864 staff labels 1372 muted notes. See dead notes mutes. See playing techniques muting notes 430 slash notes 465, 1324, 1327 mutual exclusion groups 784 editing 791 N names drum sets 149 flow headings 534 flows 182, 183 graphic slices 570 groups 154, 1415 instrument filters 445 instruments.
Index notations (continued) tucking index 943 zoom options 41, 443 Notations toolbox 196 notches octave lines 940 pedal lines. See pedal retakes slurs 1350 ties 1461 note and rest colors 1107, 1332 changing 53 condensed music 687 cues 962 exporting 598, 610 hiding 439, 1107, 1539 inverting 53 notes out of range 53, 1107, 1420 printing 594, 610 rests 1332 tablature 1420 unison ranges 1413 voices 53, 1539 note brackets.
Index Note Spacing Change dialog 577 note spelling 260, 261 adding notes 478 automatic 261 disabling respelling 703 layouts 263 resetting 263 transposing 479 note tools popover 477 adding notes 255 transposing notes 256 note values.
Index notes (continued) guitar post-bends 355, 1173 guitar pre-bends 354, 1172 hammer-ons 1189 harmonics. See harmonics harp pedaling 1204–1206 hiding 1319 hiding ledger lines 1103 hiding stems 1125 horizontal spacing. See note spacing horn branch indicators 1030 inputting 214, 215, 218, 222, 225, 227, 233, 235, 248 Insert mode 233, 449 inverting 468, 469, 480 jazz articulations. See jazz articulations laissez vibrer ties 1468 ledger lines 1103 length 224 lines. See lines.
Index numbered bar regions (continued) position 1314 showing 1310 staff-relative placement 1313 systems 1310 numbers backups 103 bar repeats 1303, 1304 bars. See bar numbers beam lines 875 chord diagrams 717, 923, 924, 926 condensing 683, 1386, 1387 figured bass. See figured bass fingerings 1031 flows.
Index open strings 1127 appearance 1036 chord diagrams 717, 918, 926 harmonics 1127 pitches 137, 139 string indicators 1036 opening 70 auto-saved files 102 documentation 67 files 70, 102 flow heading editor 533 layouts 42 MIDI files 70, 85 MusicXML files 70 page template editor 518 projects 69–71, 102 tabs 44, 45 templates 69 video tutorials 67 video window 187 windows 48 optical spacing cross-staff beams 872 optimized staves 617–619. See also condensing optional notes. See bracketed noteheads.
Index ossia staves (continued) condensing 670, 1396 cues 417 deleting 1392 hiding 1399 moving 459, 463 padding 1398 playback 1396 preamble 1398 showing 1399 signposts 448, 1396 size 1397 staff labels 1400, 1401 staff spacing 617, 643 system objects 1405 vertical spacing 617, 642, 643 ottava lines. See octave lines outcomes.
Index page numbers (continued) count 554 flow headings 631, 1201 flows 554 font styles 1200 hiding 523, 631, 1201, 1202 horizontal alignment 1200 initial 628, 1201 moving 538, 625 numeral style 523, 1200 page templates 510 paragraph styles 1200 position on page 538 removing changes 525 sequence changes 522, 523 showing 631, 1202 size 1200 tokens 554 total 554 page ranges exporting 596, 597 flows 596, 597 printing 596, 597 selecting 603 page size 606, 607 changing 614 graphics files 598 layout options 698 M
Index pages (continued) rectangles. See frames. See also graphic slices resetting 627 setup 607 size. See page size staff spacing 650 swapping 530 templates 504, 517, 532 tokens 551 total number 554 turns. See frame breaks view options 38 Pages panel 492, 500 palettes.
Index parentheses (continued) thickness 913 time signatures 285, 288, 1487, 1490 trills 1136 vibrato bar dives and returns 1174 parenthesized chord symbols 911, 1108 capos 141, 898, 899 moving 915 padding 915 showing 912 single 912 size 913, 914 style 913 part formatting 688, 689 system formatting 688 part layouts. See layouts part names 175, 178 partial beams 875 capos 142–144 harp pedaling 1211 hiding. See erased backgrounds partials 1127, 1129 parts. See layouts pasting. See copying pataflafla.
Index pedal lines (continued) retakes. See pedal retakes signposts 448 splitting 1221 staff-relative placement 1220 start signs 1214, 1223, 1228 symbols 728 text 1228–1230 thickness 1227 types 368, 1213 pedal retakes 1214 alignment 1214 grace notes 1214 handles 1215 inputting 368, 373–376 notes 1214, 1220 pedal level 1218 position 1214 removing 1219 types 1216 pedals harp pedaling. See harp pedaling piano.
Index period (continued) subito 976 verse numbers 1092 Petaluma music font 708 phrases 670, 672 bar repeats 434, 1302 breath marks 1058 chord symbol regions 904 condensing 670, 672, 677 slurs 1342 splitting 676, 677 phrygian chord symbols 321, 907 scales 475, 482 piano 126 depressed notes. See bracketed noteheads dynamics. See dynamics hand marks. See lines level changes 1214, 1219 pedal lines. See pedal lines playback 1230 reduction. See reducing.
Index placement (continued) tucking index 943, 944 voices 1540 plain font 709, 710, 712, 1447 bar numbers 847 chord symbols 900 figured bass 1004 fingerings 928, 1017 multi-bar rests 1340 playing techniques 1232 string indicators 1034 tablature 1426 tempo marks 1434 time signatures 1495 tuplets 1517 Play mode 21 exporting expression maps 792 expression maps 775, 786 panels 36 percussion maps 793 playback 706 transport 32 unpitched percussion 1536 playback 799, 1407 accidentals 775 activating 30 arpeggio si
Index player labels 683, 684 backgrounds 686 changing 684, 685 default settings 684 engraving options 684 erased backgrounds 686 font 683, 1417 hiding 684, 1379, 1383 lines 686 moving 584 paragraph style 683, 1417 periods 684 position 683 separators 684 showing 684, 1379, 1383 signposts 684 staff labels 1371, 1376, 1382, 1386–1388 to indications 685 unisons 683, 685 word wrapping 686 player names 175 changing 177 groups.
Index playing techniques (continued) default settings 1233 deleting 454 design 740, 742 dialog 742, 800 divisi 1407 duplicating 740, 745, 1241 duration 431, 1239, 1241, 1245 editing 742 engraving options 1233 erased backgrounds 1234, 1235 expression maps 775, 776, 799 filter 428 font 1232 frame breaks 1237 grace notes 1233 grouping 1238, 1244, 1245 guitar. See guitar techniques. See also vibrato bar handles 1237, 1239, 1244 harmonics.
Index popovers (continued) figured bass 394, 397 fingerings 274, 276 glissando lines 342, 348 guitar techniques 342, 352, 355, 357, 359, 360, 362–364 harp pedaling 369 holds 335, 337 instrument filters 445 instruments.
Index preview (continued) playing techniques 740 print preview 35, 589 projects 73, 101 previous versions 71 primary bar number sequence 852 changing 853 returning to 855 primary beams 874 Print mode 21, 589 landscape orientation 603 page setup 607 panels 36, 589–591 portrait orientation 603 printers 602 switching 589 toolboxes 589 Print Options panel 589, 591 print preview area 35 navigation 35, 589 printers 602 selecting 594 printing 589, 594 annotations 610 arrangements 603 booklets 604 borders 610 comm
Index properties (continued) notations 692 notes 692 scope 692–694 searching 692 selected items 692 values 695 videos 185 Properties panel 692 disclosure arrow 38 Write mode 190 pulgar. See thumbs pull-offs.
Index regions bar repeats. See bar repeats bars. See numbered bar regions chord symbols. See chord symbol regions counts 1303, 1310, 1321 slashes 1315, 1320.
Index repeat jumps. See repeat markers repeat markers 1290 abbreviation 1291 appearance 1291 bar numbers 856–858 barlines 834, 1296 changing 434 coda symbols 1292 crosshairs 587 default settings 1291 deleting 454 engraving options 1291 filter 428 fonts 1291 hiding 1296 index 1293 inputting 404, 406, 410, 411 lines 1294 lower case 1291 MIDI recording 267 moving 459, 584 multiple 1293 multiple positions 1297, 1403, 1404 optional notes.
Index resetting (continued) systems 646, 655 tempo 1428 text 1451 transposition 175 trill intervals 1147 vertical spacing 649 voice order 1543 resolution changing 571, 599 images 608 rhythmic grid 38, 208 respelling accidentals 201, 260, 261, 263 chord symbols 141, 906, 907 key signatures 1067 notes 201, 243, 260, 261, 263, 473, 475, 482 notes in cues 952 rest grouping. See note grouping restating accidentals 813, 814 trill intervals 1136 restorative text 1230 restoring. See resetting.
Index rhythm slashes (continued) filter 428 font style 1306, 1321 frequency 1322 hiding rests 1319 highlights 1316 inputting 230, 406, 414 moving 459, 463, 1318 moving counts 584 panel 406 parentheses 1323 pasting notes into 457 percussion kits 149, 155, 235, 1326 pitch 230, 1327 placement 1324 playback 1327 popover 405, 414 regions 1315, 1321 rests 1319, 1330 rhythm dots 1317 splitting 1320 staff position 155, 1318 staff-relative placement 1324 stem direction 1123, 1317 stemless 209, 230 stems 1321 type 1
Index running headers (continued) hiding 631 page templates 510 runs guitar bends 1169, 1179 Russian cancellation naturals 1063 instrument names 55 S salzedo breath marks. See breath marks sample libraries. See sound libraries sampled trills 1151, 1152 disabling 1152 enabling 1152 Save As Project Template dialog 76 saving 67, 101 audio 94, 98, 99 auto-save.
Index searching (continued) notes 428, 429 playback options 706 preferences 56 properties 692 Second Viennese School accidental duration rule 813, 814 second voices adding 228 bar rests 244, 1335 secondary beams 874 changing 875 direction 875 lines 875 resetting 875 rests 878 splitting 863 secondary brackets 888, 890 appearance 885 braces 890 custom grouping 891, 893 default settings 885 deleting 895, 896 design 885 formatting 496 hiding 889 inputting 893 length 894 resetting 895, 896 showing 889 signposts
Index separators (continued) condensing 684 dynamics 310, 973 fingerings 1030 player numbers 684 ranges 846 staff labels 1378 systems. See system dividers time signatures 1479, 1487, 1490 timecodes 1280 septuplets. See tuplets sequences bar numbers 852–854 page numbers 522, 523, 628 rehearsal marks 1271 staff labels 127, 1379 subordinate 854 types 1272 sets drum sets. See drum sets page templates.
Index signposts (continued) harp pedaling 1204, 1207 hiding 439, 449 key signatures 281, 283, 1059 multi-bar rests 1341 note spacing changes 576 ossia staves 459, 463, 1396 percussion legends 1531 player labels 684 playing techniques 1236 printing 594, 610 showing 449 staff changes 1392 staves 459, 463 sub-brackets 893 system breaks 656, 659 tempo marks 1430, 1435, 1436 text 1457 time signatures 828, 1487, 1489, 1493, 1494 trills 1143–1146 tuplets 1511, 1515 silence hairpins.
Index size (continued) tablature 1426 tempo marks 1434 text 386, 558, 710, 712, 1451 ties 1471 time signatures 1484, 1486, 1495 unit of measurement 50 video window 188 sketch staves 108, 110 slants beams 866, 1050 octave lines 940, 941 pedal line hooks 1224 slash notation 1315 slash regions 1315 beaming 1321 chord symbols 901, 904, 1315 counts 1321, 1323 default settings 1317 deleting 454 engraving options 1317 filter 428 font style 1306 handles 431 hiding other notes 1319 hiding rests 1319 highlights 1315
Index slurs (continued) hiding 955 inputting 201, 273, 363, 1357 inverting 1344, 1354, 1355 large pitch ranges 1349 length 431, 1343 linking 459, 1359 MIDI import 91 MIDI recording 268 moving 459, 463, 1364 multi-segment 1362 nested 1346 nested slurs 1357 notehead brackets 1115 ornaments 1138 overlapping 1347, 1348 panel 195 placement 943, 1343–1345, 1347, 1354, 1355 playback 273, 706, 1370 position 943, 1342, 1343, 1345, 1347, 1354 pull-offs 363, 1188, 1189 ranges 1349 rotating 1364 segments.
Index spacing (continued) capos 141, 898, 899 chord diagrams 918, 921 chord symbols 898, 899, 903, 909–911, 915 clefs 931 condensing 633, 666 cross-staff beams 872 cues 574, 946 frame fullness 648 frets 137 galley view 39 gaps 574 grace notes 574 gradual dynamics 985 guitar bends 1176 key signatures 1060 layout options 698 lyrics 575, 577, 1077, 1079, 1081, 1083, 1084, 1087 notes. See note spacing percussion kits 156 punctuation 1079 rehearsal marks 1270 rests.
Index staff labels (continued) gaps 1372 grouping 153, 154, 1380, 1382, 1385, 1386 hiding 1372, 1374 indents 1374, 1405 instrument change labels 1379 instrument names 55, 153, 154, 175, 178, 179, 182, 552, 1372, 1375, 1376, 1388 italics 179, 712 language 55 length 1372, 1374, 1375 line breaks 1378 MusicXML import 1372 numbering 127, 1372, 1375, 1379, 1380, 1386, 1387 ossia staves 1400, 1401 paragraph styles 712, 1384 parentheses 1378 percussion 149, 153, 154, 1376, 1385, 1523, 1534 period 1375 player group
Index staff-relative placement (continued) rehearsal marks 1270 repeat markers 1297 resetting 438 slash region counts 1324 slurs 1355 string indicators 378–380, 1034, 1037 tapping 1192 text 436 trills 436 tuplet brackets 1512 start area 33 start position frames 652, 659 lines 1257 pages 652, 659 systems 652, 656 trills 1139 videos 187 start repeat barlines 304, 830, 832 counts.
Index staves (continued) rehearsal marks 1403, 1404 repeat endings 1403, 1404 repeat markers 1297 resetting barline joins 895 resetting bracket/brace grouping 895, 896 selecting 424 showing 49, 162, 166, 444, 445, 447, 448, 619–624, 1395 single-line 1276, 1281, 1283, 1385, 1389, 1523 size. See staff size slurs 1356, 1359 slurs linking 459 spacing. See staff spacing splitting 410, 411, 1290 staff labels. See staff labels stem direction 1121 stem length 1124 string indicators.
Index stop positions 449 adding 452 deleting 453 moving 452 stopped pitch 1127 Fretboard panel 203 harmonics 1131 stopping. See starting stopping finger. See left-hand fingering straight lines 1247 glissando lines 1163 guitar bends 1169 jazz articulations 1197 pedal lines 1213 stress marks. See articulations stretch lyrics 1083, 1084, 1087 note spacing 574 pages 618, 643 systems 581, 618, 632, 643 text 386, 558, 712, 715 strikethrough text 386, 558, 712, 715 string designation.
Index subdivision bars 882 tempo equations 1444 time signatures 285, 882, 1487, 1488 subito. See dynamic modifiers subordinate bar numbers 854 adding 854 appearance 856 subordinate page numbers 523 numeral style 522, 523 subscript chord symbols 898, 899 text 386, 558, 715 subsequent repeats bar numbers 856, 858 substitution fingering 1009 appearance 1009 handles 1010 lines 1009 position 1010 substitution font styles 710 subtitles 73, 530.
Index syncopation beat grouping 882 stemlets 878 system breaks 495, 612, 656 automatic 652, 654 bar repeats 652, 657 barlines 655, 834 clefs 931 condensing 670 copying to other layouts 688, 689 deleting 655, 659 divisi 1407 dynamics 979 filter 428 glissando lines 1167 hairpins 979 hiding staves 620 inserting 653, 654, 657 key signatures 1065 lines 1249, 1268 make into system 657 moving 655 octave lines 943 playing technique lines 1240 playing techniques 1237 repeat endings 1287 signposts 448, 656, 659 slur
Index systems (continued) make into system 657 moving 646, 649, 657, 660 numbered bar regions 1310 player labels. See player labels preamble 1398 rehearsal marks 1270 repeat barlines 834 resetting 655 sections 1290 selecting 423, 424 spacing. See system spacing splitting 1290 staff labels 1372, 1374, 1386, 1406 staff size 640 start position 583 text. See system-attached text timecodes 1281, 1283 tonality 1068 track. See system track trill marks 1140 vertical position.
Index tapping (continued) moving 584, 1192 percussion. See grace notes. See also tuplets plus sign 1189 popover 342 showing 1191 staff-relative placement 1192 tablature 1191 tasto solo 392, 394, 712, 994, 995 techniques 1232 combinations 786, 790 exclusion groups 784 expression maps 776 guitar 1185 percussion 793, 798, 1526, 1527 playback 786, 790, 799, 800 templates brackets 75 categories 69 ensembles 110, 113, 124, 125 flow headings 530, 532 new projects 67 pages.
Index text (continued) default settings 385, 717, 1453 distance from staff 584 divisi 1414, 1415, 1417, 1418 dynamics 975, 976, 980 Edit Font Styles dialog 710 editing 389, 557, 1433, 1447 editor. See text editor engraving options 385 erased backgrounds 1267, 1456 expressive 963, 975 filter 428 fingerings 1018 flow titles 183 formatting 67, 386, 558, 709, 712, 717, 1451 frames.
Index three quarters depressed pedal lines 1214, 1215, 1217, 1218 thru MIDI 264 thumbs 1020 fingerings 1020, 1026 inputting 278 popover 276, 278 tick barlines 304, 307, 309, 830, 832, 834 breath marks. See breath marks tie chains 1459 articulations 819, 1459 bracketed noteheads 1112 deleting 1469 glissando lines 1168 numbering bars.
Index time signatures (continued) default settings 1479 deleting 454 denominators 1478, 1479, 1487, 1489 design 1495 engraving options 1479 erased backgrounds 1496 filter 428 font styles 1495 formatting 728 hiding 1493, 1494 inputting 284, 285, 288, 290 Insert mode 233, 449, 450, 452, 703 interchangeable 1480, 1494 irregular 1480 large 1484 MIDI recording 264 moving 459, 463, 584, 1492, 1493 multi-bar rests 1339 multiple positions 1403, 1404 non-power of two 1480 note grouping 26, 861, 882 noteheads 1489 n
Index tonality systems (continued) importing 696, 1070 key signatures 767, 773, 774 octave divisions 770, 1068 panel 280, 283 playback 775 scale mapping 475, 482 tones intervals. See whole steps. See also pitch microtones. See microtones. See also quarter tones playback. See click tongue clicks. See playing techniques toolbar 30 hiding 30 transport options 30, 32 workspace options 30, 31 toolboxes 37 Engrave 493 Notations 190, 196 Notes 190, 191 tools 37 arranging. See arranging editing. See properties.
Index tremolo arm.
Index tucking index (continued) dynamics 964 lines 1252 lyrics 964 playing techniques 1238 string indicators 1238 tuning capos. See capos changing 108, 137, 139, 172 chord diagrams 921, 924–926 custom 137, 139, 140, 717, 919, 921 dialog 137 exporting 140 fretted instruments 108, 137, 141 guitar 108, 137, 141 importing 140 open pitches 139 strings 139 systems.
Index types (continued) repeat endings 404 repeat markers 404 resetting 437 rhythm slashes 1325 syllables 1073, 1074 templates 75 tempo marks 294, 297, 1428 text 1447 ties 1461 time signatures 285, 1480, 1487, 1490 tremolos 404, 405, 1497 tuplets 253, 1506 U ukulele. See fretted instruments una corda pedal 1213 appearance 1230 MIDI controller 1230 text 1230 uncompressed MusicXML 83 undamped. See playing techniques.
Index used chord diagrams 921 capos 148, 149 fingerings 923 user interface 29 colors 50–53 language 54, 62 transport options 32 windows 29 user name comments 485, 490 ut French staff labels 55 V value fields 695 values changing 695 frame rates 185 gradual tempo changes 1438 latency compensation 269 metronome marks 434, 1436–1439 notes.
Index vibrato bar (continued) handles 1181, 1183 inputting 354, 355, 357, 358, 362 intervals 1175, 1190 length 431 lines 362, 431, 1185, 1239 moving 584, 1181, 1183 playback 1174 position 1176 pre-dives.
Index voices (continued) deleting 1544 direction 1317 divider arrows 1414 divisi. See divisi. See also condensing drum sets 153 dynamics 313, 315, 974 fermatas 1054, 1056 filters 428 glissando lines 348, 349 grace notes 1044 hiding 1319 identifying 38, 1539 inputting 228, 248 Insert mode 233, 449 ledger lines 1103 merging 464 MIDI import 88, 91 MIDI recording 264, 267, 268 moving notes 463 notation options 1539 note spacing 581 octave lines 333, 334 order 701, 1542, 1543 overlapping 1540, 1542 parts.
Index width (continued) chord diagrams 929 columns 71 empty bars 827, 1334 enclosures 844, 1270 extra staves 1395 flared hairpins 983 frames 539, 564 graphic slices 568 graphics 724, 728, 742, 771 guitar bends 1176 H-bars 1336, 1339 hairpins 968, 979 keys 201 laissez vibrer ties 1468 ledger lines 804, 1103 line borders 1265 lines 632, 754 multi-bar rests 1339 note durations 574.
Index zones (continued) showing 43 Write mode 190, 195, 199–201, 203, 204, 692 zoom 38 bar repeats 1303 changing 443 chord symbols 905 cues 961, 962 lyrics 1086 numbered bar regions 1303 options 38, 41, 443 slash regions 1316 1659 Dorico Pro 4.1.
